Syed Ali Rizwan Structure Book PDF

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD
CHAPTER ONE
STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND
CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD
1.1.
STABILITY OF STRUCTURES:
Before deciding the determinacy or indeterminacy of a structure we should first of all have a structure
which is stable. The question of determinacy or indeterminacy comes next. We shall now discuss 2-D or
single plane structures. (Defined and accommodated in a single plane).
1.1.1. STABLE STRUCTURE:
A stable structure is the one, which remains stable for any conceivable (imaginable) system of loads.
Therefore, we do not consider the types of loads, their number and their points of application for deciding
the stability or determinacy of the structure. Normally internal and external stability of a structure should be
checked separately and if its overall stable then total degree of indeterminacy should be checked.
1.2.
ARTICULATED STRUCTURES:
This may be defined as A truss, or an articulated structure, composed of links or bars, assumed to be
connected by frictionless pins at the joints, and arranged so that the area enclosed within the boundaries of
the structure is subdivided by the bars into geometrical figures which are usually triangles.
1.3.
CONTINUOUS FRAME:
A continuous frame is a structure which is dependent, in part, for its stability and load carrying capacity
upon the ability of one or more of its joints to resist moment. In other words, one or more joints are more
or less rigid.
1.4.
DETERMINACY:
A statically indeterminate structure is the one in which all the reactive components plus the internal forces
cannot be calculated only from the equations of equilibrium available for a given force system.These
equations, of course, are
H = 0, V = 0 and M = 0
The degree of indeterminacy for a given structure is, in fact , the excess of total number of reactive
components or excess of members over the equations of equilibrium available.
It is convenient to consider stability and determinacy as follows.
a)
With respect to reactions, i.e. external stability and determinacy.
b)
With respect to members, i.e. internal stability and determinacy.
c)
A combination of external and internal conditions, i.e. total stability and determinacy.
THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES
1.4.1. EXTERNAL INDETERMINACY:

A stable structure should have at least three reactive components, (which may not always be sufficient) for
external stability of a 2-D structure, which are non-concurrent and non-parallel.
Fig. 1.1. Stable & determinate.
000
Fig. 1.2. Stable & determinate.

External indeterminacy is, in fact, the excess of total number of reactive components over the equations of
equilibrium available.
=5
Fig. 1.3.
No. of reactions possible = 5
No. of Equations of equilibrium available = 3
Degree of External indeterminacy = 5 3 = 2
=6
Fig. 1.4
Stable & Indeterminate to 2nd degree. (Fig. 1.3)
Fig. 1.4. Stable & externally indeterminate to 3rd degree.
Fig. 1.5.
=4
Stable & Indeterminate to Ist degree. (Fig. 1.5)
1 + 2
Fig. 1.6.
2=8
Stable & externally indeterminate to 5th degree. (Fig. 1.6)

Remove any five suitable redundant reactions to make it statically determinate.
1.4.2.
INTERNAL INDETERMINACY:
This question can be decided only if the minimum number of reactive components necessary for
external stability and determinacy are known and are acting on the structure. This type of
indeterminacy is normally associated with articulated structures like trusses. We assume that the
structure whose internal indeterminacy is being checked is under the action of minimum reactive
components required for external stability at the supports.
The basic form of the truss is a triangle.
To make the truss, add two members and one joint and repeat.
Fig 1.7
Let us assume that
j = Total number of joints.
b = Total number of bars.
r = Minimum number of reactive components
required for external stability/determinacy.
b + r
total number of
unknowns.
2j
total number of
equations available (at joints).
1.
If
b+r = 2j
Stable & internally determinate. Check the arrangement of

members also.
2.
If
b+r > 2j
Stable & internally indeterminate.

(degree of indeterminacy would be
decided by the difference of these
two quantities).
3.
If
b+r < 2j
Unstable.
A structure is said to have determinacy or indeterminacy only if it is stable. Now we consider some
examples.
y
9
11
x
10
Fig. 1.8.
b = 11
r = 3
(Minimum external reactions required for external stability/determinacy)
j = 7
b + r = 2j
11 + 3 = 2 7
14 =
14
This truss of fig. 1.8 is stable and internally determinate.
7 9 11
10
Fig. 1.9.
b = 15
r = 3
j = 9
b + r = 2j
15 + 3 = 2 9
18 = 18
12
13
14
15
The truss of fig. 1.9 is stable and internally determinate.

4
15
12
10
14
16
18
11
2
17
13
Fig. 1.10.
b = 18
r = 3
j = 10
b + r = 2j
18 + 3 = 2 10
21 > 20
This truss of fig. 1.10 is stable & internally indeterminate to 1st degree.
2
10
13
17
14
12
11
16
15
Fig. 1.11.
b = 16
r = 3
j = 10
b + r = 2j
17 + 3 = 2 10
20 = 20
This truss is Unstable by inspection although the criterion equation is satisfied. The members in
indicated square may get displaced and rotated due to gravity loads.
Always inspect member positions. Insert one member in the encircled box or manage prevention of
sliding by external supports to make it stable.
NOTE:- The difference between the internal and the external indeterminacy is only in the definition of r
1.4.3.
TOTAL INDETERMINACY
The question of total indeterminacy is of little interest and we have got different equations for
different types of structures. For example, the previous equation, i.e., b + r = 2 j can be used to
check the total degree of indeterminacy of an articulated structure like truss by slightly modifying
the definition of r which should now be considered as the total number of reactive
components available.
b + r = 2j
where
b = Total number of bars.

r = Total number of reactive components available.
j = Total number of joints
Example No. 1: Determine the external and internal conditions of stability and determinateness for the
following structures:-
3
9
4
7
Fig. 1.12
(i)
External Stability And Determinacy:Number of reactive components available = 2

Number of equations of equilibrium available = 3
(ii)
Unstable. (Visible also)
Internal Stability And Determinacy

b = 9
r = 3
j = 6
b + r = 2j
9 + 3 = 26
12 = 12
Degree of Indeterminacy = D = 12 12 = 0
Stable and Internally Determinate, if arrangement is improved to have = 3.
Example No. 2:
Link
Fig. 1.13.
* In this case the presence of a pin at each end of the link makes one additional type of movement
possible if reaction components are removed. Two condition equations are therefore provided by
the link in terms of algebraic sum of moments equal to zero at the joints of link.
External Stability and Determinacy.
Number of reactive components = 5
*
Number of equations of equilibrium available = 3 + 2 = 5

Degree of indeterminacy = 5 5 = 0
Stable and Externally Determinate. (Structure of fig. 1.13.)
Example No. 3:
2
1
14
11
7
8
13
12
4
15
3
18
19
22
9
16
17
5
10
21
20
6
00
(i)
(ii)
Fig. 1.14.
External Stability and Determinacy:
Number of reactions = 3
Number of equations = 3
D=33= 0
Externally Stable and Determinate
Internal Stability and Determinacy:b = 22
r = 3
j = 11
b + r = 2j
D = (b+r)2j
= ( 22 + 3 ) ( 2 11 )
= 25 22
D = 3
where D = Degree of indeterminacy.
Stable and indeterminate to 3rd degree.
Example No. 4:
Continuous frame
Fig. 1.15.
External Stability and Determinacy:Number of reactions = 9
D = 93= 6
Stable and Indeterminate to 6th degree. (fig. 1.15).
Example No. 5:
2
6
(i)
(ii)
Fig 1.16
External Stability And Determinacy :Number of reactions = 6
Degree of indeterminacy = 6 3 = 3
Stable and externally Indeterminate to 3rd degree.
Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 6
r = 3, where r is the minimum reactive components required for external
j = 6 stability and determinacy.
Degree of indeterminacy of rigid jointed structure. (Fig. 1.16)
D = (3b + r ) 3 j
D = (36+3)(36)
D = 21 18
D = 3
Example No. 6:
(i)
External Stability and Determinacy :4

21
20
3
5
19
17
18
15
16
2
13
12
11
14
10
9
Fig. 1.17.
(ii)
D = 43= 1
Stable and indeterminate to Ist degree.

r = 3
j = 11
D= (b+r)2j
= ( 21 + 3 ) 2 11
D = 24 22 = 2
Stable and indeterminate to 2nd degree.
Note:
In case of a pin jointed structure, there is one unknown per member and in case of rigid jointed
structure there are three unknowns at a joint.
Example No. 7:
oo
Fig. 1.18.
(i)
External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 3

D = 33=0
Stable and Determinate.
(ii)

r = 3
j = 20
D= (b+r)2j
= (38 + 3) 2 20
= 41 40
D = 1
Stable and indeterminate to Ist degree. (Fig. 1.18)
Example No. 8:
oo
Fig. 1.19.
10
(i)

D = 33 =0
(ii)

r = 3
j = 25
b+r = 2j
54 + 3 > 2 25
57 > 50
D = 57 50 = 7
Stable and indeterminate to 9th degree. (Fig. 1.19)
Example No. 9:
1
2
14
10
7
3
8
4
11
15
16
12
18
6
13
5
9
17
19
Fig. 1.20.
(i)
(ii)

D = 12 3 = 9
Stable and indeterminate to 9th degree.
r = 3
j = 16
D = (3b+r) =3j
= ( 3 19 + 3 ) = 3 16
= 60 > 48
D = 60 48 = 12
Stable and Internally Indeterminate to twelfth degree. (Fig. 1.20)
Example No. 10:

10
9
11
8
Fig. 1.21.
(i)
External Stability and Determinacy :-
(ii)
D = 63=3
Stable and Indeterminate to 3rd degree.
Internal Stability and Determinacy : b
r
j
D
= 11
= 3
= 9
= (3b+r) 3j
= ( 3 11 + 3 ) 3 9
= 36 27
D = 9
Example No. 11:
10
3
8
Fig. 1.22.
11
12
(i)

D = 63= 3
(ii)

r = 3
j = 9
D= (3b+r)3j
= ( 3 10 + 3 ) 3 9
D = 33 27
D= 6
Example No. 12:
12
13
6
14
oo
11
7
8
10
oo
Fig. 1.23.
(i)
(ii)

Unstable Externally. (Visible also)
Internal Stability and Determinacy :-
b = 14
r = 3
j = 8
D= (b+r)2j
= ( 14 + 3 ) 2 8
D= 1
Stable and Internal Indeterminacy to Ist degree.
13
Example No. 13:

W
6
3
M=0
12
10
11
15
14
16
17
13
19
20
18
2
Fig. 1.24.
(i)

Number of equations = 3 + 1 = 4
D= 44 =0
r = 4 (Note this. A roller at either support will create instability)
j = 12
(b+r)= 2j
( 20 + 4) = 2 12
24 = 24
D = 24 24 = 0
(Here minimum r is 4 for internal stability and determinacy.)
Stable and determinate.
(ii)
Example No. 14:
12
11
15
14
26
27
22
16
17
19
M=0
r=1
25
21 23
20
18
W
M=0
r=1
13
10
8
24
31
29
28
33
36
34 35
37
38 39 40
41
42
Fig. 1.25.
30
43
32
14
(i)

Number of equations = 3 + 2 = 5
D= 65 = 1
Stable and Indeterminate to Ist degree.
(ii)

r = 3 + 2 = 5 (take notice of it). Two pins where M = 0
j = 24
b + r = 2j
43 + 5 = 2 24
48 = 48
D = 48 48 = 0
Stable and Determinate. (Fig. 1.25)
Example No. 15:
M=0
M=0
M=0
M=0
M=0
Fig. 1.26.
(i)

Number of equations = 8 = (3 + 5)
D = 88=0
(ii)

r = 3 + 5 = 8. There are 5 joints where M = 0
j = 25
b + r = 2j
42 + 8 = 2 25
50 = 50
D
= 50 50 = 0
15
Example No. 16:

2 16
15
14
13
12
8
1
11
10
7
6
oo
(i)
External Stability and Determinacy :-
(ii)
D = 43 = 1
Internal Stability and Determinacy :-
oo
b = 16
r = 3
j = 9
D= (b+r)2j
= ( 16 + 3 ) 2 9
= 19 18
D= 1
In the analysis of statically determinate structures, all external as well as internal forces are completely
known by the application of laws of statics.Member sizes do not come into the picture as no compatibility
requirements are to be satisfied. However, in the analysis of indeterminate structures we should have
member sizes, sectional and material properties before doing the analysis as member sizes would be
involved in the determination of deflections or rotations which are to be put in compatibility equations
afterwards. Now we discuss methods for finding deflection and rotations.
1.5.
METHODS FOR FINDING DEFLECTION AND ROTATION;Usually following methods are used in this classical analysis of structures..
--Unit - load method.
(Strain energy method).
--Moment - area method.
--Conjugate beam method (a special case of moment - area method).
1.5.1.
MOMENT AREA THEOREM (1) ;The change of slope between tangents drawn at any two points on the elastic curve of an originally
straight beam is equal to the area of the B.M.D between these two points when multiplied by 1/EI
(reciprocal of flexural stiffness),
16
Elastic curve
A
1 (Area of B.M.D.
AB= --EI
between A & B)
Tangent at A
AB
1 (AREA)
AB= --AB
EI
Tangent at B
Signs of Change of Slope:-
Elastic curve
Tangent at A
AB
Tangent at B
AB
Elastic curve
Tangent at A
A
Fig 2.1(a)
Tangent at B
Fig 2.1 (b)
(a)
Positive change of slope, AB is counterclockwise from the left tangent. (Fig. 2.1a)
(b)
Negative change of slope, AB is clockwise from the left tangent. (Fig. 2.1b)
1.5.2.
MOMENT AREA THEOREM (2) :The deviation of any point on elastic curve from the tangent drawn at some other point on the
1
elastic curve is equal to
multiplied by the moment of the area of the bending moment diagram
EI
between these two points. The moment may generally be taken through a point where deviation is
being measured.
A
Elastic curve.
t BA = Deviation of point B w.r.t

t BA = 1 (Area) X
AB B
EI
Fig 2.2
tangent at A
AB
tangent at A
tangent at B
1.5.3.
17
SIGN CONVENTION FOR DEVIATIONS:A
t BA=Deviation of point B on elastic curve w.r.t.

tangent at point A on elastic curve
Fig 2.2
(a)
Positive deviation
tangent at A
t BA=Deviation of point B on elastic curve w.r.t.
tangent at point A on elastic curve
Elastic curve
Fig 2.2 (b) Negative deviation
(a) Positive Deviation:-
B located above the reference tangent. (Tangent at A; Fig. 2.2a)
(b) Negative Deviation:- B located below the reference tangent. (Tangent at A; Fig. 2.2b)
1.5.4.
INEQUALITY OF tBA AND tAB

Depending upon loading, these two deviations tab and tba may not be equal if loading is
unsymmetrical about mid span of the member.
Elastic curve
A
AB
BA
t
Reference tangent at B
AB
BA
Reference tangent at A
Fig. 2.3
1.6.
BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAM BY PARTS:

In order to compute deviations and change of slope by moment area method, bending moment
diagram may be drawn in parts i.e. one diagram for a particular load starting from left to right.
Same sign convention would be followed for bending moment and shear force as have been
followed in subjects done earlier. Bending moment would be positive if elastic curve resembles
sagging i.e. compression at top fibers and tension at the bottom fibers while shear force would be
18
positive at a section of a portion being considered as a free body when left resultant force acts
upwards and right resultant force acts downwards. Negative bending moment and shear force
would be just opposite to this.
1.6.1.
SIGN CONVENTIONS FOR SHEAR FORCE AND BENDING MOMENT

L
Compression
Positive Shear Force
Positive B.M.
Tension
L R
Tension
Negative Shear Force

Negative B.M.
Compression
R
L
L R
Fig 2.4
Consider the following loaded beam. Start from faces on LHS and move towards RHS. Construct
BMS due to all forces encountered treating one force at a time only.
P1
P2
B
oo
Ra
Rb
L/4
L/4
L/2
B.M.D. due to Ra = Ra x L
+
-
B.M.D. due to P1
3 L
P1 x --4
-
B.M.D. due to P
2
L
P2 x --2
B.M.D. due to U.D.L.
(L/2) = ___
W x (L/2) x ___
WL2
2
We observe that the moment effect of any single specified loading is always some variation of the general
equation. Like
(1)
y = kXn
19
This Relationship has been plotted below. While drawing bending moment diagrams by parts and starting
from left, for example, Ra is acting at A. Imagine that Ra is acting while support at A has been removed and
beam is fixed adequately at B ( just like a cantilever support), the deflected shape whether sagging or
hogging will determine the sign of B.M.D. Similar procedure is adopted for other loads.
where k = constant
n = degree of
curve of
B.M.D
n
y=kX
h
y
i.e. y=PX
k=P, n=1
2
y = wx
k = w/2, n=2
2
y
X
X
dx
b
Fig. 2.6
Generalized variation of B.M. w.r.t. x
In general
X =
Xd A
A
Area of the strip = ydX = kXn dX
by putting value of y.
Total area
= A = kXn dX
o
n+1 b
kX
A =
n + 1 o
A =
Kb(n+1)
(n + 1)
We want to find the total area under the curve in terms of b and h and for that the constant k has to be
evaluated from the given boundary conditions.
At X = b ,
Put this in (1) ,
we get
or
y = h
y = kX n
h = kb n
h
k = n Put this in equation for A above.
b
20

h bn+1
b (n+1)
A =
Simplifying
h bn . b
bn (n+1)
So
A=
bh
(n+1)
(2)
Now its centroid would be determined with reference to fig. 2.6..
X =
X Ad A
X (ydX)
A
X kXA dX
Put y= kXn
k Xn+1 dX
A
o
Now put k=
h
bh
and A=
we have
bn
(n+1)
h/bn (X)n+1 dX
bh/(n+1)
o
h (Xn+1) dX(n+1)
hbn+1
o
simplifying step by step
(n + 1)
Xn+1dX
b n+1 o
b
(n + 1) Xn+2
b n+1 (n+2)o
(n + 1) bn+2
=
b n+1 (n+2)
(n + 1) bn+1 . b
=
.
b (n+1)
(n+2)
b (n+1)
X = (n+2)
__
(3)
X is the location of centroid from zero bending moment

From above figure 2.6, we have
X + X =
= b
= b
X
b (n + 1)
(n + 2)
Simplify
21
b (n + 2) b (n + 1)
(n + 2)
bn + 2b bn b
(n + 2)
X =
b
(n+2)
(4)
This gives us the location of centroid from the ordinate of B.M.D
A=
bh
(n+1)
(2)
Note:- While applying these two formulae to calculate the deflection and the rotation by moment area
method and with diagrams by parts, it must be kept in mind that these two relationship assume zero
slope of the B.M. Diagram at a suitable point. It may not be applied to calculate A & X within
various segments of the B.M.D where this condition is not satisfied. Apply the above equations for
area and centroid to the following example.
Tangent of elastic curve at A.
ab
Cantilever under u.d.l
Elastic curve
L
L
x = --4
0
(-)
B.M.D
2nd degree curve

Fig 2.7
WL2
2
3
A = WL
6
22
Tangent at A on
Elastic curve.
A
a
= t AB
ab
Eleastic
curve
A
B.M.D
PL
X = 2/3L
X = L/3
Fig. 2.8
(ve) sign in the deflection of diagram below does not mean that area is (ve) but ordinate of BMD is
(ve). For loads the fig. 2.7.
a =
1
3L
A
EI
4
1 -WL3 3L
EI 6
4
WL4
8EI
1.7.
FIRST THEOREM OF CONJUGATE BEAM METHOD :

In simple words the absolute slope at any point in the actual beam is equal to the shear force at the
M
corresponding point on the conjugate beam which is loaded by
diagram due to loads on actual
EI
beam.
1.7.1.
SECOND THEOREM OF CONJUGATE BEAM METHOD :The absolute deflection at any point in the actual beam is equal to the B.M at the corresponding
M
point on the conjugate beam which is loaded by
diagram.
EI
The reader is reminded to draw conjugate beams for actual beams under loads very carefully by
giving due consideration to support conditions of actual beam. In general for a fixed and free end
of actual beam, the corresponding supports would be free and fixed in conjugate beam
respectively. Deflection at any point on actual beam is associated with the bending moment at
corresponding point on conjugate beam while rotation at any point on actual beam is associated
with shear force at corresponding point on conjugate beam. At an actual hinge support is equal
to zero and is there indicating non development of moment at the support (Shear force present,
23
bending moment zero). The corresponding support conditions in conjugate beam would be such
where bending moment is zero and shear force may be there i.e., a hinge is indicated. See the
following example.
EXAMPLE :-
Calculate the central deflection by the conjugate beam method:
P
L/2
EI=Constt.
Actual beam
under load
C
PL/4
P/2
P/2
+
1
A = --- x L x PL
--2
4EI
2
PL
= ---8EI
B.M.D/EI
PL/8EI
PL
a = b = ----2
16EI
Conjugate beam
under M/EI diagram
as a load
+
A/
B/
L/6
PL2
16EI
PL2
16EI
PL
16EI
2
PL2
16EI
Fig. 2.9
C = Mc
C
1.8.
PL2 L PL2
L

(considering forces on LHS of

16EI 2 16EI 6
PL3
PL3 3PL3 PL3 2EPL3
=
=
=
point C of shaded area)
32EI 96EI
96EI
96EI
3
PL
=
48EI
=
STRAIN ENERGY :The energy stored in a body when it undergoes any type of deformation (twisting, elongation,
shortening & deflection etc.) under the action of any external force is called the strain energy. If
this strain energy is stored in elastic range it is termed as elastic strain energy. All rules relating to
strain energy apply. The units of strain energy are the same as that of the work i.e., joule (N mm,
N m).
24
1.8.1.
TYPES OF STRAIN ENERGY
:-
1.8.1.1 STRAIN ENERGY DUE TO DIRECT FORCE :-
L
P
P
AE = Axial Stiffness
Fig. 2.10
Work done by a gradually increased force P is equal to area of load deflection diagram = P/2 .
(From graph)
Stress Strain
(Hookes Law)
So
f = Constt .
so
f = E.
P
= E
A
L
PL
1
=
Strain energy will be P from above. So putting it we have.
AE
2
P PL
U =
, where U is the internal strain energy stored.
2 AE
2
PL
U =
(for single member)
2AE
2
PL
U =
(for several members subjected to axial forces)
2AE
1.8.1.2. STRAIN ENERGY DUE TO BENDING, SHEAR FORCE AND TORSION :L

M2 dX
(1)
U =
.
This is elastic strain energy stored due to bending.
O 2 EI
L
Q2 ds
(2) Strain Energy Due to shear force:- U =
where Q is shear force and G is shear modulus
O 2AG
25
T2 ds
(Consult a book on strength of Materials). Where
O 2GJ
T is Torque and J is polar moment of inertia.
(3) Strain Energy Due to Torsion:- U =
1.9.
CASTIGLIANOS THEOREM :In 1879, Castigliano published two theorems connecting the strain energy with the deformations
and the applied loads.
1.9.1
CASTIGLIANOS FIRST THEOREM :The partial derivative of the total strain energy stored with respect to a particular deformation
gives the corresponding force acting at that point.
Mathematically
M
and
U
= P
Where U is strain energy stored in bending
U
= M.
Here is connected with loads and with moment.
1.9.2.
CASTIGLIANOS SECOND THEOREM :The partial derivative of the total strain energy stored with respect to a particular force gives the
corresponding deformation at that point.
Mathematically,
U
=
P
and
1.10.
U
=
M
Here is connected with loads and with moment.
CONSISTENT DEFORMATION METHOD :This method may be termed as redundant force method or simply a force method. In this method,
the statically indeterminate structure is idealized as a basic determinate structure under the action
of applied loads plus the same structure under the action of redundant forces considered one by
one. The deformations produced at the points of redundancy are calculated in the above-mentioned
basic determinate structures and then these calculated deformations are put into compatibility
requirement for the structure. Normally these are satisfied at a joint.
26
Now for a given beam, various possible Basic determinate structures (BDS) would be given. A
clever choice of BDS for a given structure can reduce the amount of time and labour.
1. First
alternative
is present
is present
An indeterminate structure can be made determinate in several ways and the corresponding
quantities may be calculated very easily. However, we will notice that a clever choice of making a basic
determinate structure will reduce the time of our computations tremendously. In Figs. 2.11 and 2.12 various
options regarding choice of BDS are given while Figs. 2.13 and 2.14 illustrate how to make conjugate beam
for a given beam using the guidelines stated earlier. Consider another loaded beam in Fig. 2.15.
27
P
A
Ma
Ra
Fig. 2.15
Rb has been chosen

as redundant.
B
Basic determinte structure
under applied loads only.
B/
Fig. 2.15 a
where B is the deflection at point B due to the applied loads.

1
B
A
B.D.S. under unit
redundant force at B.
bb
Fig. 2.15 b
So compatibility of deformation at B requires that

B + Rb bb = 0
(Deflection Produced by loads Plus that by redundant should
where B = Deflection at B due to applied loads in a BDS.
be equal to zero at point B)
bb = deflection at B due to redundant at B in a BDS.
B
or
Rb =
(sign is self-adjusting)
bb
P
A
Ma has been
considered as
redundant force.
Fig. 2.16
a = Slope at point. A due to applied loads only in a BDS.

The other option of a simple beam as BDS is shown in fig. 2.16.
28
a a
M=1
B.D.S. under unit redundant moment at A.

where aa = slope at A due to unit redundant moment at A.
Fig 2.16a
a + Ma . aa = 0
Compatibility equation
(Slope created by loads + slope created by redundant

moment should be zero)
a
aa
In consistent deformation method (force method ), there are always as many conditions of geometry as is
the number of redundant forces.
Ma =
or
1.11.
Example No. 1:- Analyze the following beam by the force method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams.
SOLUTION :P
Ma
L/2
L/2
A
EI = Constt.
Rb
Ra
Fig2.17
Degree of Indeterminacy = 3 2 = 1
Indeterminate to Ist degree.
SOLUTION: (1) Chose cantilever as a basic determinate structure.
1
P
L/2
L/2
EI = Constant
Fig 2.17a
B.D.S. under applied loads.
B
B
bb
Fig 2.17b
bb=Deflection of point B due to unit load at B

B.D.S. under unit redundant
force at B.
29
Therefore, now compatibility requirement is

B + Rb bb = 0
( Deflection created by actual loads + deflection

created by redundant Rb should be equal to zero at support B)
B
(1)
bb
Therefore, determine these deflections B and bb in equation (1) either by moment area method
or by unit load method.
or
Rb =
1.11.1. DETERMINE B AND bb BY MOMENT - AREA METHOD :P
L/2
L/2
PL
2
B
B
EI = Constant
PL
PL2
Area of BMD = 1 x L x
2 = 8
2
2
BDS under
applied loads
BMD due to
applied loads.
PL/8
PL/2
L/6
L/3
L/2
I PL2 L L
+
EI 8 2 3
I PL2 5L
=
EI 8
6
3
5PL
=
48EI
I
A
B
bb
Fig 2.18 a
o
1 xLxL
=
2
L2
2
2/3 L
L=Lx1
bb =
BDS under unit

redundant at B
I L2 2L

EI 2
3
BMD due
Unit redundant
30
bb =
L3
3EI
, Putting B and bb in equation (1)
5PL2
48EI
L
By putting B and bb in compatibility equation
/ 3EI
Rb =
=
5PL3
3EI
3
48EI
L
5P
16
The ( ve) sign with Rb indicates that the direction of application of redundant force is actually
5P
upwards and the magnitude of redundant force Rb is equal to
. Apply evaluated redundant at point B.
16
P
Ma =
3PL
16
L/2
L/2
x
5P
16
11P
16
Fig. 2.19
fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P
Ra = P Rb = P
Direction of applied moment at A =
5P
11P
=
. Now moment at A can be calculated.
16
16
5P
L
5PL PL
LP. =
16
2
16
2
5PL 8PL
16
3 PL
16
3 PL
indicates that the net applied moment about A is clockwise. Therefore, the
16
reactive moment at the support should be counterclockwise (giving tension at top). Apply loads and
evaluate redundant on the given structure.
The (ve) sign with
Ma = 3PL
16
L/2
L/2
Rb = 5P
16
EI = Constant
11P
16
11P
16
+
0
S.F.D
5P
16
5PL
32
+
0
0
(-ve) B.M
3PL
16
X=
B.M.D
8
L
11
Fig. 2.20
LOCATION OF POINT OF CONTRAFLEXURE :MX
5 PX
L
P X = 0
16
2
5 PX
PL
PX +
= 0
16
2
11PX
PL
+
= 0
16
2
PL
11PX
=
2
16
X=
8L
11
Note:- In case of cantilever, moment area method is always preferred because slope is absolute
everywhere.
P
A
L/2
L/2
EI = Constant
Elastic curve
Fig. 2.21
31
32
Solution: (2) As a second alternative, Chose Simply Supported Beam as a basic determinate structure.
BDS under
loads
BDS under
unit redundant
Fig. 2.21a
B.M.D due
to unit redundant
moment at A
Fig. 2.21b
diagram on
conjugate beam
L
2
L/3EI
(by 1st moment
area theorem)
Fig. 2.21c
Fig 2.21d
L
3EI
PL2
a
=
(by 1st moment area theorem)
16EI
For fixed end, there is no rotation. Therefore compatibility equation becomes
a + Ma aa = 0
(slope at A created by loads + slope at A created
a
So
Ma
=
by redundant should be zero).
aa
a & aa are the flexibility coefficients. Putting these in compatibility equation
PL2 3EI
we have,
Ma
=
16EI L
3PL
Ma
=
16
The (ve) sign with Ma indicates that the net redundant moment is in opposite direction to that
assumed. Once Ma is known, Ra and Rb can be calculated.
3PL
P
16
L/2
L/2
B
A
EI = Constant
aa
Rb= 5P
16
Ra= 11P
16
Fig. 2.22
33
To calculate Rb, Ma = 0
Rb L P
PL
3PL
2
16
Rb L =
8 PL 3 PL
16
=
Rb L =
L
3PL
+
= 0
2
16
5PL
16
Rb =
5P
16
fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P
= P
Ra = P Rb
so
5P
16
Ra =
11P
16
Note:- In case of simply supported beam, conjugate beam method is preferred for calculating slopes and
deflections.
1.12. Example No. 2:-
Analyze the following beam by the force method. Draw S.F. and B.M. diagrams.
SOLUTION :-
WKN/m
Ma
A
Mb
B
EI = Constant
L
Ra
No. of reactions = 4
No. of equations = 2
Degree of Indeteminacy = 4 - 2 = 2
Indeterminate to 2nd degree.
Rb
Fig. 2.23
Choosing cantilever with support at A as BDS. Vertical reaction at B and moment at B will be
redundants. To develop compatibility equations at B regarding translation and rotation at B, we imagine the
BDS under applied loads and then under various redundants separately.
34
WKN/m
B
B
B
tangent at B
Fig. 2.23a B.D.S under loads
1
B
+
A
EI = con
st
bb
ant
bb
Fig. 2.23b B.D.S. under redundant unit

vertical force at B
A
EI=con
sta
nt
bb
B
bb
Fig. 2.23c B.D.S. under unit redundant

moment at B
Compatibility Equations
B + Vb bb + Mb bb = 0
(1) For vertical displacement at B
B + Vb bb + Mb bb = 0
(2) For redundant moment at B
Notice that rotation produced by Unit load at B ('bb) and deflection produced by unit moment of B ('bb)
are denoted by dash as superscript to identify them appropriately.
In matrix form
bb
bb
bb
bb
Structure flexibility Column vector

matrix.
of redundants.
Vb = bb
Mb
bb
Vb = - B
Mb
- B
Column vector of
flexibility coefficients.
bb
bb
- B
- B
Now we evaluate B, b, bb, 'bb, 'bb and bb with the help of moment area theorems
separately, where = Deflection at B in BDS due to applied loads
b = Rotation at B in BDS due to applied loads.
WKN/m
WL2
2 A
WL
L
B.D.S. under loads
Fig. 2.24a
B.M.S. due to
applied loads.
3L
4
X = L/4
B.M.D
3
WL
2
WL
6
Calculate area of BMD and fix its centroid
A =
bh
L ( WL2)
WL3
=
=
(n+1)
6
(2+1)
b = width of BMD.
h = ordinate of BMD.
X =
b
L
L
=
=
n+2
(2 + 2)
4
By applying second theorem of moment area, we have
B =
1 WL3 3
WL4
L =
EI 6
4
8EI
b =
1 WL3
WL3
=
EI 6
6EI
35
36
1
B
A
L
Fig. 2.24b
B.M.D. due to unit redundant force at B
1 x L x L = L2
2
2
2L/3
L/3
B.D.S. under unit redundant force at B.
bb
1 L2 2
L3
L =
; bb = Deflection at B due to unit redundant at B
EI 2 3
3EI
bb
1 L2
L2
=
EI 2
2EI
bb = Rotation at B due to unit redundant at B
bb
bb
L
Fig. 2.24c B.D.S under unit redundant
moment at B
Lx1=L
L/2
0
1
1
bb
1
L
L2
L =
EI
2
2EI
bb
1
L
L =
EI [ ]
EI
B.M.D
37
Normally BMDs are plotted on the compression side of beam.

Putting values in first equation, we have
WL4
L3
L2
Vb
Mb = 0
8EI
3EI
2EI
(1)
multiply by 24 and simplify to get

equation (3)
or
Putting values in second equation, we have

WL3
Vb x L2
L x Mb
= 0
EI
6EI
2EI
(2)
3 WL4 8 L3 Vb 12 L2 Mb = 0
(3)
3 WL4
+ 8 L3 Vb + 12 L2
WL3
or WL3
3 L2
3 L2
equation (4)
Mb = 0
(3)
Vb 6 L Mb = 0
Vb
multiply by 6 and simplify to get
(4)
+ 6 L Mb = 0
(4)
Multiply (4) by 2 L & subtract (4) from (3)

3 WL4
+ 8 L3
Vb + 12 L2 Mb = 0
(3)
2 WL4
+ 6 L3
Vb + 12 L2
(4)
WL4
WL4
Vb
Mb = 0
+ 2 L3 Vb = 0
= 2 L3 Vb
WL4
=
2L3
Vb =
WL
2
The (ve) sign with Vb shows that the unit redundant load at B is in upward direction.( Opposite
to that assumed and applied)
Putting the value of Vb in (3)
3 WL4
or
+ 8 L3
WL + 12 L2 Mb = 0
2
3 WL4 4 WL4 + 12 L2 Mb = 0
WL4 = 12 L2 Mb
WL4
Mb =
12L2
Mb =
WL2
12
The ( +ve) sign with Mb indicates that the assumed direction of the unit redundant moment at B
is correct. Now apply the computed redundants at B and evaluate and apply reactions at A.
38
WKN/m
Ma= WL
12
Va=WL/2
Mb= WL
12
Vb=WL/2
Fig. 2.25
WL2
24
0
B.M.D
WL2
12
WL2
12
0.789 L
0.211L
0.578L
Points of Contraflexure : B as origin :Mx
write moment expression

=
WL
WL2
WX2
X
= 0
2
12
2
Multiply by
12
and re-arrange.
W
6 X2 6 LX + L2 = 0
X
= +
6L
6L
6L
36 L2 4 6 L2
26
36 L2 24 L2
12
12 L2
12
6L 2 3 L2
12
6 L 3.464 L
12
0.211L
9.464 L
12
2.536 L
12
= 0.789 L
0.211 L
=
X
39
Location of point of contraflexure

From both ends.
X = 0.211 L
Same can be done by taking A as origin and writing moment expression :
WLX
WL2
WX2
Mx =
= 0
2
12
2
6 WLX WL2 6 WX2
X2 LX +
L2
2 L2
3
2
L2
3
L
=
2
1 2
.L
3
L2
6
21
L2
= 0
6
L2 4 1
Simplify
L2
X2 = 0
6
LX
= 0
2
L 0.577 L
2
X = 0.789 L ,
0.211 L
Location of points of contraflexure.

X = 0.211 L
We get the same answer as before.

This is a flexibility method and was written in matrix form earlier. The matrix inversion process is
given now for reference and use.
40
1.13.
MATRIX INVERSION : These co-efficients may also be evaluated by matrix Inversion so basic procedures are given.
Adjoint of matrix
Inverse of matrix =
Determinant of matrix
Adjoint a matrix
= Transpose ( Interchanging rows & columns) of matrix of

co-factors.
Co-factors of an element = ( 1)i+j minor of element.where i = Row number in which
that element is located and j = Column number in which that element is located.
Minor of element = Value obtained by deleting the row & the column in which that
particular element is located and evaluating remaining determinant.
Let us assume a matrix :
3
7
1
5
9
A = 4
8
10
11
Determinant of matrix A = 1 (5 11 10 9 ) 3 (44 72) + 7 ( 4 10 8 5 )
= 35 + 84 + 0
= 47
MINORS OF MATRIX :Find out the minors for all the elements of the matrix. Then establish matrix of co-factors.
-35
Matrix of Minors= -37
-8
-28
-45
-19
0
-14
-7
Matrix of co-factors
-35
= 37
-8
28
-45
19
0
14
-7
Adjoint of matrix A
-35
= 28
0
37
-45
14
-8
19
-7
Inverse of matrix
A-1
A x A1 = I
Aij x Bjk = Cik
-35
1
28
49
0
-0.71
= 0.571
0
1 0
1
= 0
0 0
37
-45
14
-8
19
-7
0.755
-0.163
-0.918
0.387
0.286
-0.143
0
0 Check for correct matrix inversion
1
A A1
1
= 4
8
3
5
10
0.71
0.571
0
7
9
11
0.755
0.918
0.286
0.163
0.387
0.143
10.71+30.571+70
0
1.14.
10.75530.918+70.286
10.163+30.387 70.143
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
AA1
= 0
Proved.
0
0
1
2ND DEGREE INDETERMINACY :Example No. 3:
Solve the following continuous beam by consistent deformation method.
40 kN
C
4m
3m
5m
EI = constant
Fig. 2.26
In this case, we treat reaction at B and C as redundants and the basic determinate structure is a
simply supported beam AD.
40 kN
D
A
C
Fig. 2.26 a
Bending under applied loads
1
A
B
bb
C
cb
Fig. 2.26 b
Bending under unit redundant force at B
1
A
B
bc
C
cc
Fig. 2.26 c
Bending under unit redundant force at C
41
42
Compatibility equations are as follows:

B + bb Rb + bc Rc = 0
(1) For compatibility at B
C + cb Rb + cc Rc = 0
(2) For compatibility at C
Evaluate the flexibility co-efficients given in equation (1) and (2). Using Conjugate beam method.
A
40 KN
5m
7m
16.67 KN
0 S.F.D.
16.67
23.33 KN 23.33
+
MD=0
RAx12 - 40x7=0
RA=23.33 KN
FY=0
RA+RD=40
RD=16.67 KN
116.67 KN
B.M.D.
+
70/EI
116.67
EI 83.35/EI
291.675
EI
6.33
5.67
369.455
EI
700.02
EI
408.345
EI
M diagram
EI
330.565
EI
In general for a simple beam loaded as below,

the centroid is a shown
W
a
b
L
Wab
M=
L
L+b
3
L+a
3
Fig. 2.27
MD = 0,
Calculate RA'
291.675
1
408.345
RA 12 =
EI
7 + 3 5 + EI
=
2527.85
1905.61
+
EI
EI
RA
369.455
EI
Fy
= 0
2 x 7
3
369.455
700.02
+ RD' =
EI
EI
700.02
369.455
RD =
EI
EI
RA + RD =
RD =
330.565
M
. Now ordinates of diagram are determined by comparing
EI
EI
Similar triangles.
116.67
Y
=
5 EI
3
Y=
70
EI
Now by using conjugate beam method (theorem 2)
369.455 3 1 3 70 3
2
3
1
EI
1003.365
KN m3
EI
Determine
C
C
116.67
Y
=
7
5
Y = 83.34
1
1
5
=
330.565 5 5 83.34
EI
2
3
=
1305.575
KN m3
EI
Now apply unit redundant at B.

1
A
3m
4m
B
bb
C
cb
Fig. 2.28
5m
1/3
2/3
2.25/EI
1.25/EI
A
B
5
7.875/EI
C
13.5
Conjugate beam under M/EI
5.625/EI
43
44
Computing Co-efficients by Conjugate beam method. (Theorem 2)

1
MB' = bb
=
[ 7.875 3 3.375 1 ]
EI
20.25
bb
=
KN m3
EI
2.25
Y
Determine ordinate
=
9
5
1.25
Y
=
EI
1
5
MC' = cb
=
5.625 5 3.125
EI
3
22.92
cb
=
KN m3
EI
Now apply unit redundant at C.
I
bc
cc
1x7x5
12
=2.92
2.92
2.92
EI
bc
A
B
8.28
EI
cc
C
9.24
6.33 m
5.67 m
17.52
EI
Fig. 2.29
Conjugate beam under M/EI
Moment at B in conjugate beam gives

MB' = bc
MC' = bc
cc
cc
1
1
8.28 x 3 x 1.25 x 3 x 1
EI
2
22.965
=
KN m3
(bc = cb ) PROVED.
EI
1
1
5
=
9.24 x 5 x 2.92 x 5 x
EI
2
3
34.03
=
KN m3.
EI
=
Inserting evaluated Co-efficients in equation (1) and (2)

1003.365
20.25
22.965
+
Rb +
Rc = 0 (1)
EI
EI
EI
1003.365 + 20.25 Rb + 22.965 Rc = 0
(3) Canceling 1/EI throughout
1305.575
22.92
34.03
1
+
Rb +
Rc = 0 (4) Cancelling throughout
EI
EI
EI
EI
1305.575 + 22.92 Rb + 34.03 Rc = 0
(4)
Multiply (3) by 22.92 and (4) by 20.25 & subtract (4) from (3)
22997.1258 + 464.13 Rb + 526.357 Rc = 0
26437.8938 + 464.13 Rb + 689.1075 Rc = 0
3460.768 162.75 Rc = 0
Rc = 21.264 KN
(3)
(4)
Putting this in equation
(3)
Rb 22.963 21.264 = 0
1003.365 + 20.25
Rb = 25.434 KN
The ( ve) signs with the values of the redundants are suggestive of the fact that the directions of
the actual redundants are in fact upwards. Now apply loads and evaluated redundants to original beam
calculate remaining reaction.
A
3m
4m
D
5m
Fig. 2.30
Fy = 0
Considering all upwards at this stage as Ra and Rd are unknown.
RA + RD + 25.434 + 21.264 40 = 0
(1)
RA + RD = 6.698
MD = 0
Considering all upward reactions
RA 12 + 25.454 9 40 7 + 21.264 5 = 0
RA = 4.602 KN . It actually acts downwards.
RD
= RA 6.698
= 4.602 6.698
RD = 2.096 KN
above sketch SFD and BMD.
All determined reactions are shown in figure 2.30
45
46
Elastic curve
Fig. 2.31
S.F.D.
B.M.D.
LOCATION OF POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURE :- These are in Span BC.

A as origin.
MX1
Write moment expression and equate to zero.

= 4.602 X1 + 25.434 ( X1 3 )
4.602 X1 + 25.434 X1 76.302 = 0
X1
D as origin.
MX2
= 3.663 m from A.
Write moment expression and equate to zero.
= 2.096 X2 + 21.264 ( X2 5 ) = 0
2.096 X2 + 21.264 X2 106.32 = 0
19.168 X2 106.32 = 0
X2
5.547 m.
These locations are marked above in BMD.
47
1.15.
3RD DEGREE INDETERMINACY :Example No. 4:

Solve the frame shown below by consistent deformation method.
outer sides
inner sides
outer sides
Fig. 2.32
outer sides
B.M is +ve for

Tension on inner sides
1.15.1. SOLUTION:
Sign convention for S.F. and B.M. remains the same and are shown above as well. In this case, any
force or moment which creates tension on the inner side of a frame would be considered as a (+ve)
B.M. Removing right hand support to get BDS. The loads create three defermations as shown.
Note:
Fig. 2.33 (a)

Fig. 2.33 (b)
DH = Deflection of point D in horizontal direction due to applied loads on BDS.
DV = Deflection of point D in vertical direction due to applied loads on BDS.
D = Rotation of point D due to applied loads on BDS.
B
4m
4m
6m
D
ddv
1
dd
A
Fig. 2.33c B.D.S. under unit vertical
redundant force at D
ddh
m -Diagram
Fig. 2.33d B.D.S. under unit rotational

redundant moment at D
48
Where (See mH diagram Fig. 2.33b)

ddh = Deflection of point D due to unit load at D in horizontal direction acting on BDS.
'ddv = Deflection of point D, in vertical direction due to unit load at D in horizontal direction.
'ddh= Rotation of point D, due to unit load in horizontal direction at D acting on BDS.
(See mV diagram Fig: 2.33c)
ddv = Deflection of point D due to unit load at D in vertical direction.
'ddh = Deflection of point D (in horizontal direction) due to unit vertical load at D.
'ddv = Rotation of point D due to unit vertical load at D.
(See m diagram Fig: 2.33d))
'ddh = Horizontal deflection of point D due to unit moment at D.
'ddv = Vertical deflection of point D due to unit moment at D.
dd = Rotation of point D due to unit moment at D.
Compatibility equations :DH + HD ddh + VD ddv + MD ddh = 0 (1) Compatibility in horizontal direction at D.
DV + HD ddh + VD ddV + MD ddV = 0 (2) Compatibility in vertical direction at D.
D + HD ddh + VD ddv + MD dd = 0 (3) Compatibility of rotation at D
Now evaluate flexibility co-efficients used in above three equations. We know that
or =
EI
1
( Mmdx )
There are 12 co-efficients to be evaluated in above three equations.

So
DH =
M mH
dx
EI
(1)
(mH)2 dx
EI
(2)
ddh =
mH mv dx
EI
(3)
Dv =
M (mv ) dx
EI
(4)
ddv =
(mH mv ) dx
EI
(5)
ddv =
(mv)2 dx
EI
(6)
ddv =
mv m
dx
EI
(7)
ddh =
1
EI
( M ) ( m ) dx
(8)
ddh =
1
( mH ) ( m ) dx
EI
ddv =
1
EI
(9)
( mv ) ( m ) dx
(10)
1
( m )2 dx
(11)
EI
Multiplying the corresponding moment expressions in above equations, we can evaluate above
deformations. Draw M-diagram.
dd
10KN
2m
2m
F
4m
3m
20 KN
3m
x
80 KN-m
A
20KN
M - Diagram
10KN
M = 10 x 2 + 20 x 3 = + 80KN-m
Fig. 2.34 B.D.S under applied loads

M Diagram by parts
10KN
20KN-m
10KN
x
x
20KN-m
2m
x
C
2m
3m
4m
10KN
20KN
E
x
3m
80KN-m
x
20KN
A
10KN
M=20 x 6-20 x 3 - 80 = 20KN-m
49
50
4
B
4m
B
+
1
C
4m
6m
D
D
A
A
1
1
MH - Diagram
Fig. 2.34a
4
B
1
C
4
Fig 2.34b
F
1
1
C
1
1
C
E
1
D
D
1
A
4
A
1
1 mv-diagram (by parts)
Fig 2.34c
m -diagram (by parts)
Fig 2.34d
Moments expressions in various members can now be written in a tabular form.

Portion
AE
BE
BF
CF
CD
Origin
A
B
B
C
D
Limits
03
03
02
02
04
M
20X 80
20
10X 20
0
0
mH
X2
X+4
4
4
X
Put these moment expressions, integrate and evaluate co-efficients
mv
4
4
X4
X
0
MO
1
1
1
1
1
DH
1
EI
DH
(20X 80) (X 2) dX + (X+4) (20) dX + (10X 20) 4 dX + 0 + 0

EI o
o
o
(20X2 80X 40X + 160 ) + (20X 80 )dX+ ( 40X 80 ) dX

EI o
o
o
1 20X3 80X2 4X2

20X2
40X2
+ 160X +
80X | +
EI 3
2
2
2
o
2 80 X o
o
M ( mH ) dX
DH
1 20 33
40 32 20 (3)2 + 160 3 + (10 9 80 3) + (20 4 80 2)
EI 3
110
=
EI
ddh
1
EI
(X 2)2 dX + (X + 0)2dX + 16 dX + 16 dX + X2 dX
EI o
o
o
o
o
(X 4X + 4) dX + (16 8X + X2) dX + 16 dX + 16 dX + X2 dX
EI o
o
o
o
o
( mH )
dX
ddh
1 X3 4X2
8X2 X3
X3
| + 16X | + 16X | +
+ 4X | +16X
+
EI 3
2
2
3 o
3 o
o
o
o
3
3
1 3
3
(4)3
= 2 (3)2 + 4 3 + 16 3 4 9 + + (16 2) + (16 2) +
0
EI 3
3
3

ddh =
'ddV
109.33
EI
( mH ) ( mv ) dX
1
EI
(X 2) ( 4 ) dX + (X + 4 ) (4 ) dX + ( 4 ) (X4 ) dX + 4 (X ) dX + 0
EI o
o
o
o
( 4X+8 ) dX + (4X 16 ) dX + (4X16 ) dX + 4XdX

EI o
o
o
o
1 4X2
4X2
4X2
4X2
+ 8X | +
16X | +
16X | +
EI 2
2
2
2
o
o
o
o
51
52
1
2 (3)2 + 8 3 + (2 32 16 3 ) + ( 2 22 16 2 ) + ( 2 22 )]
EI [
56
EI
ddV =
ddh
( mH ) ( m ) dX
1
EI
(1 ) (X 2) dX + (1) (x + 4) dX + 4 dX + 4 dX + XdX
EI o
o
o
o
o
1 X2
X2
X2
+ 2X | +
4X | + 4X | + 4X | +
EI 2
2
2 o
o
o
o
o
1 9
9
42
+ 2 3 + 4 3 + ( 4 2) + ( 4 2) + 0
EI 2
2
1
EI
ddh =
30
EI
M ( m ) dX
(20X 80 ) dX + 20 dX + (10X + 20 ) dX + 0 + 0
=
EI o
o
o
3
1 20X2
10X2
+ 80X | + 20X | +
+ 20X |
EI
2
2
o
o
o
1
2
=
(10 3 + 80 3) + (20 3) + ( 5 4 + 20 2)
EI
3
D =
Dv
230
EI
M ( mv ) dX
1
EI
(20X 80) (4) dX + (20) (4) dX + (10X 20) (X 4) dX + 0 + 0

EI o
o
o
( 80X + 320) dX + 80 dX + (10X2 20X 40X + 80) dX

EI o
o
o
1
X2
X3 60X2
80
+ 320X | + 80X | + 10
+ 80X |
EI
2
3
2
o
o
o
1
10
(40 9 + 320 3) + (80 3) + 8 30 4 + 80 2
EI
3
906.67
EI
Dv =
ddh
( mH ) ( mv ) dX
1
EI
(X2) (4) dX + (X + 4) (4) dX + 4 (X4) dX + 4XdX + 0

EI o
o
o
o
(4X + 8)dX + (4X 16) dX + (4X 16) dX + 4XdX

EI o
o
o
o
1 4X2
4X2
4X2
4X
+ 8X | +
16X | +
16X | +
EI 2
2
2
2 o
o
o
o
1
=
(2 9 + 8 3) + (2 9 16 3) + (2 4 16 2) + (2 4)
EI
3
ddh =
ddv
56
EI
( mv ) dX
1
EI
16 dX + 16 dX + (X 4)2 dX + (X)2dX + 0
EI o
o
o
o
16 dX+ 16 dX+ (X2 8X +16)dX+ + X2 dX

EI o
o
o
o
1
X3 8X2
X3
16X | + 16X | +
+ 16X | + | +
EI
3
2
3 o
o
o
o
1
8
8
(16 3 ) + ( 16 3 ) + 4 4 + 16 2 + +
EI
3
3
ddv =
117.33
EI
53
54
ddv
mv m dX
1
EI
+ 4 dX + + 4 dX + (X + 4) dX + XdX
EI o
o
o
o
1
X2
X2
4X | + 4X | +
+ 4X | + |
EI o
2
2 o
o
o
1
22
(4 3) + (4 3) + (2 + 4 2) +
EI
2
ddv =
dd
( m )
32
EI
1
EI
(1)2 dX + (1)2 dX + (1)2 dX + (1)2 dX + (1)2 dX

EI o
o
o
o
o
X | + X | + X | + X | + X |
EI
o
o
o
o
o
1
EI
dX
3
[3 + 3 + 2 + 2 + 4 ]
dd =
14
EI
Putting all values of evaluated co-efficients, equations 1,2 and 3 become

110 109.33
56
30
+
HD
VD
MD = 0
EI
EI
EI
EI
(1)
and
906.67
56
117.33
32
HD +
VD +
M = 0
EI
EI
EI
EI D
(2)
and
230 30
32
14
HD +
VD +
M = 0
EI
EI
EI
EI D
(3) Simplifying
110 + 109.33 HD 56 VD 30 MD = 0
906.67 56 HD + 117.33 VD + 32 MD = 0
230 30 HD + 32 VD + 14 MD = 0
(1)
(2)
(3)
From Eq (1)
MD
110 + 109.33 HD 56 VD
= 3.67 + 3.64 HD 1.86 VD
30
(4)
Putting in Eq (2)
906.67 56 HD + 117.33 VD + 32 (3.67 + 3.64 HD 1.86 VD) = 0
906.67 56 HD + 117.33 VD 117.44 + 116.5 HD 59.52 VD = 0
789.23 + 60.5 HD + 57.81 VD = 0
HD = 13.045 0.95 VD
(5)
Putting the value of HD in Eq (4)

MD = 3.67 + 3.64 (13.045 0.95 VD) 1.86 VD
MD = 51.15 5.32 VD
(6)
Putting the values of MD & HD in Eq (3)

230 30 (13.045 0.95 VD) + 32 VD + 14 (51.15 5.32 VD) = 0
230 + 391.35 + 28.5 VD + 32 VD 716.1 74.5 VD = 0
14 VD 94.75 = 0
VD = 6.78 KN
Putting in (5) & (6)
HD = 6.61 KN,
MD = 15.08 KNm
From any equation above. We get

VD = 12.478 KN
Apply the evaluated structural actions in correct sense on the frame. The correctness of solution
can be checked afterwards by equilibrium conditions.
10KN
B
2m
3m
2m
4m
20KN
15.08KN=m
D
3m
Ma=1.8 KN
6.61KN
12.478 KN
Ha=13.39 KN
Va = 2.478 KN
Fig. 2.35 shows all reactions after Evaluation
55
56

Fx = 0
20 Ha 6.61 = 0
Ha = 13.39 KN
Fy = 0
Va + 12.478 10 = 0
(asuming Va upwards)
Va = 2.478 KN
0
Ma+ 20 3 + 10 2 12.478 4 6.61 2 15.08 = 0 (assuming Ma
clockwise)
Ma = 1.8 KN-m
Ma = 0
1.16.
12.478 4 + 15.08 + 6.61 2 + 1.8 20 3 10 2 = 0 Proved.
ANALYSIS OF STATICALLY EXTERNALLY INDETERMINATE TRUSSES :A truss may be statically indeterminate if all external reactive components and internal member
forces may not be evaluated simply by the help of equations of equilibrium available. The
indeterminacy of the trusses can be categorized as follows :(1)
Trusses containing excessive external reactive components than those actually required
for external stability requirements.
(2)
Trusses containing excessive internal members than required for internal stability
requirements giving lesser the number of equations of equilibrium obtained from various
joints.
(3)
A combination of both of the above categories i.e. excessive external reactions plus
excessive internal members.
INTERNAL INDETERMINACY:b + r = 2j
There are two equations of equilibrium per joint where
b = number of bars or members.
r = minimum number of external reactive components required for
external stability (usually 3).
j = number of joints.
The above formula can also be used to check the total indeterminacy of a truss if we define r as
the total number of reactive components which can be provided by a typical support system.
1.17.
METHOD OF MOMENTS AND SHEARS :
A simple method is presented to evaluate axial member forces in parallel chord trusses. For other
types of trusses method of joints, method of sections or Maxwells diagram may be used. For determining
forces in members of trusses, this method has been used throughout this text. To develop the method,
consider the truss loaded as shown below:
2P
3P
57
H
h
7
RA = 3 P
C
8
RD = 3 P
3@ a
Fig. 2.36 A typical Truss under loads

Consider the equilibrium of L.H.S. of the section. Take D as the moment centre: we find Ra
Ra 3a = 2P 2a + 3 P a
7Pa
7P
=
3a
3
Mc = 0 and assuming all internal member forces to be tensile initially, we have
Ra x 2a 2P a + SFG h = 0 (considering forces on LHS of section)
Ra 2a 2 Pa
SFG =
h
The ( ve ) sign indicates a compressive force. Or

Ra =
or
SFG =
Ra 2a 2 Pa = Mc
h
h
where numerator is Mc. Therefore
The force in any chord member is a function of bending moment.

To find out the axial force in any chord member, the moment centre will be that point where other
two members completing the same triangle meet and the force will be obtained by taking moments about
that point and dividing it by the height of truss. The signs of the chord members are established in the very
beginning by using an analogy that the truss behaves as a deep beam. Under downward loads, all upper
chord members are in compression while all lower chord members are in tension.
MF
Similarly, SBC =
(using the guide line given in the above para)
h
Consider the equilibrium of left hand side of the section and
Fy = 0
Ra 2P SFC Cos = 0
SFC =
Ra 2P
Cos
where Ra 2P is equal to shear force V due to applied loads at

the section. So in general the force in any inclined member is a
function of shear force.
SFC =
V
Cos
The general formula is :

(V)
S =
(Cos )
58
Where V is the S.F. at the section passing through the middle of inclined member and is the
angle measured from the inclined member to the vertical at one of its ends. Use (+ve) sign as a premultiplier with the Cos if this angle is clockwise and (ve) sign if is anticlockwise. Take appropriate
sign with the S.F also. This treatment is only valid for parallel chord trusses.
The force in the vertical members is determined by inspection or by considering the equilibrium of
forces acting at the relevant joints. To illustrate the method follow the example below.
1.17.1: EXAMPLE :
SOLUTION:-
Analyze the following truss by the method of moment & shear.

Determine reactions and Draw SFD and BMD.
I
O
h
H
P
8@a
1.5P
1.5P
Given Truss under loads

1.5 P
0.5P
S.F.D.
0.5P
1.5 P
4.5 Pa 5 Pa
3 Pa
1.5Pa
4.5 P
3 Pa
1.5 Pa
B.M.D.
Fig. 2.37
TOP CHORD MEMBERS.

Considering the beam analogy of truss, all top chord members are in compression. Picking bending
moment, at appropriate moment centers, from BMD and dividing by height of Truss.
3 Pa
Sij
=
h
3 Pa
Sjk
=
h
5 Pa
Stl
=
h
5 Pa
Slm
=
h
3 Pa
Smn
=
h
3 Pa
Sno
=
Negative sign means compression.
h
59
BOTTOM CHORD MEMBERS.

All are in tension. Taking appropriate moment point and dividing by height of Truss.
Sap
Sbc
Sde
Sfg
1.5 Pa
h
4.5 Pa
= Scd = +
h
4.5 Pa
= Sef = +
h
1.5 Pa
= Sgh = +
h
= Spb = +
INCLINED MEMBERS.
The force in these members has been computed by the formula.
Sai
Sib
1.5 P
Cos
1.5 P
=
+ Cos
V
. Follow the guidelines.
(Cos)
Sbk
Skd
Sdm
Smf
Sfo
Soh
1.5 P
Cos
0.5 P
+ Cos
0.5 P
0.5 P
=
Cos
Cos
1.5 P
+ Cos
1.5 P
1.5 P
=
Cos
Cos
1.5 P
+ Cos
Length AI =
a2 + h2
(if a and h are given, length and Cos will have also
late values)
h
Cos =
a2 + h2
VERTICAL MEMBERS.
For all vertical members of trusses in this book, member forces have been determined by Inspection or by
Equilibrium of joints. So
Sip
= Sbj = Sck = Sem = Sfn = Sgo = 0
Sld
= P ( If a and h values are given, all forces can be numerically evaluated)
1.18. EXTERNALLY REDUNDANT TRUSSES FIRST DEGREE
EXAMPLE 5 :- Analyze the following truss by the force method. (consistent deformation method). The
following data is given.
E =200 106 KN/m2
A=5x103m2 for inclineds and verticals,
A=4x103m2 for top chord members,
A=6x103m2 for bottom chord members
60
SOLUTION:36KN
72KN
J
1.8m
E
A
B
4 @ 1.8m
Fig. 2.38 Given Truss under loads
TOTAL INDETERMINACY :b+r = 2j
where r = total reactions which the supports are capable of providing.
17 + 4 2 10
21 20
D = 21 20 = 1
Indeterminate to Ist degree.
Apply check for Internal Indeterminacy :b + r = 2j
where r = Minimum number of external reactions required for stability.
17 + 3 = 2 10
20 = 20
This truss is internally determinate and externally indeterminate to 1st degree, therefore, we select
reaction at point C as the redundant force. Remove support at C, the Compatibility equation is :
C + cc Rc = 0
(Deflection at C due to loads plus due to redundant

should be zero.)
or
Rc =
c
cc
where
c =
F UL
AE
Now we have to calculate c and cc to get Rc.

where F' = Force induced in members due to applied loads
acting on BDS.
cc =
U L
AE
U = Forces in members due to Unit load applied in direction

of applied loads, at external redundant support in BDS.
36K
72K
J
1.8m
4 @ 1.8m
.
(F-Diagram)
A
B
cc
E
D
Fig 2.39b B.D.S under unit Vertical Redundant at C

(U-Diagram)
Analyze the given truss by the method of moments and shears as explained already for F' and U forces in
members.
36KN
G
72KN
H
J
1.8m
E
B
C
1
Ra = 63
4 @ 1.8m
Re = 45 KN
(F -Diagram)
63
27
+
S.F.D.
45
113.4
45
162
81
B.M.D.
61
62
Determine forces in all members of trusses loaded as shown in this question and enter the results in a tabular
form. (using method of moments and shears, F' and U values for members have been obtained).
F
C 1
U=Diagram
S.F.D.
1.8
0.9
0.9
+
B.M.D.
Fig 2.41 B.D.S under Unit redundant force at C
Member
F
(KN)
FG
GH
HI
IJ
AB
BC
CD
DE
AG
GC
CI
IE
AF
BG
HC
ID
JE
0
90
90
0
+63
+63
+45
+45
89.1
+38.2
+63.64
63.64
0
0
72
0
0
0
1
1
0
+0.5
+0.5
+0.5
+0.5
0.707
GC
+0.707
0.707
0
0
0
0
0
Ax
103
(m)2
4
4
6
L
(m)
1.8
1.8
2.55
1.8
FUL
10 3
AE
(m)
0
0.2025
0.2025
0
0.04725
0.04725
0.03375
0.03375
0.16063
0.06887
0.11473
0.11473
0
0
0
0
0
FUL
= 1.02596
AE
103
U2L
103
AE
(m)
0
2.25 103
2.25 103
0
0.375 103
0.375 103
0.375 103
0.375 103
1.275 103
1.275 103
1.275 103
1.275 103
0
0
0
0
0
U2L
=11.1
AE
106
Fi = Fi
Rc U1
(KN)
0
+ 2.5
+ 2.5
0
+16.75
+16.75
1.25
1.25
23.7
27.2
1.76
+1.76
0
0
72
0
0
63
F UL
= 1.02596 103 = 1025.96 106 m
AE
U2 L
cc =
= 11.1 106 m . Putting these two in original compatibility equation
AE
C
1025.96 106
Rc =
=
cc
11.1 106
Rc = 92.5 KN.
The (ve) sign with Rc shows that the assumed direction of redundant is incorrect and Rc acts upward.
If Fi is net internal force due to applied loading and the redundants, acting together, then member forces an
calculated from
Fi = Fi Rc Ui
The final axial force in any particular member can be obtained by applying the principle of superposition
and is equal to the force in that particular member due to applied loading ( ) the force induced in the
same member due to the redundant with actual signs.
C=
Apply the principle of superposition and insert the magnitude of redundant Rc with its sign which has been
obtained by applying the compatibility condition to calculate member forces.
1.19. SOLUTION OF 2ND DEGREE EXTERNALLY INDETERMINATE TRUSSES:-
Example-6 : Solve the following truss by consistent deformation method use previous
member properties.
F
36KN
72KN
1.8m
E
A
C
4 @ 1.8m
Fig 2.42 Given Truss
72KN
36KN
1.8m
C
63KN
D
45KN
(F -diagram)
S.F.D.
0 63
45
0
162
0
113.4
81
+
Fig 2.42a B.D.S under loads
B.M.D.
64
dc
cc 1
1
2
(U1 diagram)
1
2
+
1 S.F.D.
2
1.8
0.9
0.9
(+)
B.M.D.
cd
dd
0.25
0.75
(U2 diagram)
0.25
(+)
0
(-)
1.35
0.9
0.45
0
S.F.D.
0.75
(+)
0
B.M.D.
Fig 2.42 c B.D.S under unit redundant at D
Compatibility equations are:
C + Rc. cc + Rd cd = 0 (1) Compatibility of deformations at C

D + Rc . dc + Rd . dd = 0 (2) Compatibility of deformations at D
cd = dc by the law of reciprocal deflection.
cc = deflection of point C due to unit load at C.
dc = deflection of point D due to unit load at C.
dd = deflection of point D due to unit load at D.
cd = deflection of point C due to unit load at D.
Flexibility coefficients of above two equations are evaluated in tabular form (Consult the attached table)
FU1L
C =
= 1026.2 10 6 m
AE
FU2L
D =
= 579.82 106 m
AE
U12L
cc =
= 11.1 106 m
AE
U22L
= 9.3565 106 m
AE
U1U2L
cd =
= 6.291 106 m
AE
U1U2L
dc =
= 6.291 106 m
Put these in equations 1 and 2
AE
6
6
1026.2 10 + 11.1 10 Rc + 6.291 106 Rd = 0
(1)
(2)
579.82 106 + 6.291 106 Rc + 9.3565 106 Rd = 0
Simplify
1026.2 + 11.1 Rc + 6.291 Rd = 0
(3)
579.82 + 6.291 Rc + 9.3565 Rd = 0
(4)
From (3)
1026.2 6.291 Rd
Rc =
(5)
11.1
Put Rc in (4) & solve for Rd

1026.2 6.291 Rd
579.82 + 6.291
11.1
+ 9.3565 Rd = 0
dd =
1.786 + 5.791 Rd = 0
Rd = + 0.308 KN
So, from (5), Rc =
1026.2 6.291 0.308

11.1
Rc = 92.625 KN
Rc = 92.625 KN
Rd = + 0.308 KN
These signs indicate that reaction at C is upwards and reaction at D is downwards.
By superposition, the member forces will be calculated as follows
Fi = Fi + Rc U1 + Rd U2 which becomes.
Fi = Fi Rc U1 + Rd U2. It takes care of (ve) sign with Rc.
Equilibrium checks:
0.308
1.082
1.082
0.308
Joint D
Fx = 0
Fy = 0
Equilibrium is satisfied. Only check at one joint has been applied. In fact this check should be
satisfied at all joints.
65
66
Table 79A
36KN
72KN
G 2.471 H 2.471 I
27.178 72
1.519
1.954 0.308
0
23.722
1.082
A
16.765 B16.765
1.082
92.625KN 0.308KN 1.082KN
16.965KN
Fig 2.43 Result of analyzed Truss

Now find remaining reactions Ra and Re.
Fy = 0
Ra + Re + 92.625 0.308 36 72 = 0
Ra + Re = 15.683
(1)
MA = 0
Re 1.8 0.308 3 1.8 + 92.625 2 1.8 72 2 1.8 36 1.8 = 0
Re = 1.082 KN
As
So
Ra + Re = 15.863
Ra = 15.863 + 1.082
Ra = 16.945 KN
Now truss is determinate. Calculate member forces and apply checks in them.
Joint (C)
Fx = 0
27.178
72
1.954
1.082
16.765
92.625
1.082 16.765 1.954 0.707 + 27.178 0.707 = 0

0.0136 = 0
0 0
equilibrium is satisfied.
Fy = 0
72 + 92.625 1.954 0.707 27.178 0.707 = 0
0.0286 = 0
00
equilibrium is satisfied
67
68
Joint (E)
Fy = 0
1.519
1.082
1.082
1.519 0.707 1.087 = 0

0=0
Fx = 0
082 1.519 0.707 = 0
0=0
equilibrium is satisfied.
1.20. Example7:- SOLUTION OF 3RD DEGREE EXTERNALLY INDETERMINATE TRUSSES:Now we solve the following truss by consistent deformation method. Choosing reaction of B, C
and D as redundant.
SOLUTION:First step. Choose BDS Draw BDS under loads and subsequently under applied unit loads at points
of redundancy also.
36KN
F
72KN
I
J
1.8m
4 @ 1.8m
Fig 2.44 Given 3rd degree externally
indeterminate truss under loads
=
36 KN
F
72 KN
H
1.8m
A
D
D
Fig 2.44(a) B.D.S under loads
bb
cb
db
Fig 2.44(b) B.D.S under redundant unit load at B

(U1 diagram)
+
F
1
E
cc D dc
1
Fig 2.44(c) B.D.S under redundant unit load at C
A
bc
(U2 diagram)
+
F
1
A
bd
cd
dd
1
Fig 2.44(d) B.D.S under redundant unit load at D
(U3 diagram)
Step No.2: Compatibility equations are:

B + Rb.bb + Rc.bc + Rd x bd = 0
For joint B
(1)
C + Rb.cb + Rc.cc + Rd x cd = 0
For joint C
(2)
D + Rb.db + Rc.dc + Rd x dd = 0
For joint D
(3)
69
70
Step No.3: Evaluation of Flexibility co-efficients

FU1L
FU2L
B
=
C =
AE
AE
D =
FU3L
AE
bb
U12L
AE
bc =
U1U2L
AE
bd =
U1U3L
AE
cb
U1U2L
AE
cc =
U22L
AE
cd =
U2U3L
AE
db
U1U3L
AE
dc =
U2U3L
AE
dd =
U32L
AE
By law of reciprocal deflections :We know that

bc = cb
bd = db
cd = dc
In order to find member forces due to applied forces in BDS, consider.
A
63
36 KN
72KN
C
63
27
63
J
B.D.S under loads
(F diagram)
E
45
S.F.D.
27
0
45
0
45
173.4
162
+
81
B.M.D.
The above SFD and BMD are used to calculate member forces by method of moments and shears. Finally
B, C and D due to applied loads on BDS are calculated in a tabular form as given below:
Table 84A
71
72
B.D.S under unit load at B

for calculating bb, cb and db
(U1 - diagram)
1.0
0.75
0.75
0.25
0.75
(+)
0.25
S.F.D.
0
0.25
(-)
1.3
0.9
0.45
(+)
B.M.D.
B.D.S under unit load at C

for calculating cc, bc and dc
U2 - diagram
1
0.5
0.5
0.5
0
0 S.F.D.
0.5
1.8
0.9
0.9
+
B.M.D.
U3 diagram for bd, cd and dd
Same as above
0.25
0.75
0.25
(+)
(-)
1.3
SDF
0.75
(+)
BMD
From the previous table we have the values of all flexibility co-efficients as given below:
B=391.65 106 m
C=1026.2 106 m
D=692.42 106 m
bb = 9.3616 106 m, and cc = 11.1 106 m, dd = 9.3565 106 m
bc = cb = 6.417 106 m
bd = db = 3.517 106 m
cd = dc = 6.291 106 m
Putting the values of flexibility co-efficients into compatibility equations we have.

391.65 106 +9.3616 106 Rb+6.292 106 Rc+3.517 106 Rd= 0 (1)
1026.2 106 +6.292 106 Rb+11.1 106 Rc + 6.291 106 Rd = 0 (2)
579.82 106 +3.517 106 Rb+6.291 106 Rc+9.3565 106Rd = 0 (3)
Step No. 4
Simplify equation (1), (2) and (3), we have
391.65 +9.3620 Rb+6.292 Rc+3.517 Rd = 0
(4)
1026.2 + 6.292 Rb + 11.1 Rc + 6.291 Rd = 0
(5)
579.82 + 3.517 Rb + 6.291 Rc+9.357 Rd = 0
(6)
Multiply (4) by 6.291 & (5) by 3.517 & subtract (5) from (4)
391.65 6.291+9.362 6.291Rb+6.292 6.291 Rc+3.517 6.291Rd=0
1026.2 3.517+6.292 3.517 Rb+11.1 3.517 Rc+3.517 6.291Rd=0
1145.275 + 36.767 Rb + 0.544 Rc = 0
(7)
Multiply (5) by 9.357 & (6) by 6.291 & subtract (6) from (5) :1026.2 9.357+6.292 9.357 Rb+11.1 9.357 Rc+6.291 9.357Rd=0
579.82 6.291+3.517 6.291Rb+6.291 6.291 Rc+6.291 9.357Rd=0
5954.506 + 36.749 Rb + 64.286 Rc = 0
From (7),
1145.275 0.544 Rc
Rb =
36.767
Put Rb in (8) & solve for Rc

1145.275 0.544 Rc
5954.506 + 36.749
36.767
+ 64.286 Rc = 0
5954.506 + 1144.71 0.544 Rc + 64.286 Rc = 0
7099.22 + 63.742 Rc = 0
Rc = 111.374 KN
Put this value in equation (7) and solve for Rb
1145.275 0.544 111.374
Rb =
36.767
Rb = +32.797 KN
Put Rb and Rc values in equation (4) to get Rd.
391.65 + 9.362 32.797 + 6.292 (111.374) +3.517 Rd = 0
Rd = + 0.588 KN
(8)
73
74
After reactions have been calculated, truss is statically determinate and member forces can be easily
calculated by Fi = Fi/ + RbU1 + RcU2 + RdU3 as given in table. Apply checks on calculated member forces.
Step No. 5: Equilibrium checks.
Joint (C)
72
51.814
3.828
32.058
2.047
111.374
Fx = 0
2.047 32.058 3.828 0.707 + 51.814 0.707 = 0
0.179 0
0=0
Fy = 0
111.374 72 3.828 0.707 51.814 0.707 = 0
0.035 0
0 = 0
(satisfied)
Solution is alright.
1.21: ANALYSIS OF 3-DEGREE REDUNDANT FRAMES
Example No. 8: Analyze the following frame by consistent deformation method.
96KN
B 3m
F
3m
36KN
3m
A
6m
3I
2I
E
7.5m
SOLUTION :The given frame is statically indeterminate to the 3rd degree. So that three redundants have to be
removed at support D or A. Consider HD, VD & MD as the redundants
96KN
B 3m
F
3m
36KN
3m
A
6m
3I
2I
E
7.5m
75
96KN
B 3m
6m
3I
3m
36KN E
2I
2m
36KN
396KN-m
A
I 7.5m
DH
96KN
Dv
Fig. 2.45 B.D.S under loads
B 3m
6m
9m
6m
7.5m
7.5m
3m
6m
3m F
3m
1.5
B 3m
3m
A
A
1.5m
1
9
1
dvdv
dhdv
1
dvd
dh d
dvdh
d d
dh dh
d dv
d dh
mH-Diagram
mV-Diagram
m -diagram
(BDS under redundants)
Compatibility Equations:DH + HD dh.dh + VD dhdv + MD dhd =0 (1)
compatibility in horizontal direction at D.
DV + HD dv.dh + VD dvdv + MD dvd =0 (2)
compatibility in vertical direction at D.
rotational compatibity at D.
+ HD d.dh +VD ddv + MD dd =0 (3)
We have to determine the following flexibility co-efficients.

DH = Horizontal deflection of point D due to applied loads.
DV = Vertical deflection of point D due to applied loads.
D
= Rotation
of point D due to applied loads.
dhdh = Horizontal deflection of point D due to unit horizontal redundant force at D
76

dhdv = Horizontal deflection of point D due to unit vertical redundant force at D
ddh = angular deflection of point D due to unit angular redundant force at D
dvdh = Vertical deflection of point D due to unit horizontal redundant force at D
dvdv = Vertical deflection of point D due to unit vertical redundant force at D
ddv = Rotation deflection of point D due to unit vertical redundant force at D
dhd = Horizontal rotation of point D due to unit rotation at pt D
dvd = Vertical rotation of point D due to unit rotation at pt D
dd = Rotation rotation of point D due to unit rotation at pt D
dvdh = dhdv ( reciprocal deformations)
ddh = dhd ( reciprocal deformations)
ddv = dvd ( reciprocal deformations)
Now these flexibility co-efficients can be evaluated by following formulae.
DH
M mH
dX
EI
DV
M mV
dX
EI
M x m
dX
EI
dhdh
(mH)2 dX
EI
dvdv
(mv)2 dX
EI
mH m
dX
EI
ddh = dhd =
dhdv
= dvdh =
ddv = dvd =
dd =
mv mH
dX
EI
m2
dX
EI
mv m
dX
EI
from law of reciprocals deformations
ESTABLISH MOMENT EXPRESSIONS BY FREE BODY DIAGRAMS:

Note: Moments giving compression on outside and tension on inside of frame (sagging) will be positive.
96KN
288KN-m
B
6m
3m
96KN
F
96KN
C
B
36KN
288KN-m
3m
E
7.5m
3m
36KN
A
396KN-m
D
96KN
Fig 2.46 B.D.S under loads (M-diagram)
Mb = 0
Mb + 36 6 396 36 3 = 0
Mb = + 288 KN m.
Mc = 0
Mc + 96 9 288 96 6 = 0
Mc + 0 = 0
Mc = 0
Free body m Diagrams
7.5
B
B 3m
7.5
C
F
7.5
1
7.5
6m
9
6m
3m
F
9
3m
3m
E
1
C
E
7.5m
7.5m
3m
1.5
3m
9
A
M
Fig. 2.46a mH-Diagam
1
1
Fig. 2.46b
M
mv-diagram
77
78
3m
6m
B 1
3m
E
7.5m
3m
1
1
Fig. 2.46 m diagram
Write moment expressions alongwith limits in a tabular form

Portion
Origin
Limits
MH
Mv
AE
03
36X396
X + 1.5
2I
BE
03
288
X + 7.5
2I
BF
03
96X288
+ 7.5
+X9
3I
CF
06
+ 7.5
3I
CD
0 7.5
+X
It may be done in a tabular form or may be directly evaluated.

CALCULATIONS OF FLEXIBILITY CO-EFFICIENTS:DH
M mH dX
1
EI
1
1
1
(36X 396)(X+1.5 )dX+
(288)(X+7.5) dX +
(96X288)(7.5)dX + 0 + 0
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
o
o
1
1
1
(36X2+54X 396X 594) dX +
(288X2160) dX +
(720X 2160) dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
1
1
(36X2 54X2754) dX +
(720X 2160)dX , (First two integrals have been combined)
2EI o
3EI o
1 36X3 54X2
1
2754 X +
2EI 3
2
o 3EI
1
54
1 720
2
4090.5 1080
12 33
32 2754 3 +
2EI
2
3EI 2 3 2160 3 EI EI
720X 2160X
2
o
DH =
7.5
51.705
EI
79
dhdh
mH dX
1
EI
1
1
1
1
1
(X + 1.5)2dX +
(X+7.5)2dX +
(7.5)2dX +
(7.5)2dX + X2dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EI o
1
1
1
1
1
(X2+3X+2.25)dX+
(X215X+56.25)dX+
56.25 dX+
56.25 dX+ X2 dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EI o
7.5
7.5
7.5
1 X3 3X2
1 X3 15X2
1
1
1 X3
+
+ 2.25X +
+56.25X +
56.25X | +
56.25X | +
2EI 3
2
2
o 2EI 3
o 3EI
o 3EI
o EI 3 o
3
3
1 3 3 2
1 3 15
1
1
1 7.53
=
3 +2.253 + 32+56.253+
(56.253) +
(56.256) +
2EI 3 2
3EI
3EI 3
2EI 3 2
3EI
14.625
55.125
56.25
112.5
140.625
=
+
+
+
+
EI
EI
EI
EI
EI
dhdh = +
dhd =
1
EI
(mH m) dX
dhd =
379.125
EI
7.5
1
1
1
1
1
(X+1.5)(1)dX+
(X+7.5)(1)dX+
(7.5)(1)dX+
(7.5)(1)dX+ (X)(1)dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EIo
3
7.5
1
1
1
1
1
(X1.5)dX +
(X7.5)dX +
(7.5)dX +
(7.5)dX + (X)
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EI o
1
1
1
1
(9)dX +
(7.5)dX +
(7.5)dX + (X)dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
EI o
7.5
7.5
1
1
1
1 X2
9X | +
7.5X | +
7.5X | + -
2EI
3EI
o
o 3EI
o EI 2 o
1
1
1
1 (7.5)2
=
(9 3) +
(7.5 3) +
(7.5 6) +
2EI
3EI
3EI
EI 2
=
dhd =
64.125
EI
(M mv) dX
Dv
1
EI
Dv
1
1
1
(36X 396 )(9 ) dX +
(288 )(9 ) dX +
(96X 288) (X9)dX + 0 + 0
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
80
1
1
1
(324X+3564) dX +
2592 dX +
(96X2864X 288X + 2592) dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
1
1
(324X + 6156) dX +
(96X2 1152X + 2592) dX
2EI o
3EI o
1 324X2
1 96X3 1152X2
+ 6156X +
2EI 2
o 3EI 3 2 + 2592Xo
1
1
=
(162 32 + 6156 3) +
(32 33 576 32 + 2592 3)
2EI
3EI
8505
1152
=
+
EI
EI
3
Dv =
dvdv
9657
EI
(mv) dX
1
EI
1
1
1
1
1
(9 )2 dX +
(9 )2 dX +
(X9 )2 dX +
(X)2 dX + ( 0 ) dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EI o
1
1
1
162 dX +
(X2 18X + 81) dX +
X2 dX
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
162
1 X2 18X2
1 X3
X | +
+ 81X +
2EI
3EI 3
2
o 3EI 3 o
o
81(3)
1 33
1 63
+
9 32 + 81 3 +
EI
3EI 3
3EI 3
dvdv = +
324
EI
(mv m) dX
dvd =
1
EI
dvd =
1
1
1
1
9 dX +
9 dX +
(X + 9) dX +
dX + 0
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
3
2
2 6
X + 9X| + 1 X
2
o 3EI 2 o
1
1
1
9X | +
9X | +
2EI
2EI
3EI
o
o
1
1
1 9
1 36
(9 3) +
(9 3) +
+ 9 3 +
2EI
2EI
3EI 2
3EI 2
dvd = +
40.5
EI
7.5
(m ) dX
dd =
1
EI
dd =
1
1
1
1
1
1dX +
1dX +
1dX +
1dX + 1dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
EI o
7.5
7.5
1
1
1
1
X| +
X| +
X| + X|
2EI
3EI
3EI
EI
o
o
o
o
1
1
1
1
(3) +
(3) +
(6) + (7.5)
EI
3EI
3EI
EI
dd = +
81
13.5
EI
(M x m) dX
1
EI
1
1
1
(36X +396) dX +
288 dX +
(96X + 288) dX
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
1
1
(36X + 684) dX +
(96X + 288) dX
2EI o
3EI o
1
X2
1
X2
36
+ 684X +
96
+ 288X
2EI
2
2
o 3EI
o
1
1
=
(18 9 + 684 3) +
( 48 9 + 288 3)
2EI
3EI
D = +
(m
1089
EI
dhdv
1
EI
dhdv
1
1
1
1
(9X 13.5)dX +
(+9X 67.5)dX +
(7.5x 67.5)dX +
(7.5X) dX +0
2EI o
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
1
1
1
( 81)dX +
(7.5X 67.5) dx +
( 7.5X) dX
2EI o
3EI o
3EI o
mv ) dX
82
1
1 7.5X2
1 7.5X2
81X | +
67.5X| +
2EI
3EI 2
o 3EI 2 o
o
1
1 7.5
1 7.5
(81 3) +
9 67.5 3 +
2EI
3EI 2
3EI 2 36
dhdv =
222.75
EI
Putting above evaluated flexibility coefficients in compatibility equations , we have.

(1) 5170.5 + 379.125 HD 222.75 VD 64.125 MD = 0
(4)
(2) +9657 222.75 HD + 324 VD + 40.5 MD = 0
(5)
(3) + 1089 64.125 HD + 40.5 VD + 13.5 MD = 0
(6)
Multiply (4) by 222.75 & (5) by 379.125 Then add (4) & (5) to eliminate HD
(5170.5 222.75) +(379.125 222.75)HD(222.75)2VD(64.125 222.75)MD =0
+(9657379.125) (379.125222.75)HD+(324379.125)VD+(40.5379.125) MD=0
2509481.25 + 73218.9375 VD +1070.72 MD = 0
(7)
Multiply (5) by 64.125 & (6) by 222.75 & subtract (6) from (5) to eliminate HD again
619255.125 14283.84 HD + 20776.5 VD + 2597.06 MD = 0
242574.75 14283.84 HD + 9021.375 VD + 3007.125 MD= 0
376680.375 + 11755.125 VD 410.065 MD = 0
(8)
Now equation (7) and (8) are in terms of VD and MD

From (7), VD =
1070.72 MD 2509481.25
73218.9375
Put VD in (8) to get MD
(9)
1070.72 MD 2509481.25
376680.375 + 11755.125
73218.9375
410.065MD = 0
376680.375 171.90 MD 402891.20 410.065 MD = 0
26210.83 581.965 MD = 0
MD = 45.04 KNm, put this in (9) to get VD

VD =
1070.72 (45.04) 2509481.25

73218.9375
83
VD = 33.62 KN. Now put values of VD and MD in (4) to get HD

5170.5+379.125 HD+222.75 33.62 + 64.125 45.04 = 0
379.125 HD + 5205.44 = 0
HD = 13.73 KN
HD = 13.73 KN
VD = 33.62 KN
MD = 45.64 KN m
These reactions are applied to frame which becomes statically determinate now and shear force and moment
diagram can be sketched (by parts) now.
96
B
3m
3m
6m
3I
2I
E
36KN
3m
A
I 7.5m
HA=22.27KN
Ma=68.98Kn-m
VA =62.38KN
45.04KN-m
13.73KN
Fig. 2.47
33.62KN
Applying condition of equilibrium at A, reactions can be obtained.

FX = 0
36 HA 13.73 = 0
HA = 22.27 KN
Fy = 0
VA + 33.62 96 = 0
VA = 62.38 KN
84
M =0
MA + 45.04 13.73 1.5 + 33.62 9 96 3 36 3 = 0
MA 68.98 = 0
MA = 68.98 KN-m
Applying these reactions to frame, various free-body diagrams

can be drawn and moments expressions can be set-up for
determining combined deflections of any point due to applied
loads and reactions (at supports) acting simultaneously.
96KN 57.94KN-m
43.36KN-m
B
6m C
13.73KN
3m
13.73KN
F
62.38KN 6m
33.62KN
57.94KN-m
62.38KN
43.36KN-m
E B
3m
36KN E
33.62KN
C
13.73KN
13.73KN
7.5m
3m
A
22.27Kn
13.73Kn
45.04KN-m
68.98KN-m
62.38Kn
33.62KN
Mb = 0 , Mb+22.27 x 6-68.98-36 x 3 = 0
Mb = 43.36 KN-m
Mc=0 , M+62.38 x 9-43.36-96x 6=0

Mc=57.94 KN-m (for beam)
BENDING MOMENT AND SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS :

For beam BC
96KN
43.36KN-m
3m
6m
B
62.38KN
62.38
+
0
33.62
m 143.78
x=0.695
0
43.36
57.94KN-m
C
33.62KN
S.F.D.
0
33.62
x=1.723m
0 B.M.D.
57.94
Mx = 45.04 + 13.73x = 0
x = 3.28 m
85
FOR COLUMN AB
(Seen rotated at 90)
36KN
68.98KN-m
3m
A
22.27KN
22.27
43.36KN-m
3m
B
13.73KN
S.F.D.
0
13.73
0
2.17
68.98
43.36
FOR COLUMN DC
(Seen rotated at 90)
57.94KN-m
45.04KN-m
7.5m
D
13.73KN
13.73
C
13.73KN
13.73
+
0
0 S.F.D.
X=3.28m
+
+
57.94
0 B.M.D.
45.04
Mx=-45.04+13.73x = 0
x = 3.28m
143.78
+
43.36
62.38
13.73
57.94
43.36
57.94
+
13.73
33.62
S.F.D.
2.17
B.M.D.
+
22.27
68.98
13.73
Composite S.F.D. for analysed frame
45.04
Fig. 2.48
86
Elastic Curve:-
1.22: Analysis of Continuous Beams

Example No. 9:
Analyze the following beam by consistent deformation method. Check the results by the method of
least work.
SOLUTION:10KN
15m
A
30m
10m
B 40m
5KN
E1=Constt
40m
D 30m
Number of reactions=5
number of equations=2
Fig. 2.56
Step No.1:
In this structure, we treat reactions at B, C & D as redundants and the B.D.S. is a simply supported
beam AE.
10KN
15m
A
C 10m
B
B
5KN
D
E
D
140m
B.D.S. Under applied loads.
Fig. 2.56a
1
A
bb x Vb
E
dbxVb
D
cb x Vb
B.D.S. Under Unit redundant load at B.
Fig. 2.56 b
1
A
C
bc x Vc
D
cc x Vc
E
dc x Vc
B.D.S. under Unit redundant load at C.

U
Fig. 2.56c
1
B
bd x Vd
E
dd xVd
cd x Vd
B.D.S. under Unit redundant load at D.

U
Fig. 2.56d
Step No.2: Compatibility Equations.

B + Vb bb + Vc bc + Vd bd = 0
(1)
Compatibility of deformations at B
C + Vb cb + Vc cc + Vd cd = 0 (2)
Compatibility of deformations at C
D + Vb db + Vc dc + Vd dd = 0 (3)
Compatibility of deformation at D
Sketch BDS, Draw SFD, and
M
diagram for use in conjugate beam method.
EI
65 m
10KN
B
15m
A
RA =
5KN
C
E
Fig. 2.57
10x 125 5x60

x
140
140
80m
60m
3.93KN = RE
140m
= 11.07KN
11.07
1.07
235.8/EI
166.05/EI
11631.161/E1
Splitting above
A1
A2
M/EI diagram over

conjugate beam
A3
A4
A2
A1
A
S.F.D.
0
3.93
1.07
E
C
D
9748.339/E1
M
in 4 parts as shown, calculate areas of these portions.
EI
1
166.05
1245.375
= 15
=
2
EI
EI
=
166.05
10793.25
65 =
EI
EI
87
88
A3
1 69.75
2266.875
65 =
2
EI
EI
A4
1
7074
235.8 60 =
2
EI
21379.5
EI
=0
A1+A2+A3+A4 =
ME
RA x 140 =
RA
1
15
65
65
2
1245.375 125+ +10793.25 60+ +2266.875 60+ +7074 60
EI
3
2
3
3
11631.161
EI
21379.5 11631.161
EI
EI
9748.339
RE
=
EI
M
Isolating the upper part of diagram between two loads.
EI
RE
C
15
235.8
B
y1YYy2
166.05/EI
55
65
y2
55
235.8
=
65
By conjugate beam method, B would be moment at B' of conjugate beam

loaded with
y2
y1
M
diagram.
EI
= 199.52
= 54.4
1
15
15
15
11631.161301245.375 15+ (166.0515) 7.5 54.42
EI
3
2 3
303080.955
=
KNm3
EI
B =
Moment at C' of conjugate beam

1
15
55 1
1
C =
11631.16170(1245.375) +55(166.0555) 100.525.5 55
EI
3
2 2
3
=
387716.812
EI
KNm3
89
235.8
D
30
Y y3
y3 = 117.9/EI
60m
M
Isolating the portion of diagram between right support and 5 KN load.
EI
Moment at D' of conjugate beam
1
1
30
D =
9748.339 30 117.9 30
EI
2
3
274765.17
D =
KNm3
EI
M
If we construct diagram for above figures 2.56b, 2.56c and 2.56d and place them over conjugate beam,
EI
we have cb= 34501.88, cc= 57166.66, cd= 34501.88 on similar lines as above. From conjugate beam
for fig: 2.56b, you will have
1
30
25926.93
bb
=
982.086 30 (353.565) =
EI
30
EI

1
1
70
34501.88
cb
=
667.884 70 15 70 =
EI
EI
2
3
1
1
30
19073.07
db
=
667.884 30 6.423 30 =
EI
EI
2
3
We already know from law of reciprocal deflections that
cb = bc
bd = db
cd = dc
From conjugate beam for fig: 2.5d, you will have
1
15 70 70 34501.88
cd
= 667.884 70
EI
2 3 = EI
1
1
30
25926.93
dd
=
982.086 30 23.571 30 =
EI
EI
2
EI
Putting above flexibility co-efficients in compatibility equations, we have
303080.955 + 25926.93 Vb + 34500 Vc + 19073.07 Vd = 0
387716.812 + 34501.88 Vb + 57166.67 Vc + 34501.88 Vd = 0
274765.17 + 1907307 Vb + 34500 Vc + 25926.93 Vd = 0
Solving above three linear simultaneous equations, we have
Vd = 14.30 KN
Vc = 12.98 KN
Vb = 18.44 KN
(1)
(2)
(3)
90
Now the continuous beam has become determinate. Apply loads and redundants reactions, other
support reactions can be determined.
15m
Va
10KN
B
18.44KN
10m
5KN
12.98KN
14.30KN
Ve
ME = 0
Va 140 10 125 18.44 110 12.98 70 5 60 + 14.3 30 = 0
Va = 28.9 KN
gives
Fy = 0
Ve = 3.22 KN upwards
Now shear force and BMD can be plotted as the beam is statically determinate now.
91
METHOD OF LEAST WORK
CHAPTER TWO
The method of least work is used for the analysis of statically indeterminate beams, frames and
trusses. Indirect use of the Castiglianos 2nd theorem is made and the following steps are taken.
(1)
The structure is considered under the action of applied loads and the redundants. The
redundants can be decided by choosing a particular basic determinate structure and the
choice of redundants may vary within a problem.
(2)
Moment expressions for the entire structure are established in terms of the applied loads
and the redundants, which are assumed to act simultaneously for beams and frames.
(3)
Strain energy stored due to direct forces and in bending etc. is calculated and is partially
differentiated with respect to the redundants.
(4)
A set of linear equations is obtained, the number of which is equal to that of the
redundants.Solution of these equations evaluates the redundants.
NOTE:
Special care must be exercised while partially differentiating the strain energy expressions and
compatibility requirements of the chosen basic determinate structure should also be kept in mind.
For the convenience of readers, Castiglianos theorem are given below:
2.1. CASTIGLIANOS FIRST THEOREM:
The partial derivative of the total strain energy stored with respect to a particular deformation
gives the corresponding force acting at that point.
Mathematically this theorem is stated as below:
U
= P
and
U
= M
It suggests that displacements correspond to loads while rotations correspond to moments.

2.2. CASTIGLIANOS SECOND THEOREM :
The partial derivative of the total strain energy stored with respect to a particular force gives the
corresponding deformation at that point.
Mathematically,
U
=
P
and
U
=
M
92
2.3. STATEMENT OF THEOREM OF LEAST WORK.

In a statically indeterminate structure, the redundants are such that the internal strain energy
stored is minimum. This minima is achieved by partially differentiating strain energy and setting it to zero
or to a known value. This forms the basis of structural stability and of Finite Element Method.
2.4. Example No.1:
1st Degree Indeterminacy of Beams.
Analyze the following loaded beam by the method of least work.
wKN/m
Ma
x
B
Ra
Rb
n
The beam is redundant to first degree.

In case of cantilever, always take free end as the origin for establishing moment expressions.
Choosing cantilever with support at A and Rb as redundant. Apply loads and redundant simultaneously to
BDS.
WwKN/m
Ma
A
Ra
B
Rb
L
Taking B as origin (for variation of X)

wX2
MX = RbX
0< X<L
2
L
1
M2 dX.
U =
A generalized strain energy expression due to moments.
2EI o
Therefore, partially differentiating the strain energy stored w.r.t. redundant, the generalized form is:
L
U
1
M
M dX
=
Where R is a typical redundant.
EI o R
R
Putting moment expression alongwith its limits of validity in strain energy expression.
L
1
wX22
RbX
U =
dX
2EI o
2
Partially differentiate strain energy U w.r.t. redundant Rb, and set equal to zero.
L
U
1
wX2
So
= b = 0 = RbX
(X) dX, because at B, there should be no deflection.
EI o
2
Rb
93
0=
1
wX3
RbX2
dX
EI o
2
L
0=
1 RbX3 wX4
EI 3
8 o
RbL3 wL4
=
3
8
Or
and
Rb =
+3
wL
8
The (+ve) sign with Rb indicates that the assumed direction of redundant Rb is correct. Now calculate Ra.
Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = wL
Ra = wL Rb
= wL
=
3
wL
8
8 wL 3 wL
8
Ra =
Put X = L and Rb =
Ma =
5
wL
8
3
wL in moment expression for MX already established before to get Ma.
8
3
wL2
wL .L
8
2
3
wL2
wL2
8
2
3 wL2 4 wL2
8
Ma =
wL2
8
The (ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be applied such that it gives us tension
at the top at point A.
94
Example No.2: Solve the following propped cantilever loaded at its centre as shown by method of least
work.
Ma
Rb
Ra
B.D.S.is a cantiever supported at A.

I
Rb is a redundant as shown.
x
Ma
x
B
Rb
Ra
L/2
BDS under loads and redundant. Taking point B as origin.
and
Mbc
= RbX
0 < X <
Mac
= RbX P x
L
2
L
< X < L. Now write strain energy expression.
2
L/2
U
U
Rb
L
2
1
1
L
(RbX)2 dX +
RbX PX dX. Partially differentiate
2EI o
2EI L/2
2
w.r.t redundant Rb.

L/2
L
1
1
L
[RbX] [X] dX +
Rbx PX [X] dX
= b = 0 =
EI o
EI L/2
2
L/2
1
1
L
RbX2 dX + RbX2 PX2 + P X dX
EI o
EI L/2
2
1 X3
1 RbX3 PX3 PL 2
Rb.
+
+
X
EI
3 o
EI 3
3
4
L/2. Put limits
1 RbL3 PL3 PL3 RbL3 PL3 PL3

1 RbL3
0 +
EI 24
EI 3 3 + 4 24 + 24 16
1 RbL3 RbL3 RbL3 PL3 PL3 PL3 PL3

+
+
+
EI 24
3
24
3
4
24
16
1 RbL3 16PL3 + 12PL3 + 2PL3 3PL3

+
EI 3
48
L/2
95
0
Or
RbL3 5PL3
3
48
RbL3 5PL3
=
3
48
=
+5P
16
Rb =
The (+ve) sign with Rb indicates that the assumed direction of redundant Rb is correct. Now Ra
can be calculated.
Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = P
Ra = P Rb
5P 16P 5P
Ra = P
=
16
16
Ra =
Put X = L and Rb =
11P
16
5P
in expression for Mac to get Ma.
16
5P
L
L P
16
2
5 PL 8 PL
=
16
Ma =
Ma =
3 PL
16
The (ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be acting such that it gives us
tension at the top.
2.5. 2ND DEGREE INDETERMINACY:
EXAMPLE NO. 3: Analyze the following fixed ended beam loaded by Udl by least work method.
WwKN/m
Mb
Ma
A
B
L
Ra
Rb
B.D.S. is chosen as a cantilever supported at A. Rb and Mb are chosen as redundants.

WwKN/m
Ma
Mb
x
B
Ra
Rb
BDS UNDER LOADS AND REDUNDANTS
96

wX2
Mb
0<X<L
Choosing B as origin.
2
Write strain energy expression.
L
2
1
wX2
RbX
=
Mb dX
2EI o
2
Differentiate strain energy partially w.r.t. redundant Rb and use castigations

theorem alongwith boundary condition.
L
1
wX2
RbX
= b = 0 =
Mb [X] dX
EI o
2
= RbX
Mx
U
Rb
1
wX2
RbX
Mb dX
EI o
2
1 X3 wX4 MbX2
Rb
EI
3
8
2 o
1
L3
wL4
MbL2
Rb
EI
3
8
2
= Rb
L3
wL4
MbL2
3
8
2
(1)
As there are two redundants, so we require two equations. Now differentiate strain energy
expression w.r.t. another redundants Mb. Use castigations theorem and boundary condition.
U
Mb
= b = 0 =
EI o
RbX wX Mb ( 1) dX
2
1
wX2
RbX +
+ Mb dX
EI o
2
1 RbX2
wX3
+
+ MbX
EI
2
6
o
Rb L2
wL3
+
+ MbL.
2
6
Rb L2
wL3
= MbL
2
6
So
Mb
RbL
wL2
2
6
RbL3
wL4
3
8
RbL wL L
6 2
2
(2) Put Mb in equation 1, we get
97
RbL3
wL4
RbL3
wL4
+
3
8
4
12
RbL3
wL4
12
24
Rb =
wL
2
Put Rb value in equation 2, we have

wL L
wL2
Mb =
6
2 2
Mb
+wL2
12
The (+ve) value with Rb and Mb indicates that the assumed directions of these two redundants
are correct. Now find other reactions Ra and Mb by using equations of static equilibrium.
Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = wL
Ra = wL Rb
wL
= wL
2
Ra =
Put X = L , Rb =
Ma =
wL
wL2
& Mb =
2
12
wL
2
in MX expression to get Ma
wL
wL2 wL2
.L
2
2
12
Ma =
wL2
12
The (ve) sign with Ma indicates that this moment should be applied in such direction that it
gives us tension at the top.
Example No. 4: Solve the same previous fixed ended beam by taking a simple beam as B.D.S.:
Choosing Ma and Mb as redundants.
Ma
WwKN/m
Mb
x
B
A
Ra
Rb

B.D.S. is a simply supported beam , So Ma and Mb are redundants.
98

Ma = 0
wL2
2
wL2
Rb L = (Mb Ma ) +
2
Mb
Ma
wL
Rb =
L + 2
Rb L + Ma = Mb +
MX = RbX Mb
So taking B as origin. Write MX expression.
wX2
2
0<X<L
Put Rb value
Mb Ma + wL X wX Mb
2
L 2
2
MX =
0 < X < L. Set up strain energy

expression.
U =
1
wX
Mb Ma wL

2EI o
L
+ 2 X 2 Mb dX. Differentiate w.r.t. Ma first.
Use castigations theorem and
boundary conditions.
2
U
1
wX2
X
Mb Ma wL
X
= a = 0 =
+
Mb dX. In general R.H.S.
EI o
L
2
2
L
Ma
1
is N.m.dX.
EI
L
1 MbX MaX wL
wX2
X
0 =
+
X
Mb dX
EI o L
L
2
2
L
L
0=
1 MbX2 MaX2 wX2 wX3 MbX

+
+
+
dX
EI o
L2
L2
2
2L
L
0=
1 Mb X2 Ma X3 wX3 wX4 MbX2
+ 2
+
+
EI L2 3
L 3
6
8L
2L o
Integrate it.
Simplify it.
MbL MaL wL3

+
(1)
6
3
24
Now differentiate U Partially w.r.t. Mb. Use castiglianos theorem and boundary conditions.
0=
U
1
wX2
X
Mb Ma wL
X
= b = 0 =
+
Mb 1 dX
EI o
L
2
2
L
Mb
L
0 =
1 MbX MaX wL
wX2
X
+
X
Mb 1 dX
EI o L
L
2
2
L
L
MbX2 MaX2 wLX2 wX3 MbX MbX MaX wLX wX2
+
+ MbdX
2
L2
2L
2L
L
L
L
2
2
o L
0 =
99
MbX3 MaX3 wX3 wX4 MbX2 MbX2 MaX2 wLX2 wX3
3L2 3L2 + 6 8L 2L 2L + 2L 4 + 6 + MbXo

Put limits now.
0 =
MbL2 MaL2 + wL wL MbL MbL + MaL wLL + wL + MbL

3L
6
8L
2L
2L
2L
4
6
3L
0=
Simplifying we get.
MbL MaL wL3
+
3
6
24
MbL
MaL wL3
=
+
3
6
24
0=
or
so
Mb =
wL2 Ma
8
2
(2),
Put Mb in equation (1) we get.
wL2 Ma L MaL wL3

8 2 6 + 3 24
0=
0=
Simplify to get Ma.
wL3 MaL MaL wL3
48
12
3
24
Ma =
wL2
12
Put Ma in equation (2) , we have

wL2 wL2 1
Mb =
8
12
2
or
Mb =
wL2
;
12
2
Rb =
Now Rb =
Ma + Mb + wL
L 2
Putting Ma and Mb we have.
wL wL
12 12
L
wL
2
Rb =
Fy = 0
Ra + Rb = wL
Ra = wL Rb
wL
Ra = wL
2
wL
2
Calculate Ra now.
Put value of Rb.
Ra =
wL
2
We get same results even with a different BDS. The beam is now statically determinate. SFD and
BMD can be drawn. Deflections at can be found by routine methods.
100
2.6. 2ND DEGREE INDETERMINACY OF BEAMS:

Exmaple No. 5: Solve the following loaded beam by the method of least work.
W
A
W
C
B
L/2
L/2
EI=Constant
B.D.S. is a cantilever supported at A. Rb &

Rc are chosen as redundants.
x
Ma
A
B
Rb
Ra
L/2
Rc
L/2

Choosing C as origin, Set-up moment expressions in different parts of this beam.
Mbc = Rc.X
wX2
2
0<X<
Mab = Rc.X + Rb X
L
2
L wX2
2
2
L
< X < L . Write strain energy expression for entire
2
structure.
L/2
L
2
2 2
1
wX
1
L
wX2
Rc.X
Rc.X + Rb X
U=
dX +
dX
2EI o
2
2EI L/2
2
2
Partially differentiate it w.r.t. redundant Rc first. Use castiglianos theorem and boundary
conditions.
L/2
U
1
= c = 0 =
EI o
Rc
L/2
Rc.X wX [X]dX + 1 Rc.X + Rb X L wX [X] dX

2
EI L/2
2
2
L
3
3
Rc.X2 wX dX + 1 Rc.X2 + Rb.X2 Rb.LX wX dX . Integrate it.
2
EI L/2
2
2
0=
EI o
0=
1 X3 wX 4
1
X3
X3 RbLX2
wX 4
Rc.
+ Rc.
+ Rb.
.
.
EI
3
8 o
EI
3
3
4
8 L/2
L/2
Insert limits and

simplify.
0 =
Rc.L3 5Rb.L3 wL4

+
3
48
8
(1)
101
Now partially differentiate strain energy w.r.t. Rb. Use Castiglianos theorem and boundary conditions.
L/2
L
U
1
wX2
1
L
wX2
L
= b = 0 = Rc.X
(0) dX + Rc.X + Rb X
X dX
EI o
2
EI L/2
2
2
2
Rb
L
0 = 0+
1
RbLX wX3 Rc.L.X RbL.X Rb.L2 wL.X2
Rc.X2 + RbX2
+
+
dX.
EI L/2
2
2
2
2
4
4
Integrate.
L
0 =
1 Rc.X3 Rb.X3 Rb.L.X2 wX4 Rc.L.X2 Rb.LX2 Rb.L2.X

wL.X3
+
+
+
.
EI 3
3
4
8
4
4
4
12 L/2
Put limits
0 =
Rc.L3 Rb.L3 Rb.L3 wL4 Rc.L3 Rb.L3 Rb.L3 wL4 Rc.L3 Rb.L3
+
+
+
3
3
4
8
4
4
4
12
24
24
+
Rb.L3 wL4 Rc.L3 Rb.L3 Rb.L3 wL4

+
+
+
16
128
16
16
8
96
Simplify to get
2
17
Rc. = Rb. +
wL
5
40
0 =
0 =
(2) Put this value of Rc in equation ( 1), to get Rb
2
17
L3 5
wL4
Rb. +
wL +
Rb.L3
5
40
8
3 48
(1)
2
17
5
wL4
Rb.L3 +
wL4 +
Rb.L3
15
120
48
8
Simplify to get
Rb. =
12
wL
21
Put value of Rb in equation (2) and evaluate Rc,

Rc =
2 12
17
wL +
wL
5 21
40
Rc =
11
wL
56
The (+ve) signs with Rb & Rc indicate that the assumed directions of these two redundants are correct.
Now calculate Ra.
Fy = 0
Ra + Rb + Rc = wL
or
Ra = wL Rb Rc . Put values of Rb and Rc from above and simplify.
102
= wL
Ra =
12
11 wL
wL
21
56
373
wL
1176
Ra =
91
wL
392
Putting the values of these reactions in Mx expression for span AB and set X = L, we have
Ma = Rc.L + Rb.
L wL2
. Put values of Rb and Rc from above and simplify.

2
2
11 wL
12
L wL2
.L +
wL
56
21
2
2
Ma =
21
wL2
1176
Ma =
7
wL2
392
The (ve) sign with Ma indicates that this reactive moment should be applied in such a direction that gives
us tension at the top. Now the beam has been analyzed and it is statically determinate now.
2.7. INTERNAL INDETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES BY FORCE METHOD :
The question of internal indeterminacy relates to the skeletal structures like trusses which have discrete line
members connected at the ends. The structures which fall in this category may include trusses and skeletal
frames.
For fixed ended portal frames, the question of internal indeterminacy is of theoretical interest only.
1
Relative displacement
of horizontal number =
Consider he truss shown in the above diagram. If this truss is to be treated as internally indeterminate, more
than one members can be considered as redundants. However, the following points should be considered
for deciding the redundant members.
(1)
The member which is chosen the redundant member is usually assumed to be removed or cut. The
selection of redundant should be such that it should not effect the stability of the remaining
structure.
103
(2)
The skeletal redundant members will have unequal elongations at the two ends and in the direction
in which the member is located. For example, if a horizontal member is chosen as redundant, then
we will be concerned with the relative displacement of that member in the horizontal direction
only.
(3)
Unequal nodal deflection (1 2 ) of a typical member shown above which is often termed as
relative displacement is responsible for the self elongation of the member and hence the internal
force in that member.
2.7.1. FIRST APPROACH: WHEN THE MEMBER IS REMOVED :

With reference to the above diagram, we assume that the redundant member (sloping up to left) in the
actual structure is in tension due to the combined effect of the applied loads and the redundant itself. Then
the member is removed and now the structure will be under the action of applied loads only.
B2
Together
B1
B
Apart
Due to the applied loads, the distance between the points B and D will increase. Let us assume that point B
is displaced to its position B2. This displacement is termed as apart. Now the same structure is considered
under the action of redundant force only and let us assume that point B2 comes to its position B1 (some of
the deflections have been recovered). This displacement is termed as together. The difference of these
two displacements ( apart together) is infact the self lengthening of the member BD and the
compatibility equation is
apart together = self elongation.
2.7.2. 2ND APPROACH
We assume that the member is infact cut and the distance between the cut ends has to vanish away when
the structure is under the action of applied loads and the redundant. In other words, we can say that the
deformation produced by the applied loads plus the deformation produced by the redundant should be equal
to zero.
B
C
1
1
D
F-Diagram
D
U-Diagram
104
Total
Deflection produced by redundants R =

i=1
2
UiLi X
AiEi
FiUiLi
i = 1 AiEi
If deflection is (+ve), there is elongation. If deflection is (ve), there is shortening.
P2L
Now U =
Elastic strain energy stored due to axial forces
2AE
Total
L =
Deflection produced by loads
P
AE
PROOF:
Work done = 1/2 P. = shaded area of P diagram.

Now f
(Hookes Law)
or
A L
(For direct stresses)
= E
A
L
where E is Yungs Modulus of elasticity.
Therefore work done
Work done =
PL
AE
P 1
PL
= P.
( Shaded area under P line __ By putting value of )
2 2
AE
P2L
(for single member)
2AE
Work done =
P2L
(for several members)
2AE
We know that Work done is always equal to strain energy stored.
105
EXAMPLE NO 6:
Analyze the truss shown below by Method of Least work. Take
(1)
Member U1L2 as redundant.
(2)
Member U1U2 as redundant. Number in brackets ( ) are

areas 103 m2. E = 200 106 KN/m2
U1
L0U1 = 7.5m
Cos = 0.8
Sin = 0.6 (3.0)
U2
(24)
(1.8)
(3.0)
(1.2)
6m
(1.8)
L3
L0
(2.4)
L1
(2.4)
L2
3 @ 4,5m
(2.4)
48KN
Note:
In case of internally redundant trusses, Unit load method (a special case of strain energy method)
is preferred over direct strain energy computations followed by their partial differentiation.
SOLUTION: Case 1 Member U1L2 as redundant
L0 U1=7.5m
Cos = 0.8
Sin = 0.6
3.0
L0
U2
U1
1.2
2.4
L1
1.8 1.2
2.4
3@4.5m
3.0
2.0
L2
6m
L3
48KN
F-Diagram
(1) U1L2 is redundant.:
STEPS
Remove this member.
Assume that tensile forces would be induced in this member.
Analyze the structure without U1L2 (B.D.S.) or F' diagram.
Displacement of members due to redundant + that due to loads should be equal

to zero. OR
L + R= 0
Analyze the truss with unit tensile force representing U1L2 or Udiagram.
(See diagram)
106
Condition: apart = 81
FUL
AE
together= 81
U1
2.4
U2L
PU1 L2
AE
U2
1.8
3.0
1.2
1.2
3.0
6m
2.4
L0
L1
L
3
L2
3@4.5m
48
(BDS under loads) F - diagram

16
+
0
SFD
32
144
72
B.M.D.
We shall determine member forces for F/ - diagram by method of moments and shears as
explained earlier. These are shown in table given in pages to follow. Member forces in U-diagram are
determined by the method of joints.
U1
0.60
U2
.0
+1
1
1
L
o
O
L1
Cos
L2
Sin
(BDS under) U-diagram redundant unit force.

JOINT (L2)
1
L1 L2
FX = 0
1 Sin + L1L2 = 0
L1L2 = Sin = 0.60
Fy = 0
U2L2 + 1 Cos = 0
U2L2 = Cos = 0.80
U2 L 2
L3
107
Joint (L1)
U1 L1
0.6
L1U2
L1L 2
FX =0
L1U2 Sin 0.6 = 0
L1U2 =
0.6
=+1
0.6
Fy = 0
L1U2 0.80 + UL1 = 0
U1L1 = 0.80
Now Book F/ forces induced in members as determined by moments and shears method and U
forces as determined by method of joints in a tabular form.
Member
U1U2
LoL1
L1L2
L2L3
LoU1
L1U2
U2L3
U1L1
U2L2
U1L2
A 10-3
(m2)
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
3.0
4.8
3.0
1.2
1.2
1.8
L
(m)
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
6.0
6.0
7.5
Fi
(KN)
12
+12
+24
+24
20
20
40
+16
+48
0
Ui
0.6
0
0.6
0
0
+1.0
0
0.8
0.8
+1.0
FUL
10-3
AE
(m)
+0.0675
0
0.135
0
0
0.416
0
0.32
0.96
0
U2L
10-3
AE
(m)
3.37510-3
0
3.37510-3
0
0
20.8310-3
0
1610-3
1610-3
20.8310-3
1.7635
103
80.91
106
Fi=Fi
+UiX
(KN)
25.15
+12
+10.84
+24
20
+ 1.93
40
1.54
+30.456
+21.96
Compatibility equation is
L+R=0
n
FUL
L=
AE
1
n
R=
1
U2L
.X
AE
Putting values from above table in compatibility equation. Where R = X = force

in redundant Member U1L2
108
or
1.7635 10-3 + 80.41 10-6. X = 0

1.7635 10-3 + 0.08041 10-3. X = 0
1.7635 + 0.08041 X = 0
0.08041 X = 1.7635
X =
1.7635
0.08041
(Force in members U1L2)
X = + 21.93 KN
Now final member forces will be obtained by formula Fi = Fi' + Ui X. These are also given in above table.
Apply check on calculated forces.
Check on forces
Joint Lo
20
12
16
Note:
Tensile forces in above table carry positive sign and are represented as acting away from joint.
Compressive forces carry negative sign and are represented in diagram as acting towards the joint.
Fx = 0
12 20 Sin = 0
12 20 0.6 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
16 20 Cos = 0
16 20 0.8 = 0
0 =0
Checks have been satisfied showing correctness of solution.
EXMAPLE NO. 7:
CASE 2: Analyze previous loaded Truss by taking U1 U2 as Redundant
U1
U2
40
F/ =Diagram
20
32
20
64
Cos
Sin
= 0.8
= 0.6
40
L3
L0
L1
16
36
L2 24
48
32
109
In this case member forces in BDS (F/ diagram) have been computed by method of joints due to
obvious reasons.)
Joint Lo:LoU1
16
LoL1
Fy = 0
16 + LoU1 Cos = 0
LoU1 =
16
= 20
0.8
FX = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 Sin = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 0.6 = 0
LoL1 20 0.6 = 0
LoL1 = + 12
Joint U1
20
U1 L1
U1 L2
FX = 0
20 Sin+ U1L2 Sin = 0
20 0.6 + U1L2 0.6 = 0
U1L2 = 20
Fy = 0
20 0.8 U1L1 U1L2 0.8 = 0
20 0.8 U1L1 + 20 0.8 = 0
U1L1 = 32
Joint L1:
32
L1 U2
12
L1 L2
Fy = 0
L1U2 Cos + 32 = 0
110
L1U2 =
32
0.8
L1U2 = 40
FX = 0
L1L2 + L1U2 Sin 12 = 0
L1L2 40 0.6 12 = 0
L1L2 = 36
Joint U2
40
U2 L2
U2 L3
FX = 0
40 Sin + U2L3 Sin = 0
40 0.6 + U2L3 0.6 = 0
U2L3 = 40
Fy = 0
40 Cos U2L3 Cos U2L2 = 0
40 0.8 ( 40) 0.8 U2L2 = 0
U2L2 = 64
Joint L2
20
64
L2 L3
36
48
FX = 0
L2L3 + 20 Sin 36 = 0
L2L3 + 20 0.6 36 = 0
L2L3 24 = 0
L2L3 = 24
111
Joint L3 (Checks)
40
24
32
FX = 0
40 Sin 24 = 0
40 0.6 24 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
32 40 Cos = 0
32 40 0.8 = 0
0 = 0
Checks are satisfied. Results are OK and are given in table at page to follow:
Now determine member forces in U diagram.

U1
1 1
U2
1.66
0
1.328
1.66
1.328
L0
0
L1
L2
U-Diagram
(BDS under unit redundant force)

Joint U1
U1 L1
FX = 0
1 + U1L2 Sin = 0
1 + U1L2 0.6 = 0
U1 L2
L3
112

U1L2 = 1.66
Fy = 0
U1L1 +U1L2 Cos = 0
U1L1 + ( 1.66) 0.8 = 0
U1L1 = 1.328
Joint L1 :1.328
L1 U2
L1 L2
Fy = 0
1.328 + L1U2 0.8 = 0
L1U2 =
1.328
= 1.66
0.8
FX = 0
L1L2 + L1L2 0.6 = 0
L1L2 1.66 0.6 = 0
L1L2 = +1
Entering results of member forces pertaining to F/ diagram and U diagram alongwith member
properties in a tabular form.
Member
U1U2
LoL1
L1L2
L2L3
LoU1
L1U2
U2L3
U1L1
U2L2
U1L2
A
10-3
(m)
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
3.0
1.8
3.0
1.2
1.2
1.8
L
(m)
Fi
(KN)
U1
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
6.0
6.0
7.5
0
+12
+ 36
+24
20
40
40
+ 32
+ 64
20
+1
0
+1
0
0
1.66
0
1.328
1.328
1.66
FUL
10-3
AE
(m)
0
0
+0.3375
0
0
+1.383
0
1.0624
2.1248
0.691
5.6 10-3
U2L
10-3
AE
(m)
9.375 10-3
0
9.375 10-3
0
0
57.4 10-3
0
44.09 10-3
44.09 10-3
57.4 10-3
221.73 10-6
Fi=Fi+UiX
(KN)
25.34
+ 12
+10.66
+ 24
20
+2.06
40
+ 65.65
+ 97.65
62.06
113
L + R = 0 Putting values of L and R due to redundant from above table.
56 10-3 + 221.73 10-6 X = 0 ,
or
where X is force in redundant member U1U2.
5.6 10 -3 + 0.22173 10-3 X = 0

X =
5.6 10-3
0.22173 10-3
X = 25.34 KN.
Therefore forces in truss finally are as follows.

(by using formula (Fi = Fi' + UiX and are given in the last
column of above table)
FU1 U2 = 0 + Ui.x = 0 25.34 1 = 25.34

FLoL1 = 12 25.34 0 = + 12
FL1L2 = 36 25.34 1 = + 10.66
FL2L3 = 24 0 = + 24
FLoU1 = 20 0 25.34 = 20
FL1U2 = 40 + 1.66 25.34 = + 2.06
FU2L3 = 40 + 0 25.34 = 40
FU1L1 = + 32 + 1.328 25.34 = + 65.65
FU2L2 = + 64 + 1.328 25.34 = + 97.65
FU1L2 = 20 1.66 25.34 = 62.06. Now based on these values final check can be applied.
Joint Lo.
20
12
FX = 0
12 20 Sin = 0
12 20 0.6 = 0
0=0
Fy = 0
16 20 Cos = 0
16 20 0.8 = 0
16 16 = 0
0=0
Results are OK.
16
114
2.8. STEPS FOR TRUSS SOLUTION BY METHOD OF LEAST WORK.

Now instead of Unit load method, we shall solve the previous truss by direct use of method of
least work.
(1)
Consider the given truss under the action of applied loads and redundant force X
in member U1L2
(2)
The forces in the relevant rectangle will be a function of applied load and
redundant force X. (As was seen in previous unit load method solution)
(3)
Formulate the total strain energy expression due to direct forces for all the
members in the truss.
(4)
Partially differentiate the above expressions with respect to X.
(5)
Sum up these expressions and set equal to zero. Solve for X.
(6)
With this value of X, find the member forces due to applied loads and redundant acting
simultaneously (by applying the principle of super positions).
EXAMPLE NO. 8 :Analyze the loaded truss shown below by least work by treating member U1L2 as redundant.
Numbers in ( ) are areas 10-3 m2 . E = 200 106 KN/m2.
SOLUTION:-
48 x 4.5
= 16KN
b = 10
r =3
j =6
b+r =2j
10 + 3 = 2 6
13 = 12
D = 13 12 = 1
48
32
115
Stable Indeterminate to 1st degree.
X
X
48
16
32
F Diagram (Truss under loads and redundant)

NOTE: Only the rectangle of members containing redundant X contains forces in terms of X as has been
seen earlier. Now analyze the Truss by method of joints to get Fi forces.
JOINT L0
L0U1
L0L1
16KN
Fy = 0
LoU1 Cos + 16 = 0
16
LoU1 =
Cos
16
=
0.8
LoU1 = 20 KN
FX = 0
LoL1 + LoU1 Sin = 0
LoL1 + (20) 0.6 = 0
LoL1 12 = 0
LoL1 = 12 KN
Joint U1
U1 U2
20
FX = 0
U1 U2 + X Sin + 20 Sin = 0
U1L1
116

U1 U2 + X 0.6 + 20 0.6 = 0
U1 U2 = (0.6 X +12)
Fy = 0
U1 L1 X Cos + 20 Cos = 0
U1 L1 X 0.8 + 20 0.8 = 0
U1 L1 = 0.8 X + 16
U1L1 = (0.8 X 16)
Joint L1 :0.8X - 16
L1U
2
L1 L2
12
Fy = 0
(0.8X 16) + L1 U2 Cos = 0
L1U2 0.8 = 0.8 X 16
L1U2 = (X 20)
FX = 0
L1L2 + L1U2 Sin 12 = 0
Put value of L1U2.
L1L2 + (X 20 ) 0.6 12 = 0
L1L2 + 0.6 X 12 12 = 0
L1 L2 = (0.6X 24)
Joint U2
(0.6X+12)
(X-20)
U2 L2
U2 L3
FX = 0
(0.6 X + 12) + U2L3 Sin (X 20) Sin = 0
0.6 X + 12 + U2L3 0.6 (X 20) 0.6 = 0
117

0.6 X + 12 + 0.6U2L3 0.6 X + 12 = 0
U2L3 =
24
0.6
U2L3 = 40 KN
Fy = 0
U2L2 (X 20) Cos U2L3 Cos = 0
U2L2 (X 20) 0.8 ( 40) 0.8 = 0
U2L2 0.8 X + 16 + 32 = 0
0.8 X + 48 = U2L2
U2L2 = (0.8X 48)

Joint L2:0.8 X - 48
X
L2 L3
0.6 X -24
48
FX = 0
L2L3 + 0.6 X 24 X Sin = 0
L2L3 = 0.6 X + 24 + 0.6 X
L2L3 = 24 KN
Fy = 0
(0.8X 48) 48 + X Cos = 0
0.8X + 48 48 + 0.8X = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
Joint L3 :At this joint, all forces have already been calculated. Apply checks for corretness.
40
24
32
118

FX = 0
40 Sin 24 = 0
40 0.6 24 = 0
24 24 = 0
0 =0
O.K.
Fy = 0
40 Cos + 32 = 0
40 0.8 + 32 = 0
32 + 32 = 0
O.K. Checks have been satisfied.
0 =0
This means forces have been calculated correctly. We know that strain energy stored in entire
Fi2L
Truss is U =
2AE
Fi
. Li
Fi
X
U
So,
= = 0 =
AE
X
Fi
. Li
Fi
X
= 0 = 80.41 106X 1764.17 106 Values of Fi and Li for various
AE
members have been picked up from table annexed.
0 = 80.41 X 1764.17
or
80.41 X = 1764.17
1764.17
80.41
X = 21.94 KN
X=
Now putting this value of X in column S of annexed table will give us member forces.
Now apply equilibrium check on member forces calculated. You may select any Joint say L1.
Joint L1 :15.5
12
or
1.74
10.84
FX = 0,
10.84 12 + 1.94 Sin = 0
or 10.84 12 + 1.94 0.6 = 0 ,
0 = 0 (Check)
It means that solution is correct.
Insert here Page No. 138A
119
120
EXAMPLE NO. 9:- By the force method analyze the truss shown in fig. below. By using the forces in
members L1U2 and L2U3 as the redundants. Check the solution by using two different members as the redundants.
E = 200 10 6 KN/m2
SOLUTION:L0U1 = 7.5m
U1 (1.8) U2 (1.8)
Cos = 0.8
(1.2)
(1.2)
Sin = 0.6 (2.4) 0 0
(0.90) (1.2) (1.2) (0.60)
(1.5)
(1.5)
(1.5)
L0
L1
L2
48KN
96KN
48+96+724@4.5m
114 = 102KN
F - Diagram
U3
(0.90)
(1.5)
L3
72KN
6m
L4
48x4.5 + 96x9
18
18
+ 72x13.5 = 114KN
18
(1.2)
(1.2)
loads only.
(0.90) (1.2)(0.60) (1.2)(0.90)(2.4) 6m Or F-Diagram
(1.5)
L4
(1)(1.5)
(2)(1.5)
L4
L1
L2
L3
114KN
48KN
96KN
72KN
(2.4)
(1.5)
L0
102KN
4@4.5m
54KN
102KN
0
42KN
459 KN-m
S.F.D.
0
114KN
702KN-m
513KN-m
+
B.M.D.
0
0.6
0
0
0
0.8
0.8
L0
L1
L2
0
L4
L3
0.6
0
0.8
0.8
L2 0.6
L3 0
X1L + X1R1 + X1R2 = 0
0
L0 0
L1
6m U1-Diagram for redundant X1
6m U2-diagram for redundant X2

L4
Compatibility equations are:
X2L + X2R1 + X2R2 = 0

Here
R1 = X1
R2 = X2
(1) Change in length in member 1 due

to loads and two redundants should be zero.
(2) Change in length in member 2 due to loads
and two redundants should be zero.
121

.FU1 L
= Deflection produced in member (1) due to applied loads.
AE
U12L
X1R1 = Deflection produced in member (1) due to redundant R1 =
AE . X1
U1U2L
x1R2 = Deflection produced in member (1) due to redundant R2 =
AE . X2
FU2L
x2L = Deflection produced in member (2) due to loads =
AE
U1U2L
x2R1 = Deflection produced in member (2) due to redundant R1 =
AE . X1
U22L
x2R2 = Deflection produced in member (2) due to redundant R 2 =
AE . X2
Where X1L =
From table attached, the above evaluated summations are picked up and final member forces can be seen
in the same table. All member forces due to applied loads (Fi' diagram) have been determined by the
method of moments and shears and by method of joints for U1 and U2 diagrams.
Evaluation of member forces in verticals of F Diagram :Forces in verticals are determined from mothod of joints for different trusses shown above.
(Joint L1)
U1 L1
76.5
76.5
48
Fy = 0
U1L1 48 = 0
U1L1 = 48
(Joint U2)
85.5
117
Fy = 0
U2L2 + 52.5 Cos = 0
U2L2 + 52.5 0.8 = 0
U2L2 = 52.5 0.8
U2L2 = + 42
U2 L2
52.5
122
(Joint U3)
85.5
142.5
U3 L3
Fy = 0
U3L3 + 142.5 Cos = 0
U3L3 = 142.5 0.8
U3L3 = + 114
Evaluation of forces in verticals of U1 Diagram:(Joint L1)

U1 L1
1
L1 L2
FX = 0
L1L2 + 1 Sin = 0
L1L2 = 0.6
Fy = 0
U1L1 + 1 Cos = 0
U1L1 = 0.8
(Joint U1 )
U1 U2
U1 L2
FX = 0
U1U2 + U1L2 Sin = 0
0.8
123

Fy = 0
+ 0.8 U1L2 Cos = 0
0.8 = U1L2 0.8
U1L2 = 1
so
U1U2 + 1 0.6 = 0
Putting value of U1L2 in FX.
U1 U2 = 0.6
Now from the table, the following values are taken.
X1L = 0.671 10 -3
X1R1 = 125.7 106X1 = 0.1257 10-3X1
X1R2 = 32 10-6 X2 = 0.032 10-3X2
X2L = 6.77 10-3
X2R1 = 0.032 10-3 X1
X2R2 = 125.6 10-6X2 = 0.1256 103X2
Putting these in compatibility equations, we have.
0.671 103+0.1257 103X1+0.032 103X2 = 0
(1)
6.77 103+0.032 103 X1+0.1256 103X2 = 0
(2)
dividing by 103
0.671+0.1257X1 + 0.032X2 = 0
(1)
6.77 + 0.032X1 + 0.1256X2 = 0
(2)
From (1), X1 =
0.671 0.032X2
0.1257
(3)
Put X1 in (2) & solve for X2

6.77 + 0.032
0.671 0.032X2
0.1257
+ 0.1256X2 = 0
6.77 + 0.171 8.146 10-3X2 + 0.1256X2 = 0

6.599 + 0.1174X2 = 0
0.1174X2 = 6.599
X2 = 56.19 KN
From (3)
X1 =
0.671 0.032 56.19

0.1257
X1 = 8.96 KN
After redundants have been evaluated, final member forces can be calculated by using the formula shown
in last column of table. Apply checks on these member forces.
124
CHECKS:(Joint Lo)
127.5
76.5
102
FX = 0
76.5 127.5 Sin = 0
76.5 127.5 0.6 = 0
0=0
Fy = 0
102 127.5 Cos = 0
102 127.5 0.8 = 0
0=0
The results are O.K. Follow same procedure if some other two members are considered redundant.
See example No. 12.
Insert Page No. 143A
125
126
2.9. SIMULTANEIOUS INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL TRUSS REDUNDANCY

EXAMPLE NO. 10: Determine all reactions and member forces of the following truss by using
castiglianos theorem or method of least work. Consider it as:
(i)
internally redundant;
(ii)
internally and externally redundant.
Nos. in ( ) are areas in 10-3m2. E = 200 106 KN/m2
3KN C
20KN
20KN
(4)
D
(3)
(3)
8m
(2)
6KN B
(4)
(2)
(5)
(5)
8m
(2)
F
A
6m
SOLUTION:
DEGREE OF INDETERMINACY :D = (m + r ) 2 j = (10 + 4 ) 2 6 = 2
Therefore, the truss is internally statically indeterminate to the 2nd degree. There can be two
approaches, viz, considering two suitable members as redundants and secondly taking one member
and one reaction as redundants for which the basic determinate structure can be obtained by
cutting the diagonal CE and replacing it by a pair of forces X1 X1 and replacing the hinge at F
by a roller support with a horizontal redundant reaction HF = X2. Applying the first approach and
treating inclineds of both storeys sloping down to right as redundants.
(I) WHEN THE TRUSS IS CONSIDERED AS INTERNALLY REDUNDANT :3KN C
20KN
20KN
(4)
X1
(3)
6KN B
(3)
8m
(2)
(4)
X1
(2)
(5)
(5)
X2 (2)
A
8m
6m
Applying method of joints for calculating member forces.
127
Consider Joint (C) and all unknown forces are assumed to be in tension to begin with , acting away from
the joint. Length AE= 10 m , cos = 0.6 , sin = 0.8
Joint (C)
20KN
3KN
SCD
X1
SBC
FX = 0
Scd + 3 + X1 Cos = 0
Scd = (3 + 0.6 X1)
Fy = 0
Sbc X1 Sin 20 = 0
Sbc = ( 20 + 0.8 X1 )
Joint (D)
20KN
(3+0.6X1)
S BD
FX = 0
3 + 0.6X1 SBD 0.6 = 0
SBD = ( 5 + X1 )
Fy = 0
SDE 20 SBD Sin = 0
SDE 20 ( 5 + X1 ) 0.80 = 0
SDE = ( 24 + 0.8X1 )
Joint (B)
SDE
(20+0.8X1)
(5+X1)
6KN
SBE
X2
SAB
FX = 0
SBE + (5+X1) 0.6 + X2 0.6 + 6 = 0
SBE = ( 9 + 0.6 X1 + 0.6 X2)
Fy = 0
128

SAB X2 Sin (20 + 0.8 X1) + (5+X1) Sin = 0
SAB 0.8 X2 20 0.8 X1 + 4 + 0.8 X1 = 0
SAB = (16 + 0.8 X2 )
Joint (E)
(24 + 0.8 x 1)
X1
9+0.6X1 + 0.6X2
SAE
SEF
FX = 0
9 + 0.6 X1 + 0.6 X2 X1 x 0.6 SAE 0.6 = 0
9 + 0.6 X2 = SAE 0.6
SAE = ( 15 + X2 )
Fy = 0
SEF 24 0.8 X1 + X1 0.8 (15 + X2 ) 0.8 = 0
SEF = 24 0.8 X1 + 0.8 X1 12 0.8 X2 = 0
SEF = 36 0.8 X2
SEF = (36 + 0.8 X2 )
Enter Forces in table. Now applying Catiglianos theorem and taking values from table attached.
S L
S.
.
= 0 = 485.6 + 65.64X1 + 2.7X2 = 0
(1)
X1 AE
and
S L
S.
.
= 0 = 748.3 + 2.7X1 + 62.94 X2 = 0
(2)
X2 AE
or
485.6 + 65.64 X1 + 2.7 X2 = 0

748.3 + 2.7 X1 + 62.94 X2 = 0
(1)
(2)
From (1)
X2 =
485.6 + 65.64 X1
2.7
putting in (2)
748.3 + 2.7 X1 62.94
485.6 + 65.64 X1
(2)
2.7
=0
748.3+2.7X1 11319.875 1530.141X1 10571.575 1527.441 X1 = 0
(3)
X1 = 6.921 KN
From (3)
X2 =
485.6 65.64 6.921

2.7
X2 = 11.592 KN
Now put values of X1 and X2 in 5th column of S to get final number forces SF as given in last
column of table. Apply equilibrium check to verify correctness of solution.
129
130
EQUILIBRIUM CHECKS :Joint (A)

6.726KN
3.408KN
HA
4KN
FX = 0
3.408 Cos HA 0
HA = 2.045 KN
Fy = 0
6.726 + 4 + 3.408 Sin = 0
0 = 0 Check is OK.
Joint (F)
11.592KN
26.726KN
HF
36KN
FX = 0
HF + 11.592 Cos = 0
HF = + 6.955 KN
Fy = 0
36 27.726 11.592 Sin = 0
0 = 0 (check)
It means solution is correct. Now calculate vertical reactions and show forces in diagram.
131
20KN
20KN
3KN
1.153
6.921
14.463
18.463
8m
1.921
4.426
6KN
B
6.726
HA=2.045Kn
8m
26.726
11.592
HF=6.955KN
F
3.408
A
VA=4KN
VF=+36KN
6m
ANALYZED TRUSS
MA = 0
VF 6 20 6 3 16 6 8 = 0
VF = + 36 KN
Fy = 0
VA + VF = 40 KN
VA = + 4 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 11:
CASE II : When the Truss is considered as both externally & internally redundant.
Taking SCE & HF as redundants. Now Truss is determinate and calculate vertical reactions.
20KN
3kn
C
20KN
Fy = 0
VA + VF = 40
D
X
Cos =0.6
MA = 0
VFx6 - 3x16-20x6-6x8=0
8m
6KN
Sin 0.8
=0.8
VF = 36KN
and
VA = 4KN
8m
(9-HF)
A
4KN
6m
36Kn
Fig. 2.51
HF
132
Compatibility Equations are:

S L
S.
.
= 0
(1)
HF AE
Partial differentiation of strain energy w.r.t. HF = H = 0.

(Pin support)
S
L
S.
.
= 0
X AE
(2)
Partial differentiation of strain energy w.r.t. X = elongation of
member CE due to X = 0.
As before determine member forces Si in members by method of joints.
Joint (A)
SAB
S AE
(9-HF)
FX = 0
SAE Cos (9 HF) = 0
SAE 0.6 (9 HF) = 0
9 HF
SAE =
0.6
SAE = 15 1.67 HF
Fy = 0
4 + SAB + SAE Sin = 0
4 + SAB + (15 1.670 HF ) 0.8 = 0
4 + SAB + 12 1.33 HF = 0
SAB = 16 + 1.33 HF
SAB = (16 1.33 HF )
Joint (F)
S BF
SEF
HF
36
133

FX = 0
HF SBF Cos = 0
HF 0.6 SBF = 0
HF = 0.6 SBF
SBF = 1.67 HF
Fy = 0
36 + SEF + SBF Sin = 0
36 + SEF 1.67 HF 0.8 = 0
SEF = (36 1.33 HF)
Joint (E)
SDE
SBE
(36 - 1.33HF)
(15-1.67HF)
FX = 0
SBE X Cos (15 1.67 HF) Cos = 0
SBE 0.6X ( 15 1.67 HF ) 0.6 = 0
SBE 0.6X 9 + HF = 0
HF 0.6X 9 = SBE
SBE = (HF 0.6 X 9)
Fy = 0
SDE +36 1.33 HF + X Sin (15 1.67HF ) Sin = 0 by putting Sin = 0.08
SDE + 36 1.33 HF + 0.8X 12 + 1.33 HF = 0
SDE = 0.8X 24
SDE = ( 24 + 0.8X)
Joint (C)
20KN
3KN
S CD
X
SBC
134

FX = 0
SCD + 3 + X Cos = 0
SCD = ( 3 + 0.6X)
Fy = 0
20 SBC X Sin = 0
20 SBC 0.8X = 0
SBC = ( 20 + 0.8 X )
Joint (D)
20KN
(3+0.6X)
SBD
(24+ 0.8X)
FX = 0
3 + 0.6X SBD Cos = 0
3 + 0.6X 0.6 SBD = 0
SBD = ( 5 + X)
Fy = 0
20 + 24 + 0.8X SBD Sin = 0
20 + 24 + 0.8X ( 5 + X ) 0.8 = 0
20 + 24 + 0.8X 4 0.8X = 0
0 = 0 (check)
Calculation of HF & X :
From the attached table, picking up the values of summations, we have.
S L
. S.
.
= 0 = (1247.03 + 175.24 HF 4.5 X) 106
HF AE
135
. S.
and
S L
.
= 0 = (460.6 4.5 HF + 65.64X) 10-6
X AE
1247.03 + 175.24 HF 4.5X = 0

+ 460.6 4.5 HF + 65.64X = 0
(1)
(2)
From (1)
X=
1247.03 + 175.24 HF
4.5
Put in (2) to get HF

460.6 4.5 HF + 65.64
(3)
1247.03 + 175.24 HF
4.5
= 0
460.6 4.5 HF 18190.01 + 2556.17 HF = 0

17729.41 + 2551.67 HF = 0
HF = 6.948 KN
X=
or
Put this value in 3 to get X.
1247.03 + 175.24 6.948

4.5
(3)
X = 6.541 KN Now calculate number Forces by putting the values of X and

HF in S expressions given in column 5 of the attached table.
These final forces appear in last column for SF.
3KN
20KN
0.925
14.762
6KN
2.052Kn
1.541
6.641
1.873
20KN
D
18.767
8m
E
3.392
8m
26.759
6.759
11.603
A
6.948KN
F
4kn
6m
36KN
Fig 2.52 ANALYZED TRUSS
136
137
Equilibrium checks for the accuracy of calculated member Forces:Joint (A)

6.759
3.397
2.052
FX = 0
3.397 Cos 2.052 = 0
0 = 0 Check
Fy = 0
6.759 + 4 + 3.397 0.8 = 0
0 = 0 Check
Joint (F)
11.603
26.759
6.948
FX = 0
6.948 + 11.603 0.6 = 0
0 0 Check
36
Fy = 0
36 26.759 11.603 0.8 = 0
0 0 Check
Joint (C)
20
0.925
14.767
6.541
FX = 0
0.925 6.541 0.6 + 3 = 0
0 = 0 Check
Fy = 0
14.767 20 + 6.541 0.8 = 0
0 = 0 Check. This verifies correctness of solution.
138
EXAMPLE NO. 12:By the unit loadmethod analyze the internally indeterminate truss shown below. Take the forces
in members L1U2 and U2L3 as the redundants.
Note:
The same truss has already been solved in Example No. 9, by taking L1 U2 and L2 U3 as
redundants.
E = 200 106 KN/m2
SOLUTION:U1 (1.8) U2 (1.8) U3

LoU1 = 7.5 m
Cos = 0.8
(2.4)
(1.2)
(1.2) (0.90)(2.4)
Sin = 0.6
0.90 (1.2)
(1.2)
L4
(1.5)
(1.5)
(1.5)
L0 (1.5)
L1
L2
L3
102KN
72KN
96KN
48KN
114KN
4@4.5m
U1
L0
U2
L1
L2
U3
B.D.S. Under applied

load only.
Or F/-Diagram
L4
L3
72KN
96KN
48KN
6m
F-Diagram
102KN
114KN
102
54
+
0
S.F.D.
42
114
702
459
513
+
B.M.D.
U1 0.6
1
U2 0
0.8
0.8
L0
L0
0.6
L2 0
U2 0.6
L1
U1 0
U3
L1
L4
0.8 0
0.8
L3 0
U3
U1 -Diagram
L2 0.6
L3 0
U2-Diagam
L4
139
Compatibility equations are :

X1 + X1 R1 + X1R2 = 0
(1)
Here X1 = R1
X2 = R2
Deflection created by applied loads and redundants shall be zero.
(2)
X2L + X2R1 + X2R2 = 0
X1L = .
FU1L
(Change in length of first redundant member by applied loads)
AE
U12L
AE X1 (Change in length in first redundant member due to first redundant force)
X1R1 =
X1R2 =
U1U2L
AE . X2
X2L =
FU2L
AE
(Change in length in first redundant member due to second redundant force)
(Change in second redundant member due to applied load.)
X2R1 =
U1U2L
AE . X1 (Change in length of second redundant member due to first redundant force.)
U22L
AE . X2 (Change in length of second redundant member due to redundant force in it.)
X2R2 =
Picking up the above deformations from the table (158A) and calculate final member forces by following
formula.
F = F' + U1X1 + U2X2
Forces in chord members and inclineds are determined by the method of moments and shears as explained
already, while for verticals method of joints has been used.
Evaluation of force in verticals of F Diagram
(Joint L2)
67.5
U2 L2
52.5
76.5
85.5
96
FX = 0
85.5 76.5 + 52.5 Sin 67.5 Sin = 0
85.5 76.5 + 52.5 0.6 67.5 0.6 = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
Fy + 0
U2L2 + 52.5 Cos + 67.5 Cos 96 = 0
U2L2 = 52.5 0.8 67.5 0.8 + 96 = 0
U2L2 = 0
140
141
Picking the following values from attached table (Table for example No.12)
X1L = + 1.009 103
X1R1 = + 125.7 106 X1 = + 0.1257 103 X1
X1R2 = + 32 106 X2 = + 0.032 103 X2
X2L = 0.171 103
X2R1 = + 32 106 X1 = + 0.032 103 X1
X2R2 = + 125.7 106 X2 = + 0.1257 103 X2
Putting these in compatibility equals.
(1)
1.009 103+0.1257 103 X1+0.032 103 X2 = 0
(2)
0.171 103+0.032 103X1+0.1257 103X2 = 0
Simplify
(1)
1.009 + 0.1257 X1 + 0.032 X2 = 0
(2)
0.171 + 0.032 X1 + 0.1257X2 = 0
From (1)
X1 =
1.009 0.032 X2
0.1257
Put in (2) & solve for X2

0.171 + 0.032
(3)
1.009 0.032 X2
0.1257
+ 0.1257 X2 = 0
0.171 0.257 8.146 103 X2 + 0.1257X2 = 0

0.428 + 0.1176 X2 = 0
X2 =
0.428
0.1176
X2 = 3.64 KN
(3) X1 =
Put this in equation (3) to get X1
1.009 0.032 3.64

0.1257
X1 = 8.95 KN
So final forces in members are calculated by the following given formula.

F = F+ U1 X1 + U2 X2
FLoL1 = 76.5 + 0 + 0 = + 76.5 KN
FL1 L2 = 76.5 + ( 0.6) ( 8.95) + 0 = + 81.87 KN
FL2 L3 = 85.5 + 0 + 3.64) ( 0.6) = + 83.32 KN
FL3 L4 = 85.5 + 0 + 0 = + 85.5 KN
FU1 U2 = 117 + ( 0.6) ( 8.95) + 0 = 111.63 KN
FU2 U3 = 117 + o +( 0.6) (3.64) = 119.18 KN
FU1 L1 = + 48 + ( 0.8) ( 8.95) + 0 = + 55.16 KN
FU2 L2 = 0 + ( 0.8) ( 8.95) + ( 0.8) (3.64) = + 4.25 KN
142
FU3 L3 = + 72 + 0 + ( 0.8) (3.64) = + 69.09 KN

Flo U1 = 127.5 + 0 + 0 = 127.5 KN
FU1 L2 = + 67.5 + (1) ( 8.95) + 0 = 58.55 KN
FL1 U2 = 0 + (1) ( 8.95) + 0 = 8.95 KN
FU2 L3 = 0 + 0 + (1) (3.64) = + 3.64 KN
FL2 U3 = 52.5 + 0 + (1) (3.64) = + 56.14 KN
FU3 L4 = 142.5 + 0 + 0 = 142.5 KN
CHECK ON FORCE VALUES
We may apply check at random at any joint. If solution is correct, equilibrium checks will be
satisfied at all joint.
Joint Lo.
127.5
76.5
FX = 0
76.5 127.5 Sin = 0
76.5 127.5 0.6 = 0
0=0
102
Fy = 0
102 127.5 0.8 = 0
0=0
OK. Results seem to be correct.
The credit for developing method of least work goes to Alberto Castiglianos who worked as an engineer in Italian
Railways. This method was presented in a thesis in partial fulfillment of the requirement for the award of diploma
engineering of associate engineer. He published a paper for finding deflections which is called Castiglianos first
theorem and in consequence thereof, method of least work which is also known as Castiglianos second theorem.
Method of least work also mentioned earlier in a paper by an Italian General Menabrea who was not able to give a
satisfactory proof. Leonard Euler had also used the method about 50 years ago for derivation of equations for
buckling of columns wherein, Daniel Bernolli gave valuable suggestion to him.
Method of least work or Castiglianos second theorem is a very versatile method for the analysis of
indeterminate structures and specially to trussed type structures. The method does not however, accounts
for erection stresses, temperature stresses or differential support sinking. The reader is advised to use some
other method for the analysis of such indeterminate structures like frames and continuos beams.
It must be appreciated in general, for horizontal and vertical indeterminate structural systems, carrying various
types of loads, there are generally more than one structural actions present at the same time including direct forces,
shear forces, bending moments and twisting moments. In order to have a precise analysis all redundant structural
actions and hence strain energies must be considered which would make the method laborious and cumbersome.
Therefore, most of engineers think it sufficient to consider only the significant strain energy. The reader should
know that most of structural analysis approaches whether classical or matrix methods consider equilibrium of
forces and displacement/strain compatibility of members of a system.
143
The basis of the method of consistent deformation and method of least work are essentially the same. In
consistent deformation method, the deformation produced by the applied loads are equated to these
produced by the redundants. This process usually results in the evolution of redundants. However, in the
method of least work, total strain energy expression of a structural system in terms of that due to known
applied loads and due to redundants is established. Then the total strain energy is partially differentiated
with respect to redundant which ultimately result in the evolution of the redundant. It must be appreciated
that, for indeterminate structural system like trusses, the unknown redundants maybe external supports
reaction or the internal forces or both. And it may not be very clear which type of redundants should be
considered as the amount of work involved in terms of requisite calculation may vary. Therefore, a clever
choice of redundants (or a basic determinate structure as was the case with consistent deformation method)
may often greatly reduce the amount of work involved.
There is often a debate going on these days regarding the utility or justification of classical structural
analysis in comparison to the computer method of structural analysis. It is commented that in case of
classical methods of structural analysis the student comes across basic and finer points of structural
engineering after which a computer analysis of a complex structure maybe undertaken.
In the absence of basic knowledge of classical structural analysis, the engineer maybe in a difficult position
to justify to computer results which are again to be checked against equilibrium and deformation
compatibility only.
EXAMPLE NO. 13:
The procedure for analysis has already been given. Utilizing that procedure, analyze the following
truss by the method of least work. Areas in ( ) carry the units of 103 m2 while the value of E can
be taken as 200 106 KN/m2.
E
4
A
2 2
2 2
2
2
B
3@4.5m
where
2
C
15 kN
4.5m
D
i = total degree of indeterminacy

b = number of bars.
r = total number of reactive components which the support can provide.
b + r = 2j
10 + 3 > 2 6
13 > 12 so i= 1 .
First degree internal indeterminancy.
F2L
U =
Strain energy due to direct forces induced due to applied loads in a BDS Truss.
2 AE
U
F
L
= F.
.
= 0
AE
X
X
144
Note: We select the redundants in such a way that the stability of the structure is not
effected. Selecting member EC as redundant.
E
F
x
4.5m
x
A
C 15KN
5KN
10KN
F-diagram B.D.S. under the action of applied loads & redundant.
5
S.F.D. due to applied

load only.
+
45
10
22.5
+
load only.
Method of moments and shears has been used to find forces in BDS due to applied loads. A table
has been made. Forces vertical in members in terms of redundant X may be determined by the method of
joints as before. From table.
F.
F
L
.
= 0
AE
x
= 331.22 106 + 51.49 106X

or 331.22 + 51.49X = 0
X = + 6.433 KN
The final member forces are obtained as below by putting value of X in column 5 of the table.
Member
Force (KN)
AB
+5
BC
+5.45
CD
+ 10
EF
9.55
BE
+ 0.45
CF
+ 10.45
CE
+ 6.43
BF
0.64
AE
7.07
DF
14.14
Insert page No. 164A
145
146
CHECK.
Joint A.
5
5
FX = 0
5 7.07 Cos = 0
5 7.07 0.707 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
7.07 0.707 + 5 = 0
0 = 0 Check is OK.
EXAMPLE NO. 14:

Analyze the following symmetrically loaded second degree internally
indeterminate truss by the method of least work. Areas in ( ) are 103m2 . The value of E can be
taken as 200 106 KN/m2
E
3
2
3 3m
B
15KN
2@3m
Selecting member BD and Before as redundants.
X1
X2
X1
3m
X2
C
A
B
15KN
7.5KN
2@3m
BDS under loads

7.5KN and redundants.
147
SOLUTION:
Note : By virtue of symmetry, we can expect to have same values for X1 and X2. It is known before hand.
7.5
S.F.D.
7.5
22.5
+
B.M.D.
SFD and BMD in BDS due to applied loads are shown above.
As in previous case determine member forces in BDS due to applied loads by the method of
moments shears while method of joints may be used to determine member forces due to redundants acting
separately. Apply super position principal. Then these are entered in a table given.
Summation of relavant columns due to X1 and X2 gives two equations from which these can be calculated.
Putting values from table and solving for X1 and X2.
[2.65 103 (7.5 0.707X1 ) 2.65 103 ( 0.707X1 ) 3.53 103 ( 0.707X1 )
3.53 103(15 0.707X1 0.707X2 ) +10.6 103 (10.6+X1 ) + 10.6 103 (X2 ) ]103 = 0
19.875 + 1.874X1 + 1.874 X1 + 2.450 X1 52.45 + 2.50 X1 + 2.5 X2 112.36 + 10.6 X1 + 10.6 X1 = 0
29.898 X1 + 2.50 X2 185.185 = 0
(1)
( col 8 )
2.65 103(7.50.707 X2) 2.65 103 ( 0.707 X2) 3.53 103 (150.707 X1 0.707 X2)
3.53 103 ( 0.707 X2 ) + 10.6 103 (10.6+X2) + 10.6 103 X2 = 0
19.875+1.874 X2+1.874 X252.95+2.50 X1+2.50X2+2.450 X2112.36+10.6X2+10.6 X2 = 0
2.50 X1 + 29.898 X2 185.185 = 0
From (1), X1 =
(2) 2.50
185.185 2.50 X2
29.898
(2)
( col 9 )
(3) Put in 2 above
185.185 2.50 X2
29.898
+ 29.898X2 185.185 = 0
15.465 0.21 X2 + 29.898 X2 185.185 = 0

29.689 X2 169.7 = 0
X2 = + 5.716 KN
Put X2 in equation 3 to get X1. The final member forces are given in last column. These are
obtained by putting values of X1 and X2, whichever is applicable, in column 5 of the table.
148
149
Then X1 =
185.185 2.50 5.716

29.898
X1 = + 5.716 KN
Equilibrium Check.
4.04
4.884
3.459
7.5
FX = 0
3.459 4.884 Cos = 0
3.459 4.884 0.707 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
7.5 4.04 4.884 0.707 = 0
0 = 0 Checks are satisfied. Results are OK.
EXAMPLE NO. 15:
Analyze the following internally indeterminate truss by the method of least
work. Areas in ( ) are 103m2 . The value of E can be taken as 200 10 6 KN/m2.
SOLUTION:
b = 13 , r = 3 , j = 7
so degree of indeterminacy I =( b + r ) 2j =2
Choosing members EB and BG as redundants, forces due to loads have been determined by the method of
moments and shears for the BDS and are entered in a table. While forces due to redundants X1 and X2.
F
E
X1
X1
X2
X2
B 15KN
3@3m
10KN
3m
D
5KN
10
S.F.D
+
0
0
5
30
15
B.M.D
+
0
150
G
X2
X1
A
3m
X2
X1
B 15KN
10KN
3@3m
D
5KN
10
S.F.D
+
0
0
5
30
15
B.M.D
+
0
Member Forces Due to Redundants Only.

Please number that due to separate action of redundants X1 and X2 member forces will be induced
only in the square whose inclineds are X1 and X2. There will be no reaction at supports.
Joint D:
DG
CD
Fy = 0
DG Sin 0
DG = 0
FX = 0
DG Cos + CD = 0
CD = 0
Joint G :
FG
X2
FX = 0
FG X2 Cos = 0
FG = 0.707 X2
Fy = 0
CG X2 Sin = 0
CG = 0.707 X2
CG
151
Joint C :
0.707X2
CF
BC
Fy = 0
CF Sin 0.707 X2 = 0
0.707 X2
CF =
0.707
CF = + X2
FX = 0
BC CF Cos = 0
BC = 0.707 X2
Joint B.
BF
X1
X2
AB
0.707X2
FX = 0
0.707 X2 AB + X2 Cos X1 Cos = 0
AB = 0.707 X1
Fy = 0
X1 Sin + X2 Sin + BF = 0
BF = 0.707X1 0.707X2
Joint A.
AE
AF
0.707X1
FX = 0
0.707 X1 + AF Cos = 0
AF = X1
152

Fy = 0
AE + AF Sin = 0
AE = 0.707X1
Joint E.
EF
X1
0.707 X1
FX = 0
EF + X1 Cos = 0
EF = 0.707 X1
Fy = 0
0.707 X1 0.707 X1 = 0
0 = 0 (Check)
Entering the values of summations from attached table, we have.
F.
F
L
.
= 0 = 229.443 106 +29.848 106 X1+2.45 106X2
X1 AE
F.
F
L
.
= 0 = 168.9 106 +2.45 106 X1+29.848 106 X2
X2 AE
Simplifying
229.443 + 29.848 X1 + 2.45 X2 = 0
(1)
168.9 + 2.45 X1 + 29.848 X2 = 0
(2)
From (1)
2.45 X2 + 229.443
29.848
Put in (2) & solve for X2

2.45 X2 + 229.443
168.9 + 2.45
29.848
+ 29.848 X2 = 0
168.9 0.201 X2 + 18.833 + 29.848 X2 = 0
150.067 + 29.647 X2 = 0
150.067
X2 =
29.647
X1 =
X2 = + 5.062 KN
(3)
Insert page No. 170A
153
154
So
X1 =
2.45 5.062 + 229.443

by putting value of X2 in (3)
29.848
X1 = + 7.272 KN
EQUILIBRIUM CHECKS :
E
5.141 F 8.579
2.000
6.87
7.07
1.421
6.28
7.272
5.662
4.859 B
6.421 C
15KN
5.141
A
10KN
D
5
5KN
Joint B:
7.272
6.28
4.859
5.062
6.421
15
FX = 0
6.421 + 5.062 Cos 7.272 Cos 4.859 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
6.28 15 + 5.062 Sin + 7.272 Sin = 0
0 = 0 The results are OK.
Joint C:
2.008
6.421
FX = 0
5 + 2.008 Cos 6.421 = 0
0 = 0
Fy = 0
1.421 2.008 Sin = 0
0 = 0 Results are OK.
1.421
INTRODUCTION TO TWO-HINGED ARCHES
155
CHAPTER THREE
3.0. TWO-HINGED ARCHES:The following issues should be settled first.
Definition.
Types.
Basic Principle and B.M.
Linear Arch.
Mathematical Generalized Expressions.
Segmental Arches.
Some information is contained elsewhere where determinate arches have been dealt.
3.1. DEFINITION OF AN ARCH.
An arch can be defined as a humped or curved beam subjected to transverse and other loads as
well as the horizontal thrust at the supports. An efficient use of an arch can be made only if full horizontal
restraint is developed at the supports. If either of the support allows some movement in the horizontal
direction, it will tend to increase the B.M. to which an arch is subjected and arch would become simply a
curved beam.
The B.M., in arches due to the applied loads is reduced due to the inward thrust. Analysis is
carried out to find the horizontal thrust and also to find the B.M., to which an arch is subjected.
Beam action Vs arch action :
P
Mo
A
Va
Simple beam subjecte to applied

transverse loads.
P
Support,
abutments or
springing.
H A
Va
One reaction at support only

Vb
y M=Mo-Hy
B
x
Vb
Arch carrying vertical loads & horizontal
thrust
Two reactions at supports
The above beam and arch carry similar loadings.

If Mo = B.M. due to applied loads at a distance X on the simple span of a simple beam where rise is y.
then bending moment in the arch is, MX = Mo Hy
where MX is the B.M., in the arch at a distance x . H is the horizontal thrust at the springings & y
is the rize of the arch at a distance. x as shown in the diagram. The ( ) sign is to be used with care and a
() sign will be used if the horizontal thrust is inwards or vice versa. In later case it will behave as a beam.
156
B
Vb
Va
Under transverse loads, the horizontal thrust at either of the springings abutments is equal. In the
arch shown above, the degree of indeterminacy is one and let us consider the horizontal thrust at support B
as the redundant. The above loaded arch can be considered equal to the following two diagrams wherein a
BDS arch is under the action of loads plus the same BDS arch under the action of inward unit horizontal
load at the springings.
=
P
B
Va
Vb
BL
B.D.S. under applied loads (loads try to flatten the arch)

BL stands for displacement of point B due to applied loads in a BDS arch..
+
1
B
BR
(Flattened arch recovers some of horizontal displacement at B due to unit horizontal loads and will recover
fully if full horizontal thirst is applied at B.)
(Arch flattens out under the action of applied loads because freedom in the horizontal direction has been
provided at point B.) and all due to full redundant value. This forces the basis of compatibility.
BR stands for displacement of point. B (in the direction of force) due to unit horizontal redundant force at B.
Remember that a horizontal reactive component cannot be realized at the roller support. However, we can
always apply a horizontal force at the roller.
3.2. Compatibility equation.
BL ( BR ) H = 0
( If unit load is applied in opposite sense so that it also produces
flettening, +ve sign may be used in the equation and the final sign with H will be self adjusting.)
or H =
BL
BR
157
displacement at B due to loads

displacement at B due to unit horizontal redundant
We will be considering strain energy stored in bending only.The modified expression for that for
curved structural members is as follows.
U=
M2ds
2EI
Where ds is the elemental length along the centre line of the arch and U is the strain energy stored
in bending along centre-line of arch. The bending moment at a distance x from support is
MX = Mo Hy (Horizontal thrust is inwards).
(1)
Where Mo = Simple span bending moment ( S.S.B.M.) in a similar loaded simple beam.
M2 ds
2EI
If H is chosen as redundant, then differentiating U w.r.t. H , we have
U =
U
1
M
= BH = 0 =
. M. ds
EI
H
H
Put M= Mo Hy and then differentiate.
U
1
= BH = 0 =
. (Mo Hy)(y) ds
EI
H
by putting M from (1)
0=
(Hy2 Mo y) ds
EI
H y2 ds
EI
Mo y ds
=0
EI
H y2 ds
=
EI
Mo y ds
EI
Simlifying
or
H =
Applying Castiglianos 2nd theorem, BL becomes =
and BR =
y2 ds
EI
Moy.ds
EI
y2ds
EI
Mo y ds
EI
158
The algebraic integration of the above integrals can also be performed in limited number of cases
when EI is a suitable function of S ( total curved arch length), otherwise, go for numerical integration.
For prismatic (same cross section) members which normally have EI constant, the above
expression can be written as follows:
H =
Mo y ds
y2ds
3.3. TYPES OF ARCHES :

The arches can be classified into a variety of ways depending mainly upon the material of
construction and the end conditions.
(1) Classification Of Arches Based On Material of Construction :
The following arches fall in this particular category:
a)
Brick masonary arches.
b)
Reinforced concrete arches.
c)
Steel arches.
The span of the arches which can be permitted increases as we approach steel arches from the
brick masonary arches.
(2) Classification Of Arches Based On End Conditions :
The following arches fall in this particular category:
a)
Three hinged arches.
b)
Two hinged arches.
c)
Fixed arches.
In the ancient times, three hinged arches have been used to support wide spans roofs. However,
their use is very rare in bridge construction since the discontinuity at the crown hinge is communicated to
the main deck of the bridge. In three hinged arches, all reactive components are found by statical
considerations without considering the deformations of the arch rib. Therefore, they are insensitive to
foundation movements and temperature changes etc., and are statically determinate. These are covered as a
separate chapter in this book.
The Romans exploited the potential of arches to a great extent. However, their emperical analysis
approach became available in the early 18th century.
3.4. LINEAR ARCH :
This is just a theoretical arch at every Xsection of which the B.M. is zero.
M = Mo Hy = 0
or
Mo = Hy (The B.M. due to applied loads is balanced by Hy).

therefore, y =
Mo
H
159
This is the equation for the centre line of a linear arch. With the change in position and the number
of loads on the arch, the corresponding linear arch would also change as Mo keeps on changing. Therefore,
there are infinite number of such arches for every load pattern and position on the actual arch.
EXAMPLE NO. 1:
3.5. ANALYSIS OF TWO HINGED SEGMENTAL ARCHES
We develop the method for indeterminate arches starting with the simplest cases of segmental arches. Solve the
following segmental arch by using the basic principles of consistent deformation method and by treating horizontal
thrust at support D as the redundant. The segmental arches could be used in tunnels and in water ways.
20KN/m
B
4m
Ha=20 kN
A
EI=Constant
D
4m
8m
2m
2m
40 kN
40 kN
20KN/m
4m
Ha=20 kN
A
EI=Constant
D
4m
8m
2m
40 kN
2m
40 kN
(Ha will occur only point D is a hinge support)

M Diagram. Due to applied loads. Similarly reactions due to supermetrical loading.
B
m Diagram.
DR
Due to unit redundant at D.

(X is varied along length of members). Find Cos and Sin.
cos = 0.4472 , sin = 0.8944.
160
Sab sin + 40 =0 so Sab=
40
= 44.722. Consider equilibrium of joint A and project forces
0.8944
in y-direction. (M-diagram)
Consider same diagram with roller at D. Now consider joint A and Project forces in X direction to
evaluate Ha. Sab Cos + Ha = 0 or 44.722 x 0.4472 + Ha = 0
or Ha= 20KN
Compatibility equation
DL DR. H = 0
DL
Or H =
=
DR
Horizontal displacement of D due to loads

Horizontal displacement of D due to redundants
Mmdx
EI
Applying Unit load method concepts,
DL =
m2 dx
EI
Now we attempt the evaluation of these integrals in a tabular form. X is measured along member
DR =
axis.
Mem
ber
AB
Origin.
Limits.
0 4.472
BC
04
CD
0 4.472
DL =
M
40 X Cos
=40X0.477= 17.88X
40(2+X)10X2=
80 + 40 X10 X2
17.88 X
4.472
MmdX
1
=
EI
EI o
m
+1.XSin=+0.894X
+4
+ 0.894 X
(17.88X)(+0.894X)dX +
1
80+40X 10X)(+4) dX
EI o
4.472
EI o
EI o
+31.969
EI
+10.656
1
40
( 4.4723 0) +
+320 4 +80 16
16
EI
EI
3
(17.88 X)(+0.894 X) dX
4.472
(+15.985 X2)dX +
3 4.472
X
3 o
1
(+320+160X 40X2) dX
EI o
4
1
160X2 40X2
+320X +
EI
2
3 o
Integrate and put limits
DL =
DR =
+ 2659.72
EI
4.472
m2dX
1
=
EI o
EI
(+ 0.894X)2 dX +
4.472
EI o
=
DR =
H =
=
4.472
1
1
16 dX +
EI o
EI o
(+ 0.894X)2 dX
0.799 X2 dX +
16
dX
EI o
4.472
161
1.598 X3
16
+ X
EI 3 o
EI
o
0.533
16
[(4.472)3 0] +
(4 0)
EI
EI
111.653
EI
DL
DR
2659.72/EI
111.653/EI
H = 23.82 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 2:
Solve the following arch by using consistent deformation method.

20KN/m
C
40KN
4m EI-Constt
A
D
4m
2m
2m
The above redundant / segmental arch can be replaced by the following similar arches carrying loads
and redundant unit load.
20KN/m
40KN
X is varied along
member lengths.
4m
40KN
A
2m
4m
2m
Ra=20KN
M-Diagram
BDS UNDER LOADS
D
DL
Rd=60KN
162

Ma = 0 ; Rd 8 = 20 4 4 + 40 4
Rd = 60 KN so Ra = 20 KN
+
C
B
x
X is varied along
member lengths.
x
D
1 A
DR
m Diagram
BDS UNDER UNIT REDUNDANT AT D

DL DR.H = 0
Or
and
Where DL = Horizontal deflection of D in BDS due to applied loads.

DR = Horizontal deflection at D due to Unit redundant.
H = Total Horizontal redundant.
DL
H =
DR
DL =
MmdX
EI
m2 dX
EI
DR =
Member
AB
Origin
A
BC
CD
DL =
Limits
04.472
04
04.472
M
20X Cos+40X Sin
20X 0.447+40X 0.894
= 44.72X
20(2+X)+40 4 10X2
40+20X +160 10X2 =
10X2 + 20X + 200
60X Cos=60X 0.447
= 26.82 X
4.472
MmdX 1
=
EI
EI o
m
XSin=0.894X
Constt.
+4
0.894X
(+44.72X)(0.894X) dX +
EI
Constt.
Constt.
1
(10X2 +20X 200 ) 4 dX
EI o
163
4.472
EI o
(26.82X ) (0.894X)dX
2 23.977
EI
o
X3 4 10X3 20X2
+
+
+ 200X
3
2
o
EI 3
4.472
1.33X =
DL =
DR =
63.97
EI
4.472 + 4 10 43 + 10 42 + 200 4 = +4893.8

EI
3 EI 3
3
4.472
m2 dX
1
=
EI
EI o
(0.894X)2 +
4.472
EI o
1.598 X3
EI 3 o
0.533
16
[ (4.472)3 0 ] +
( 4 0)
EI
EI
0.799X2 dX +
4.472
H =
=
(0.894X)2
DR =
4.472
1
1
16dX +
EI o
EI o
16
dX
EI o
4
16
X
EI
o
111.653
EI
DL
DR
+ 4893.8/EI
111.653/EI
So
H = + 43.83 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 3:- Determine the horizontal thrust for the for following loaded segmental arch. Take EI
equal to constant.
P
C
D
3m
E
B
4m
A
3m
4m
5m
4m
3m
164
SOLUTION :
X
P
G
X is varied along
member length
E
Now consider a BDS under Loads and redundant separately for the same arch and evaluate integrals.
An inspection of the arch indicates that it is symmetrical about point G and is indeterminate to the first
degree choosing horizontal reaction at F as the redundant, we draw two basic determinate structures under
the action of applied loads and the redundant horizontal thirst at support F.
P
C
P
X
A
3m
4m
5m
4m
3m
P
M-Diagram (BDS under loads)
A
B.D.S. under unit horizontal
redundant load at F.
m-Diagram
165
Because of symmetry, Moments and hence

strain energy is computed for half frame.
Portion
Origin
Limits
AB
05
PX Cos = X0.6 PX
0.8 X
BC
05
P (3+0.8X)
4 + 0.6X
CG
0 2.5
P (7+X) PX = 7 P
7
2.5
(0.6 PX)(0.8X)
P(3+0.8X)(4+0.6X)
49 P
dX + 2
dX+ 2
dX
EI
EI
EI
o
o
o
FL = 2
2.5
2P
EI
[ 0.48 X dX + (0.48 X +5X+12)dX + 49 dX]
2P
EI
0.48X35+ 0.48 X3+ 5 X2 + 12X 5| +49X 2.5
|
3 3 2
o
o
o
2P
EI
3
2
0.48 53 + 0.48 5 + 5 5 + 12 5 + 49 2.5
3
2
3
FL =
570 P
EI
FR
2
2
2
(0.8X)2dX + (16 + 0.36X2 + 4.8X) dX + 49dX
EI o
EI o
EI o
2
EI
5
5
2.5
0.64X3 + 16X + 0.36X3 + 4.8X2 + 49X |
3
3
2 o
o
o
2
EI
3
2
0.64 5 + 16 5 + 0.36 53 + 4.8 5 + 49 2.5
3
3
2
(deflection of point F due to loads)
FR =
H =
608.33
FL
, H =
EI
FR
570 P
608.32
So
H = 0.937 P
2.5
166
NOTE :
FL FR H = 0
FL = FR H
FL
H =
FR
We take compression on outer side & tension on inner side +ve in case of M and m-diagram.
EXAMPLE NO. 4 :
Determine the horizontal thrust provided that EI = Constt for the following
loaded segmental arch.:
SOLUTION:
P
P
X
X
3m
P
B
X
4m
A
F
3m
5m
4m
4m
3m
Rf
Ra
Taking horizontal reaction at F as redundant. Ma=0

Rf. 19 = P . 12 + P .7 + 4. P , So
Rf = 1.211 P
and therefore Ra is,
Ra = 2P 1.211 P
Ra = + 0.789 P
P
P
X
P
X
3m
4m
5m
4m
3m
M-Diagram
0.789 P
1.211 P
167
D
3m
E
4m
1
3m
4m
5m
4m
3m
m-diagram (Unit redundant at F)
Portion
AB
FL
Origin
A
Limits
05
BC
05
CD
05
DE
05
EF
05
M
0.789 PX Cos+PX Sin
= 0.4734 PX + 0.8 PX
= 1.2734 PX
0.789 P(3 + XCos1)
+P(4 + XSin1) PX Sin1
= 0.6312 PX+6.367 P
m
1 X Cos
= 0.8X
1(4 + X Sin1)
= 4 + 0.6X
+7
= 0.211 PX + 9.523 P
1.211 P(3+X Cos1)
1(4 + X Sin1)
= 3.633 P + 0.9688 PX
= 4 + 0.6X
1.211 PX Cos = 0.7266 PX X Sin = 0.8X
Determine Sines and Cosines of and 1.
0.789P (7+X)+P7P3PX
[ (1.2734 PX)(0.8 X)dX + (0.6312 PX + 6.367 P)
1
EI
(4 + 0.6X) dX + ( 0.211 PX + 9.523 P)(7)dX

o
5
+ (3.633 P + 0.9688 PX)(4 + 0.6X) + (0.7266PX (0.8X) dX

o
P
EI
o
5
[ 1.01872X dX + (2.5248X + 0.37872X + 25.468 + 3.8202 X) dX

2
+ ( 1.477X + 66.661) dX + (14.532 + 2.1798X

o
o
5
+ 3.8752X + 0.58128X2 ) dX + 0.58128X dX
o
5
P
(1.97872X2 + 11.50428X + 106.661) dX
EI o
5
FL =
P
X3
X2
1.97972
+ 11.50428
+ 106.661X
EI
3
2
o
Simplifying we get.
168

P
53
52
1.97872 + 11.50428 + 106.661 5
EI
3
2
759.56 P
FL =
EI
=
FR =
1
EI
[ (0.8X) dX + (16+0.36X + 4.8X) dX

2
+ 49 dX + (16+0.36X2+4.8X) dX + 0.64 X2 dX
o
1 0.64X3
X3
X2
X3 4.8X2
0.64X3
+ 16X + 0.36
+ 4.8
+ 49X + 16X + 0.36
+
+
EI 3
3
2
3
2
3
1
EI
0.36 5 4.8 5
[ 0.64
5 + 16 5 +
+
+ 49 5
3
3
2
3
+ 16 5 +
0.36
4.8
0.64
53 +
52 +
53
3
2
3
Simplifying
608.33
. Compatibility equation remains the same. Putting values of integrals, we have
EI
FL
H =
FR
FR =
759.56 P
EI
608.33
EI
H = 1.2486 P
P
C
Now all reactions are shown.

P
D
0.2486P
A
F 1.2486P
0.789P
1.211P
ANALYZED SEGMENTAL ARCH

Check :
Mc = 0
0.789P 7 0.2486 P 7 P 3 + P 5 + 1.2486 P 7 1.211P 12 = 0
0 = 0
O.K.
169
3.6. ANALYSIS OF TWO HINGED CIRCULAR ARCHES :

P
P
C
X
F
E
y
D
yc
L
R
R
The circular arches are infact a portion of the circle and are commonly used in bridge construction.
From the knowledge of determinate circular arches, it is known that the maximum thrust and the vertical
reactions occur at the springings. Therefore, logically there should be a greater moment of inertia near the
springings rather than that near the midspan of the arch. The approach is called the secant variation of
inertia and is most economical. However, to establish the basic principles, we will first of all consider
arches with constant EI. The following points are normally required to be calculated in the analysis.
(1)
Horizontal thrust at the springings.
(2)
B.M. & the normal S.F. at any section of the arch.

Usually, the span and the central rise is given and we have to determine;
(i)
the radius of the arch;
(ii)
the equation of centre line of the circular arch.
Two possible analysis are performed.

(1)
Algebraic integration.
(2)
Numerical integration.
After solving some problems, it will be amply demonstrated that algebraic integration is very
laborious and time consuming for most of the cases. Therefore, more emphasis will be placed on numerical
integration which is not as exact but gives sufficiently reliable results. Some researches have shown that if
arch is divided in sixteen portions, the results obtained are sufficiently accurate. In general, the accuracy
increases with the increase or more in number of subdivisions of the arch.
We will be considering two triangles.
1 ADO
2 EFO
By considering ADO
OB2 = OD2 + BD2
170
R2 = (Ryc)2 + (L /2 )2
R2 = R2 2Ryc + yc2 + L2/4
0 = yc ( yc 2 R) + L2/4
or
yc ( yc 2 R) = L2/4
yc ( yc 2 R ) = L2/4
yc (2R yc) =
L2
4
(1)
By considering EFO
OF2 = OE2 + EF2
R2 = ( R yc + y )2 + X2
2
R X2 = ( R yc + y )2
R yc + y =
R2 x2
S
R2 X2 (R yc)
y =
(2)
The detailed derivation of this equation can be found in some other Chapter of this book.
In this case, S = R ( 2 ) where is in radiains. S is the total length along centre line of the arch.
H=
Myds
y2ds
as before obtained By eliminating EI as we are considering EI = Constt
EXAMPLE NO. 5:
A two hinged circular arch carries a concentrated force of 50 KN at the centre. The span & the
rise of the arch are 60m & 10m respectively. Find the horizontal thrust at the abutments.
SOLUTION : The arch span is divided in ten equal segments and ordinates are considered at the centre of
each segment.
50KN
30m
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

10
(9)
(10)
D
60m
R=50m
R =
171
L2
yc
+
, where R = Redious, yc = Central rise and L = Span of arch.
2
8yc
(60)2
10
+
2
8 10
R = 50 m
Sin =
30
= 0.6
50
. Now compute angle is radians.
= 36.87
rad = 180
, we know
180 = rad
1 =
So
36.87 =
rad
180
36.87 radians
180
36.87 = 0.6435 rad =

= 0.6435 rad
S = R (2 ) = 50 (2 0.6435) , Where S is length of arch along its centre-line
For circular arches. X is varied from centre to abutments.
S = 64.35 m
A
25KN
y
30-x
50KN
C
E yc=10m
D
B
25KN
R
R=50m
where
Myds
H =
y2ds
M = Simple span ( S.S ) B.M. in the arch due to applied loads only.
Mbc
OE
= Mac = 25 ( 30 X ) in two portions at a distance X from mid span.

= R Cos
172

OD = R yc = 50 10 = 40 m
y = OE OD
[Since OC = OD + CD = 50 and CD = 10 = Yc]
y = R Cos 40
and
ds = Rd
X = R Sin
Evaluation of Numerator :
Mx = 25 (30 X), ds = Rd, y = RCos 40
Myds = 2 [25 (30 R Sin)] [R Cos40] [Rd], By putting X, y and ds from above. Also put
o
value of which is in radians.

0.6435
= 50 R
(30 R Sin)(R Cos 40) d,
we know, 2Sin Cos = Sin 2.
o
0.6435
= 50R
(30R Cos Cos R2Sin Cos 1200 + 40R Sin) d
= 50R 30R Sin +
0.6435
R2 Cos 2
.
1200 40R Cos
2
2
o
= 50 50 30500.6+
Put limits now
2500
502
0.2812000.643540500.8
1+ 40 50 1
4
4
= + 194500
Myds = 194.5 103
Evaluation of Denominator :
1
(1 + Cos2)
2
1
Sin2 = (1 Cos2)
2
Cos2 =
We know
and
0.6435
y2ds = 2
(RCos 40)2 (Rd)
o
0.6435
= 2R
(R2 Cos2 80R Cos + 1600) d
o
0.6435
= 2R
o
R (1 + Cos 2) 80 R Cos + 1600 d

2
Integrate
0.6435
R2
Sin 2
= 2R +
80R Sin + 1600
2
2
o
Put limits now
173
502
0.96
= 2 50
2 0.6435 + 2 80 50 0.6 + 1600 0.6435
= 3397.5
y2ds = + 3.3975 103
194.5 103
H =
3.3975 10-3
H = 57.2 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 5: BY NUMERICAL INTEGRATION :
The values of X, y and M are determined at the mid ordinates of the segments. The basic
philosophy is that if we consider a very small arc length that would be regarded as a straight line and
therefore we tend to average out these values.
y = R2 X2 (R yc)
or
y =
502 X2 (50 10 )
or
y =
502 X2 (40)
(1)
See segments of Example 5 about 4 page before.
For section (1)

X1 = 27, from (1),
y1 =
502 272 (40) = 2.08 m
For section (2)

X2 = 21 from (1),
y2 =
502 212 (40) = 5.738 m and so on.
M = 25 ( 30 X ) = (750 25X)
0 < X < 30 as before
Now do numerical integration in a tabular form as under.

Section.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X
27
21
15
9
3
3
9
15
21
27
S = 64.35 m
64.35
and ds =
10
ds = 6.435 m
y.
2.08
5.380
7.69
9.18
9.91
9.91
9.18
7.69
5.380
2.08
M
75
225
375
525
675
675
525
375
225
75
My
156.00
1210.50
3883.75
4819.50
6689.25
6689.25
4819.50
2883.75
1210.50
156.00
31518
y2
4.33
28.94
59.14
84.27
98.21
98.21
84.27
59.14
28.94
4.33
549.78
174

Myds
Myds
=
y2ds
y2ds
31518 6.435
=
( Note:- ds cancels out )
549.78 6.435
H=
H = 57.33 KN
A result similar to that already obtained from algebraic solution
3.7. ARCHES WITH SECANT VARIATION OF INERTIA :
If Io is the second moment of area of arch rib at the crown: Then secant variation of inertia means.
I = Io sec.
ds Cos =dX
and
ds
dy
dx
Or
ds = dX Sec
Myds
EI
y2ds
EI
H =
If it is built of the same material, then E would cancel out:
Myds
I
y2ds
I
My dX Sec
Io Sec
y2dX Sec
Io Sec
H =
H =
Put I= Io sec
H =
MydX
y2 dX
175
If we utilize the above expression for horizontal thrust, it may be kept in mind that integration can
now take place in the Cartesian coordinate system instead of the polar coordinate system.
3.8. BY SECANT VARIATION USING ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION :
EXAMPLE NO. 6: Analyze the arch in Example No. 5:
We know,
y =
R2 X2 (R yc)
y =
502 X2 40
Mac = Mbc = 25 ( 30 X )
0 < X < 30
30
MydX = 2 25 (30 X)[
502 X2 40 ] dX
o
30
30
= 50 [ 30
o
30
= 1500
At
30
502 X2 . XdX + 40 XdX ]
o
30
o
30
502 X2 dX 1200 50 dX 50
Put
30
502 X2 . dX 1200dX
30
502 X2 XdX + 2000 XdX
X = 50 Sin = R sin
dX = 50 Cos d
X= 0
=0
X = 30
= 0.6435
Now Evaluate integrals
Substitutions
Cos2
Cos2 = 1 +
2
2
Sin
Cos2 = +
2
4
Cos3
Cos2 Sind =
3
by letting X = Cos
dX = Sin d
At
0.6435
30
MydX = 1500
502 (1 Sin2) (50 Cosd ) 60000 X

o
(502 X2 )3/2
X2
+ 25
+ 2000
3/2
o
2 o
30
0.6435
= 1500 502
o
30
(1 + Cos2)
d 6 104 (30)
2
176
50
[(502 302)3/2 (302) + 1000 (302 )]
3
= 187.5 104 +
0.6435
Sin 2
2 o
MydX = 187.5 104 0.6435 +
180 104 1016666.666 + 90 104
Sin(2 0.6435)
2
1916666.666
= 2106561.918 1916666.666
MydX = 189895.252
30
y2dX = 2 (502 X2 +402 80
502 X2 ) dX
o
30
= 2 (4100 X2 80
502 X2 ) dX
Substitutions:
X = 50 Sin
dX = 50 Cosd
1 Sin2 = Cos2
30
30
0.6435
= 8200 dX 2 X2 dX 160
o
502 Cos2 d
o
0.6435
X3
160 502
= 8200 X | 2
2
3 o
o
o
30
30
(1 + Cos 2)d
2
160 502
Sin 2
(303)
+
3
2
2 o
0.6435
= 8200 (30)
= 228000
160 502
Sin(2 0.6435)
2
2
0.6435 +
= 228000 224699.938
y2dX = 3300.062
H =
MydX
y2dX
189895.252
3300.062
H = 57.543 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 7:horizontal thrust.
177
A circular arch carries a uniformly distributed load on its left half, calculate the
10KN/m
C
yc=10m
A
D
60m
SOLUTION : Determine Vertical Support reactions as usual and write moment expressions due to
applied loads only without considering horizontal thrust.
10KN/m
C
x E x
yc=10m
D
60m
B
75KN
225KN
From diagram, X = R Sin

Mac = 225 (30 R Sin) 5 (30 R Sin )2, in other words. Mac = Va ( 30 X ) w X2/2
where X = R sin
Mbc = 75 (30 R Sin)
and
OD = OC CD = 50 10 = 40 m
y = OE OD = R Cos 40
so
H =
Myds
y2ds
178
Evaluation of Numerator.
0.6435
Myds =
[225 (30 R Sin) 5(30 R Sin)2 ] [ R Cos 40] (Rd)
o
0.6435
[75(30 R Sin)] [R Cos 40 ] [Rd ]. This consists of two integrals.
Evaluate First Integral

0.6435
= I1 = R
[6750 225 R Sin 4500 5 R2 Sin2 + 300 R Sin] [R Cos 40]
o
0.6435
I1 = R
[2250 + 75 R Sin 5 R Sin ][R Cos 40] d

2
o
0.6435
=R
[2250 R Cos + 75 R Sin Cos 5 R Sin Cos

2
90000 3000 R Sin + 200 R2 Sin2

0.6435
=R
] d
[2250 R Cos + 75 R Sin Cos 5 R Sin Cos

2
Let X = Sin
dX = cos d
So Sin2 Cos d = X2 dX =
X3
Sin3
=
3
3
1 Cos2
90000 3000 R Sin + 200 R2
2
=R
2250 R Sin
75 2 Cos2
R3 Sin3
R
5
90000
2
2
3
200 2
Sin2
|
R
2
2 o
0.6435
+ 3000 R Cos +
= 50
[ 2250 50 0.6 754 2500 0.28 5 50 0.216

3
3
90000 0.6435 + 3000 50 0.8 +
75
2500 1 3000 50 1
4
200
0.96
502 0.6435
2
2
179
[ 67500 13125 45000 57915 + 120000 + 160875

120000 + 46875 150000 ]
= 50
= 50 ( 9210 )
I1 = 460.5 103
Now Evaluate
0.6435
2nd Integral = I2 = R
(2250 75 R Sin )(R Cos 40) ( d ) multiply two expressions.
o
0.6435
I2 = R
2250 R Cos 75 R2 Sin Cos 90000 + 3000 R Sin ) d Integrate now.
= R 2250R Sin +
0.6435
75 2 Cos 2
R
90000 3000R Cos |
2
2
o
= 50 (2250 50 0.6 +
3000 50 0.8
75
2500 0.28 90000 0.6435
4
75
2500 1 + 3000 50 1)
4
I2 = 291.75 103
Add these two integrals (I1 and I2) of Myds.
Myds
= I1 + I2
= 460.5 103 + 291.75 103
or
Myds
= 752.25 103
Now Evaluate
0.6435
y2ds
=2
(R Cos 40)2 ( R d )
o
0.6435
=2R
1+Cos2
2
(R2Cos2 + 1600 80 R Cos)d ; We know that Cos2 =
o
0.6435
=2R
o
R2
(1 + Cos2) + 1600 80 R Cos d
2
0.6435
=2R
R2
2
+ Sin + 1600 80 R Sin |
2
2
o
= 2 50
+1600 0.6435 80 50 0.6], So y ds=3.397510

[502 0.6435+0.96
2
180
Myds
y2ds
752.25 103
3.3975 103
H = 221.42 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 8: Analyze the same problem by numerical Integration.

Write moment expression for segments in portions AC and BC due to applied loading only for a simple
span.
For segments 1 5, Mac = 225 (30 X) 5 (30 X)2 as before but in Cartesian co-ordinate system.
For segments 6 10, Mbc = 75 (30 X)
10KN/m
C
(1)
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)(9)
(10)
225KN
60m
75KN
R=50m
Note: X is measured for mid span and y is corresponding rise. Now attempt in a tabular form.
Section
1.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
S = R (2 )
= 50 2 0.6435
S = 64.35 m
X
27
21
15
9
3
3
9
15
21
27
y
2.08
5.38
7.69
9.18
9.91
9.91
9.18
7.69
5.38
2.08
M
630
1620
2250
2520
2430
2025
1575
1125
675
225
My
1310.4
8715.6
17302.5
23133.6
24081.3
20067.75
14458.5
8651.25
3624.75
468
121813.65
y2
4.33
28.94
59.14
84.27
98.21
98.21
84.27
59.14
28.94
4.33
549.78
so
ds =
64.35
= 6.435 m
10
H =
Myds
y2ds
181
(Because S has been divided in Ten Segments)
Myds
y2ds
121813.65 6.435
( Note: ds cancels out )
549.78 6.435
H = 221.57 KN
Same answer as obtained by algebraic integration.
EXAMPLE NO. 9: Analyze the previous arch for by assuming secant variation of inertia.
Integrate along the x axis by considering arch to be a beam.
Mac = 225 (30 X) 5 (30 X)2
0 < X < 30
Mbc = 75 (30 X)
0 < X < 30
502 X2 40
y =
30
MydX = [225 (30 X) 5 (30 X)2 ] [ 502 X2 40] dX

o
30
+ [75 (30 X)] [ 502 X2 40] dX , By taking y expression common, we have

o
30
MydX = [6750 225X 5 (900 60X + X2 ) +2250 75X] [ 502 X2 40)] dX

o
30
= ( 5X2 + 4500)[ 502 X2 40] dX
X terms cancel out
Let X = 50 sin, then dX = 50 cos d, So
(502 X2 ) = 50 Cos. Putting these we
have.
0.6435
( 4500 12500 sin2 ) ( 50 cos 40 ) ( 50 cos) d
Note : In solving the above expression , the following trignometrical relationships are used.
1. Sin2 = 1 cos2 and cos2 = /2 + sin 2/4
2. cos3 = sin sin3/3
3. cos4 = 3/8 + sin2/4 + sin4/32
182
By using the above formulas and solving the integral, we get the value as follows.
MydX = 730607.23
Now evaluate y2dX.
30
y2dX
=2 [
(502 X2) 40]2 dX. By evaluating on similar lines as stated above; we have.
= 3322.0
MydX
y2 dX
730607.23
=
3322.0
H =
H = 220.0 KN
The same may be solved by numerical integration
3.9. TWO HINGED PARABOLIC ARCHES
C
yc
B
A
L
Equation of the centre line of a parabolic arch with either abutment as origin is
y = CX (L X) (1)
At
X=
L
2
y = yc
Putting
L
L
L
2
2
L L
yc = C.
2 2
C. L2
yc =
4
4 yc
C= 2
L
yc = C
Putting the value of C in equation (1), we have.

4 yc
X (L X)
L2
4 yc X
y=
(L X), rated for
L2
y=
0<X<L
183
dy 4 yc
= 2 (L 2X)
0<X<L
dX
L
MydX
So
H =
y2dX
In parabolic arches, origin for X is usually their supports.
and
EXAMPLE NO. 10:

A twohinged parabolic arch with secant variation of inertia is subjected to the
loads at 3rd points as shown in the diagram. Determine the horizontal thrust at abutments & plot the B.M.D.
Verify your answer by numerical integration.
SOLUTION:
20m
C
40KN
D
40KN
20m
yc
B
A
D
40KN
60m
40KN
It is a symmetrically loaded arch. So moment expression on simple span in portions AC and CD may be
found and corresponding integrals may be evaluated and multiplied by 2.
Mac = 40 X
0 < X < 20
Mcd = 40 X 40 (X 20) = 800
20 < X < 30
4 yc X
y =
(L X) , Put value of yc and L for simplification purpose.
L2
=
or
4 . 10 . X
(60 X)
602
y = 0.011 X (60 X) = 0.011 60 X 0.011 X2

20
MydX = 2 (40 X)(0.011 60 X 0.011 X2)dX

o
30
+2 800(0.66 X 0.011X2 ) dX
20
Simplifying
20
30
= 2 (26.4 X2 0.44 X3 ) dX + 2 (528X 8.8X2)dX

o
o
20
30
26.4 X3 0.44 X4
528 X2 8.8 X3
=2
+ 2
4 o
3
2 3 20
184
26.4
0.44
528
8.8
3
4
2 8.8
3
2
3
528
=2
3 20 4 20 + 2 2 30 3 30 2 20 + 3 20
= 105600 + 152533.33
= 258133.33
MydX = 258.133 103
Now evaluate y2dX.
60
y2dX = (0.011 60 X 0.011 X2 )2 dX

o
60
= [(0.66)2 X2 + (0.011)2 X4 2 0.66 0.011 X3]dX

o
60
= (0.4356 X2 + 1.21 104 X4 0.01452 X3) dX

o
0.4356 X3 1.21 10-4 X5 0.01452 X4

=
+
5
4
3
o
60
0.4356
1.21 10-4
0.01452
603 +
605
604
3
5
4
= 3136.32
y2dX = 3.136 103
H =
MydX
y2dX
258.133 103
3.136 103
H = 82.3 KN
M = Mo Hy , y = 0.001 X (60 X) , at X = 20, y = yE

yc = 0.011 20 (60 20 ) = 8.8 m = yE
Mc = 40 20 82.3 8.8 = 75.76 KNm
MD = (40 30 40 10) 82.3 10 = 23 KN
ME = 40 20 82.3 8.8 = 75.76 KN
185
Now BMD can be plotted.

40KN
20m
C
8.8m
40KN
40KN
20m
10m 8.8m
40KN
60m
823
800
linear arch
parablic (2nd degree)
800
8.0
924.24
724.2
Note: The length of the segment should be even multiple of span. More than 5 or 6 segments will give
slightly improved answer.
3.10. EDDYS THEOREM: The difference between the linear arch and the actual arch is the BMD at that
point.
EXAMPLE NO. 11:- Analyze the following loaded two hinged arch by numerical integration method.
40kN
40kN
20m
D
C
A
40KN
and
20m
E
y=10m
c
4 5
L=60m
B
40KN
Mac = 40 X
0 < X < 20
Mcd = 40 X 40(X 20) = 800
20 < X < 40
Meb = 40 X 40(X 20) 40(X 40) = 2400 40X
40 < X < 60
y = 0.011 (60 X) = 0.66X 0.011 X2
( As before ) solving in a
tabular forces.
186
Section
1
2
3
4
5
6
X
5
15
25
35
45
55
L = 60 m , dX =
H=
=
y
3.025
7.425
9.625
9.625
7.425
3.025
M
200
600
800
800
600
200
My
605
4455
7700
7700
4455
605
25520
y2
9.15
55.13
92.64
92.64
55.13
9.15
313.84
60
= 10 m
6
MydX
y2dX
25520 10
313.84 10
H = 81.31 KN
Almost similar result was obtained by algebraic integration earlier.

EXAMPLE NO. 12:A twohinged parabolic arch with secant variation of inertia is subjected to a
uniformly distributed load on its left half. Determine the horizontal thrust at abutments and plot the
B.M.D. Verify your answer by numerical integration.
SOLUTION :
10KN/m
C
yc=10m
B
A
225KN
L=60m
75KN
Mac = 225X 5 X2
0 < X < 30
Mbc = 75X
0 < X < 30
y =
4yc X
(L X)
L2
4 . 10 . X
(L X)
602
= 0.011 X (60 X)
187
y = 0.66 X 0.011 X2
and
dy
= 0.66 0.022X = Tan
dX
30
30
MydX = (225X 5 X2) (0.66 X 0.011 X2) dX + 75 X (0.66 X 0.011 X2) dX

o
30
30
= (148.5 X2 2.475 X3 3.3 X3 + 0.055 X4) dX + (49.5 X2 0.825 X3) dX

o
30
30
148.5 X3 2.475 X4 3.3 X4 0.055 X5

49.5 X3 0.825 X4
=
+
+
4
4
5
3
o 3 4 o
148.5 303 2.475 30 3.3 30 + 0.055 30 + 49.5 30 0.825 30

4
4
5
3
4
3

= 712800.0174
MydX = 712.8 x 103
60
y2dX = (0.66 X 0.011 X2)2 dX

o
60
= [(0.662) X2 + (0.011)2 X4 2 . 0.66 . 0.011 X3] dX

o
60
X3
X5
X4
+ (0.011)2
2 . 0.66 . 0.011
3
5
4 o
3
= 3.136 10
712.8 103
H =
3.136 103
= (0.66)2
H = 227.30 KN
EXAMPLE NO. 13:-
Now Analyze the previous example. BY NUMERICAL INTEGRATION :

10KN
(2)
(3) C (4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
A
225KN
Mac = 225X 5 X
Mcb = 225X 300 (X 15)
y = 0.66 X 0.011 X2
2
60m
75KN
0 < X < 30
30 < X < 60
(same as before). Attempt in a tabular form.
188
Section
1
2
3
4
5
6
H =
X
5
15
25
35
45
55
y
3.025
7.425
9.625
9.625
7.425
3.05
M
1000
2250
2500
1875
1125
375
My
3025
16706.25
24062.5
18046.875
8353.125
1134.375
71328.125
y2
9.15
55.13
92.64
92.64
55.13
9.15
313.84
71328.125 . 10
313.84 . 10
H = 227.28 KN
WE GET THE SAME ANSWER AS WAS OBTAINED BY ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION.

y15 = 0.66 X 15 0.011 (15)2 = 2.425 m
y45 = 7.425 m
10KN/m
C
7.425m 10m
7.425m
75KN
60m
225KN
2250
2250
1125
Mo-diagram
2273
1687.7
1687.7
Hy-diagram
2273
2250
1687.7
1125
M-diagram
29.99m
Point of contraflexure. Write a generalized Mx expression and set that to zero.

Mx = 225X 5X2 227.30 + [0.011 X (60 X)] = 0
225X 5X2 150.02X + 2.50X2 = 0
2.5X2 + 74.98X = 0
2.5X + 74.98 = 0
X = 29.99 m
Insert this value back in Mx expression to find M max in the arch.
EXAMPLE NO. 14:Analyze the following arch by algebraic and numerical integration. Consider :
A. the arch to be parabolic and then circular.
B. moment of inertia constant and then with secant variation.
189
2 KN/m
5KN
20m
6m
70m
Generally arches have been used by the engineers and architects dating back to old roman buildings,
Mughal and Muslim architecture. Main applications are in bridges, churches, mosques and other buildings.
Arch behaviour is dependent upon stiffness of supports, commonly called abutments or springings so that
horizontal reaction develops.
SOLUTION :
A.
PARABOLIC ARCH AND ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION
2KN/m
70x52.5
5x20
+
= 53.93
70
70
5KN
20m
D
70m
21.07KN
53.93KN
Determine simple span bending moments.

Mac
Mcd
= 53.93 X X2
= 53.93X 70(X 17.5)
0 < X < 35
35< X < 50
= 53.93X 70X + 1225

= 16.07X + 1225
Mdb
= 53.93X 70(X17.5) 5 (X50)
0 < X < 70
= 53.93X 70X + 1225 5X + 250
= 21.07X + 1475
4YcX
=
(L X)
L2
=
4.6.X
( 70 X)
702
= 4.898 . 103 X ( 70 X )
= 0.343X 4.898 . 103 X2
35
MydX = (53.93X X2 ) (0.343X 4.898 103 X2 ) dX

o
190
50
+ (16.07X + 1225) (0.343X 4.898 103
X2
) dX
35
70
+ ( 21.07X + 1475 ) (0.343X 4.898 103 X2 ) dX Multiply the expressions

50
35
= (18.498X2 0.264X3 0.343X3 + 4.898 103 X4 ) dX

o
50
+ (5.512X2 + 0.079X3 + 420.175X 6X2 ) dX

35
70
+ (7.227X2 + 0.103X3 + 505.925X 7.225X2 ) dX re-arranging we get

50
35
= (4.898 103 X4 0.607X3 + 18.498X2 ) dX

o
50
+ (0.079X3 11.512 X2 + 420.175 X) dX

35
70
+ (0.103X3 14.452X2 + 505.925X) dX

50
= 4.898 10-3
35
50
X
X
X3
X4
X3
X2
0.607
+ 18.498 + 0.079
11.512
+ 420.175
5
4
3 o
4
3
2 35
+ 0.103
70
X4
X3
X2
14.452
+ 505.925 . Insert limits and simplify
4
3
2 50
= 88097.835 + 46520.7188 + 14251.3336

MydX = 148869.8874
Now calculate y2dX
70
y2dX = (0.343X 4.898 103 X2 )2 dX

o
70
= ( 0.118X2 + 2.399 105 X4 3.360 103 X3) dX

o
70
0.118X3
X5
X4
y dX =
+ 2.399 10-5
3.360 10-3
5
4 o
3
= 1386.932
MydX
H = 2
y dX
148869.8874
=
1386.932
2
H = 107.34 KN
191
B. SOLUTION OF SAME PARABOLIC ARCH BY NUMERICAL INTEGRATION:

We know
Mac = 53.93X X2
0 < X < 35
Mcd = 53.93X 70 (X 17.5)
35 < X < 50
Mdb = 53.93X 70 (X 17.5) 5 (X 50)
50 < X < 70
y = 0.343X 4.898 . 103 X2 . Solve in a tabular form.

SECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
H =
Y2
MY
3.5
10.5
17.5
24.5
31.5
38.5
45.5
52.5
59.5
66.5
1.14
3.06
4.50
5.46
5.94
5.94
5.46
4.50
3.06
1.14
176.51
456.02
637.53
721.04
706.55
606.31
493.82
368.83
221.34
73.85
201.22
1395.42
2868.89
3936.88
4196.91
3601.48
2696.26
1659.74
677.29
84.18
21318.27
1.30
9.36
20.27
29.35
35.34
35.34
29.85
20.27
9.36
1.30
192.24
MydX
y2dX
21318.27 7
192.24 7
H = 110.89 KN
=
Accuracy can be increased by increasing the number of

segments. Now BMD is drawn.
2Kn/m
5kN
20m
C
110.98KNA
4.50
70m
53.93KN
634.53
6m
4.50
706.55
421.4
368.83
110.98KN
21.07 KN
0
499.00 676.74 499.00
Mx-Diagram
Hy-Diagram
0
0
706,5
637.53
499.00
706.8
676.74
499.00
368.83
M-Diagram
192
C. CONSIDERING IT TO BE A CIRCULAR ARCH WITH ALGEBRAIC INTEGRATION

2KN/m
C
5KN
20m
D
6m
y
70M
D
53.93KN
21.07KN
R
R=105.08m
R =
L2 yc
+
8yc 2
R =
702
6
+
y
8X6
R = 105.08 m
(h yc) and
dy
= tan =
dX
X
105.082 X2
y =
R2 X2
y =
105.082 X2 (105.08 6 )
y =
105.082 X2 99.08 . Establishment expressions.
Mac = 53.93 ( 35 X) ( 35 X)2
0 < X < 35
Mbd = 21.07 (35 X)
0 < X < 20
Mdc = 21.07 ( 35 X) 5 (15 X)
20 < X < 35
[53.93 (35 X) (35 X) ][
35
My dX =
o
20
+ 21.07 (35 X)
o
35
+
o
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
[ 21.07( 35 X) 5 (15 X)] [
My dX = I1 + I2 + I3
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
193
( Where I1 , I2 and I3 are 1st , 2nd and 3rd integrals of above expression respectively). These are
evaluated separately to avoid lengthy simultaneous evaluation of above My dX expression.
[53.93 35 53.93X (35 + X 70X)] [
35
Evaluation of
I1 =
o
35
= (662.55 + 16.07X X2)

o
35
=
o
[662.55
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
105.082 X2 + 16.07 X
105.082 X2
X2
105.082 X2 65645.454 1592.216X + 99.08X2 dX
35
= 662.55
35
105.082 X2 dX
16.07
2 o
105.082 X2 (2X)dX .
Taking constants out.
35
35
1
X
2o
105.082 X2 ( 2X)dX 65645.454 dX 1592.216

o
35
35
XdX + 99.08 X2dX

o
Put X = 105.08 Sin

and
dX = 105.08 Cos d
At X = 0
= 0
At X = 35
= 0.3396 radians = 19.4

0.3396
I1 = 662.55
105.082 105.082 Sin2 (105.08)Cosd
2
2 3/2
2
2 3/2
+ 1 X 105.08 X 105.08 X .dX
3/2
3/2
o o
o 2
3/2 35
16.07 105.082 X2
2
3/2
35
35
0.3396
= 662.55 105.082
o
35
X 2
X 3
+ 99.08
2 o
3 o
65645.454 X | 1592.216
o
35
Cos2 d
16.07
[(105.082 352 )3/2
3
35
(105.082 )3/2 ] +
35
1 35
[ (105.082 352 )3/2 (105.082 X2 )3/2 dX]
3
o
194
65645.454 (35 0)
0.3396
I1 = 7315748.83
o
1592.216
353
(352 ) + 99.08
2
3
2
1+Cos d +1005048.922 + 11347550.55
2
0.3396
3o
105.084 Cos4 d 1856804.857
7315748.83
Sin2
+
2
2 o
0.3396
1
(105.08)4
3
0.3396
Cos2 (1 Sin2 )d + 10495794.62
I1 =
Sin (2 0.3396)
7315748.83
2
2
0.3396 +
+ 10495794.62
0.3396
1
(105.08)4
3
o
1 + Cos 2 1Cos 2 d
2
2
0.3396
= 12886893.66
1 105.084 Sin 2
+
3 2
2 o
0.3396
1
(105.08)4
12
o
= 12886893.66
1
Sin (2 0.3396)
(105.8)4 0.3396 +
6
2
]
0.3396
(1 Cos2 2) d
1
(105.08)4
12
o
1 1 + Cos 4 d
2

0.3396
= 12886893.66 13283049.35 +
1
(105.08)4
12
o
1 1 Cos 4 d
2 2
0.3396
= 396155.69 +
1
Sin 4
(105.08)4
24
4 o
= 396155.69 +
1
Sin (4 0.3396)
(105.08)4 0.3396
24
4
0.3396
= 396155.69 + 483712.6275
= 87556.9375
20
I2 = 21.07 (35 X)
o
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
20
= (737.45 21.07X)
o
20
=
o
[737.45
195
105.082 X2 99.08 dX
105.082 X2 73066.546
] dX
21.07X (105.08)2 X2 + 2087.6162

Put X = 105.08 Sin
dX = 105.08 Cos d
=0
= 0.1915
At X = 0
At X = 20
0.1915
I2 = 737.45
20
(105.08)2 Cos2 d +
21.07
2 o
26
105.082 X2
20
(2X) dX 73066.546 dX + 2087.616 XdX

o
0.1915
= 8.143 106
o
2
2 3/2 20
1+Cos 2 d + 21.07 (105.08) X
2
3/2
2
o
26
20
X2
73066.546 | X | + 2087.616
2 o
o
8.143 106
Sin 2
2
+ 2 o
0.1915
73066.546 (20) +
21.07
[{(105.08)2 (20)2}3/2 (105.08)2x3/2 ]
3
2087.616
(400 )
2
8.143 106
Sin (2 0.1915)
0.1916 +
2
2
438772.215
I2 = 58247.385
35
I3 = (662.45 16.07X)
20
105.082 X2 99.08
35
= [662.45
105.082 X2 65635.546
20
16.07
105.082 X2 + 1592.216X] dX
] dX
196
0.3396
= 662.45
35
105.082 Cos2 d 65635.546 | X |

20
0.1915
35
35
X2
16.07
+ 1592.216 +
2 20 2 20
0.3396
= 662.45 105.082
0.1915
105.082 X2 (2X) dX
1 + Cos 2 d 65635.546 15
2
1592.216
16.07 (105.082 X2 )3/2
(352 202 ) +
2
2
3/2
20
35
662.45 105.082
Sin 2
2
+ 2 0.1915 65635.546 15
0.3396
1592.216
16.07
(352 202) +
[(105.082 352 )3/2 (105.082 202 )3/2 ]
2
3
662.45 105.082
Sin (2 0.3396) Sin (2 0.1915)
0.3396 0.1915 +
2
2
2
65635.546 15 +
1592.216
16.07
(352 202 ) +
[(105.082 352 )3/2 (105.082 202)3/2 ]
2
3
I3 = 8838.028 . Adding values of three integrals. We have

MydX = 87556.9375 + 58247.385 + 8838.028
Now calculate y2dX
= 154642.3505 .
35
y2 dX = 2
o
35
= 2
o
105.082 X2 99.08
] dX
2
[105.08 X + 99.08 2X99.08

2
105.082 X2
] dX
35
= 2 (20858.653 X2 198.16
105.082 X2 ) dX
o
35
= 2 20858.653 | X |
o
0.3396
2 3 35
| X | 198.16 2
3
o
105.082 Cos2 d
0.3396
= 2 20858.653 (35)
2
(353 ) 198.16 2 105.082
3
o
2
1+Cos d
2
2
198.16 2 105.082
Sin 2
+ 353
+
3
2
2 o
0.3396
= 2 20858.653 35
197
y2d X = 1229.761
H =
MydX
y2dX
154642.3505
1239.761
H = 125.75 KN
D. CIRCULAR ARCH BY NUMERICAL INTEGRATION:- As you have seen algebraic integration is

lengthy, laborious and time consuming. so it is better to store such question by numerical integration.
5KN
20m
(5) (6) (7)
(3) (4)
(8)
(2)
(9) (10)
(1)
A
B
70m
21.07KN
53.93KN
y =
105.082 X2 99.08
Mac = 53.93 (35 X) (35 X)
20 < X < 35
Mbd
= 21.07 (35 X)
0 < X < 20
Mdc
= 21.07 (35 X) 5 (15 X)
29 < X < 35
Attempting in a tabular form
Section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
X
31.5
24.5
17.5
10.5
3.5
3.5
10.5
17.5
24.5
31.5
Y
1.167
3.104
0.533
5.474
5.942
5.942
5.474
4.533
3.104
1.167
M
176.505
456.015
637.525
721.035
760.545
606.205
493.715
368.725
221.235
73.745
MY
205.981
1415.47
2889.901
3946.446
4198.29
3602.07
2702.596
1671.430
686.713
86.060
21405.157
Y2
1.362
9.635
20.548
29.965
35.307
35.307
29.965
20.548
9.635
1.362
193.634
198

S = 105.08 (2 0.3396) = 71.370 m
71.37
dS =
= 7.137 m
10
Myds
21405.157 7.137
H =
=
y2ds
193.634 7.137
H = 110.54 KN , Accuracy can be increased by taking more segments.
For secant variation of inertia follow the same procedures established already in this
Chapter.
Space for taking Notes:
SLOPE __ DEFLECTION METHOD
199
CHAPTER FOUR
4. SLOPE DEFLECTION METHOD
This method is applicable to all types of statically indeterminate beams & frames and in this
method, we solve for unknown joint rotations, which are expressed in terms of the applied loads and the
bending moments. By inspection, the degree of indeterminacy is checked and the corresponding number of
unknown joint rotations are calculated from the slope deflections equations.
4.1. SIGN CONVENTION:
(1) ROTATIONS:
Clockwise joint rotations are considered as (+ve).
(2) END MOMENTS:
Counterclockwise end moments are considered as (+ve).
4.2. PROCEDURE:
The procedure is as follows:
(1)
Determine the fixed end moments at the end of each span due to applied loads acting on span by
considering each span as fixed ended. Assign Signs w.r.t. above sign convention.
w (u.d.l)
2
+WL
____ A
12
2
B -WL
____
12
+WL2
Mf ab = ____
12
-WL2
MFba = ____
12
P
a
A
Mf ab =
b
L
2
+ Pa b
2
L
B
2
Pa b
MFba = -____
2
L
(2)
Express all end moments in terms of fixed end moments and the joint rotations by using slope
deflection equations.
(3)
Establish simultaneous equations with the joint rotations as the unknowns by applying the
condition that sum of the end moments acting on the ends of the two members meeting at a joint
should be equal to zero.
(4)
Solve for unknown joint rotations.
(5)
Substitute back the end rotations in slope deflection equations and compute the end moments.
(6)
Determine all reactions and draw S.F. and B.M. diagrams and also sketch the elastic curve
200
4.3. DERIVATION OF SLOPE DEFLECTION EQUATION:

Consider a generalized beam under the action of applied loads and end moments as shown at (i).
(i)
(ii)
Fig: (i) can be equated to a fixed ended beam carrying applied loads which produce fixing
moments plus two simple beams carrying end moments [figs (iii) and (iv)]
(iv)
(iii)
Draw moment diagrams. Determine their areas and centroid locations.
M
diagrams are placed on conjugate beams)
EI
Equating relevant rotations in above four diagrams according to sign conventions
(Assuming these
and
a = 0 a1 + a2 = a1 + a2
b = 0 + b1 b2 = b1 b2
(1)
Compatibility on rotations
(2)
Compatibility on moments
During the same for moments.

So
Mab = Mfab + Ma
Mba = Mfba + Mb
201
Where Ma and Mb are the additional moments required to produce the joint rotations at ends A
and B respectively and Mfab & Mfba are the fixed ended moments which hold the tangents at points A and
B straight.Conjugate beam theorem states that rotation at a point in actual beam is equal to the shear force
at the corresponding point in the conjugate beam ). Applying it we have.
a1 =
2 LMa LMa
=
3 2EI
3EI
b1 =
1 LMa
LMa
=
3 2EI
6EI
a2 =
1 LMb
LMb
=
3 2EI
6EI
b2 =
2 LMb LMb
=
3 2EI
3EI
Putting the values of a1, a2, b1 & b2 in equation (1) and solve for Ma & Mb.
a =
and
b =
LMa
LMb
+
3EI
6EI
Ma'L
LMb'
6EI
3EI
Equation (3) becomes
a +
L Ma'
LMb'
+
3 EI
6EI
(3)
L Ma/ L Mb/
6 EI
3 EI
(4)
LMa' LMb'
=
3EI
6EI
6EIa + 2LMa
6EI
OR
LMb
6EI
6EIa + 2 LMa = LMb

Mb =
From (4), b =
b =
6EI
a + 2 Ma
L
Ma L
L
6EI
3EI
(5)
6EIa + 2Ma'
L
Ma L
2LMa
2 a
6EI
3EI
b + 2 a =
Ma L 2LMa
6EI
3EI
b + 2a =
MaL 4 LMa
6EI
by putting Mb/ from (5)
202
So
or
b + 2a =
3LMa
6EI
b + 2a =
LMa
2EI
Ma =
2EI
(2a + b )
L
Ma =
2EI
( 2a b)
L
From(5) Mb =
or
From here Ma' is
(6)
6EI a 4EI
+
( 2 a b ) By putting value of Ma from 6 in 5 and simplifying
L
L
Mb =
6EI a 8EI a 4EI
b
L
L
L
Mb =
2EI a 4EI
b
L
L
Mb =
2EI
( a 2 b )
L
(7)
Putting the values of Ma and Mb from equations 6 and 7 in equation (2), we have.
2EI
( 2ab)
L
2EI
(a 2b)
Mba = Mfba +
L
Mab = Mfab +
Absolute values of
values of
2EI
are not required in general except for special cases and we use relative
L
2EI
in cases without settlement..
L
Where, K =
Where
I
if absolute stiffness (rotation) is not required.
L
K = relative stiffness
Slope deflection equation for members without settlement.

Mab = Mfab +
2EI
( 2a b )
L
Mba = Mfba +
2EI
( 2 b a )
L
203
without absolute value of
2EI
, above equations become
L
Mab = Mfab + Kab ( 2a b )

Mba = Mfba + Kab ( 2 b a )
Where Kab = relative stiffness of member ab
2EIab
L
Now we apply the method to various indeterminate structures.
Kab =
EXAMPLE NO.1:: Analyze the continuous beam shown by slope deflection method. Draw shear &
moment diagram and sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :
2KN
1m
2KN/m
B
4I
2I
4m
4KN
2m
6m
D
3I
4m
Step 1: Calculation of Relative Stiffness :

Member.
I
L
Krel.
AB
2
12
4
BC
4
12
6
CD
3
12
4
Step 2: Calculation of Fixed End Moments : Treat each span as fixed ended.
P
b
- (any generalized span

carrying a single load)
L
Pb2a
L2
Mfab = Mfba = 0
26
= + 6 KNm
12
Pa b
L2
(there is no load acting on span AB)
Mfbc =
(According to our sign convention)
204

Mfcb = 6 KNm
(According to our sign convention)
42 2
= + 2 KNm
42
Mfdc = 2 KNm
Step 3: Establish simultaneous equations :
2
Mfcd =
Mab = Mfab + Kab (2 a b)
(General formPut values of FEMs & relative stiffnesses)
Mab = 0 + 6 ( 2a b) = 12 a 6 b
Mba = 6 ( 2b a) = 12 b 6 a
Mbc = 6 + 8 ( 2 b c) = 6 16 b 8 c
Mcb = 6 + 8 ( 2 c b) = 6 16 c 8 b
Mcd = 2 + 9 ( 2c d) = 2 18 c 9 d
Mdc = 2 + 9 (2d c) = 2 18 d 9 c
Step 4: Joint Conditions :
at A :
Mab 2=0
B
Mba + Mbc = 0
C:
Mcb + Mcd = 0
D:
Mdc = 0
or
Mab = 2 KNm
Put these joint conditions in the linear simultaneous equations set up in step
No. (3).
Mab = 2,
so
12 a 6 b = 2
12 a 6 b 2 = 0
(1)
Mba + Mbc = 0
so
12 b 6 a + 6 16 b 8 c = 0
6 a 28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
so
(2)
Mcb + Mcd = 0
6 16c 8 b + 2 18 c 9 d = 0
8b 34 c 9 d 4 = 0
(3)
(4)
Mdc = 0
2 18 d 9 c = 0
9 c 18 d 2 = 0
12 a 6 b 2 = 0
6 a 28 b 8 c
+ 6 = 0 ( Symmetrical about a and d diagonal )
0 8 b 34 c 9 d 4 = 0
0 0
9 c 18 d 2 = 0
205
If the linear simultaneous equations are established and are arranged in a sequence of joint
conditions, we will find that the quantities on the leading diagonal are dominant in that particular equation
and off diagonal quantities are symmetrical as far as the magnitude of rotations is concerned. This is a
typical property of the stiffness method, which you will study later in matrix methods of structural analysis.
From (1)
a =
2 6b
12
(5)
From (4)
d =
2 9 c
18
(6)
Putting these values in equations (2) & (3), all deformations are expressed in terms of b & c.
Therefore, we get two linear simultaneous equations in terms of b & c. Hence, their values can be
calculated.
Put a from equations (5) in equation (2)
6
2 6b
28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
12
+ 1 + 3 b 28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
or
25 b 8 c + 7 = 0
(7)
Put d from equation (6) in equation (3)

8 b 34 c 9
2 9 c
4 =0
18
Simplifying
8 b 34 c + 1 + 4.5 c 4 = 0
8 b 29.5 c 3 = 0
From (7)
b =
Put in (8)
(8)
8 c + 7
25
(9)
8 c + 7
25 29.5 c 3 = 0
or 2.56 c 2.24 29.5 c 3 = 0

26.94 c 5.24 = 0
c =
5.24
26.94
c = 0.1945
Radians
206

Put value of c in equation (9) , we get
b =
8 ( 0.1945) + 7
25
b = + 0.3422
radians.
Put b in equation (5)

a =
2 6 0.3422
12
a = 0.3378
Put
radians.
c in equation (6)
d =
2 9 . ( 0.1945)
18
d = 0.0139
radians.
Putting these values of rotations in simultaneous equations set up in step (3) & simplifying we get
the values of end moments as under:
Mab = 2 KNm
Mba = 2.08 KNm
Mbc = + 2.08 KNm
Mcb = 5.63 KNm
Mcd = + 5.63 KNm
Mdc = 0
These two values should be the

the same but with opposite signs to satisfy equilibrium at that
joint.
(Same comment)
As the end moments have been calculated and they also satisfy the joint conditions, therefore, the
structure is statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, shear force diagrams, B.M. diagrams & elastic
curves can now be sketched.
NOTE:
In slope deflection method, the actual deformations are the redundants and stiffness matrix is
symmetrical. In force method, we can chose any redundant and therefore flexibility matrix is not
generally symmetrical about leading diagonal.
Now we can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams and sketch elastic curve. Free body diagrams
of various spans are drawn.
2KN
1m
2.08 2.08
2
A
+2
4m
+6
207
2KN/m
5.63 5.63
6m
4KN
2m
+6
4m
+2
+2 reactions due to applied loads
-0.02
+0.02 -0.592
+0.592 +1.408
-1.408 reactions due to end moments
+2 -0.02
+0.02 +5.408
+6.592 + 3.408
+0.592
adding values on both sides of a support

+1.98
+5.428
2KN
Elastic curve
+10
2KN/m
4KN
1m
2m
A
4m
1.98KN
6m
5.428KN
10KN
5.408
0
0.02
2.0
D
0.592KN
3.408 3.408
+
+
0.02
X
=2.704m
0.592
0 S.F.D.
0.592
6.592
6-X
X =0.417m
/
X =1.008m
1.184
0
2
4m
2.08
0 B.M.D.
2.08
5.63
a=1.652m
Find the location of points of contraflexure & find the maximum +ve B. M. in portion BC by
setting the relevant moment expression equal to zero and by setting the concerned S.F. expression equal to
zero respectively.
To Find Max B.M. in Portion BC :
X
6X
=
5.408
6.592
6.592 X = 6 5.408 5.408 X
X = 2.704m
208
So
Mbc = 2.08 + 5.408 2.704
2
(2.704)
2
Mbc = 5.237 KNm

Points of Contraflexure :
Near B:
2.08 + 5.408 X X2 = 0
X2 5.408 X + 2.08 = 0
X=
5.408
(5.408)2 4 1 2.08
21
X = 0.417 m, 4.991 m
X = 0.417 m
Near C :
In span CB
5.63 + 6.592 X' X'2 = 0

X2 6.592 X + 5.63 = 0
X =
6.592 (6.592)2 4 1 5.63

21
X =
6.592 4.575
2
X = 5.584 , 1.008
X = 1.008 m
1.184
5.63
=
a
2a
in span CD.
1.184 a = 5.63 2 5.63 a

a = 1.652 m
These can be put in bending moment diagram and sketch elastic curve.
209
EXAMPLE NO. 2: Analyse the continuous beam shown by slope deflection method. Draw S.F.D. &
B.M.D. Also sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :
4KN
2m
2m
6m
EI = Constt.
EI = Constt.
Step 1: Calculation of Relative Stiffness :

Member
AB
BC
I
L
1
12
4
1
12
6
Krel.
3
2
Step 2: Calculation of Fixed End Moments : Mab = Mfab + Krel (2ba b)

4 22 2
Mfab =
= + 2 KNm
42
Mfba = 2 KNm
Mfbc = 0
Mfcb = 0
( As there is no load in portion BC )
Step 3: Establish Simultaneous Equations :

Mab = 2 + 3 ( 2 a b )
Mba = 2 + 3 ( 2 b a )
Mbc = 0 + 2 ( 2 b c)
Mcb = 0 + 2 ( 2 c b )
A:
a = 0 ( Being a fixed joint )
B:
Mba + Mbc = 0
C:
c = 0
(Being a fixed end)
Putting these joint conditions in the linear simultaneous equations set up in step No. (3)
Put a = c = 0 in above equations. The only equation is obtained from joint B. That becomes.
2 6 b 3 a 4 b 2 c = 0
2 6 b 0 4 b 0 = 0
2 10 b = 0
b = 0.2
radians.
210
Put these values of rotations i.e., a = c = 0 and b = 0.2 in simultaneous equations set up in
step (3) & get the values of end moments.
Mab = 2 + 3 ( 2 0 + 0.2) = 2.6 KNm
Mba = 2 + 3 ( 2 ( 0.2) 0) = 0.8 KNm.
Mbc = 0 + 2 [ 2 (0.2) 0] = + 0.8 KNm
Mcb = 0 + 2 ( 0 + 0.2) = + 0.4 KNm
Now Draw SFD and BMD.

0.4KN-m
4KN
2m
2m
6m
2.6KN-m
1.75KN
2.45KN
2.45
0.2KN
2.45
+
0.2
1.55
0.2
S.F.D.
0
0
1.55
2.3
X=1.061m
0.4
+
(2-X)
2.6
(2-X)
0 B.M.D.
0.8
=0.516m
(6-a)
a=2m
As the end moments have been calculated and they satisfy the joint conditions, therefore, the structure is
statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, S.F. diagram, B.M. diagram & elastic curve have now been
sketched.
LOCATION OF POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURE :
Near A :
2.6
2.3
=
X
2X
2.6 2 2.6 X = 2.3 X
X = 1.061 m
Near B :
X
2 X
=
0.8
2.3
2.3 X = 2 0.8 0.8 X
X = 0.516 m
211
a
6 a
=
0.4
0.8
Near C :
0.8 a = 6 0.4 0.4 a

a=2m
There have been shown on BMD.
EXAMPLE NO. 3: Analyze the continuous beam shown by slope deflection method. Draw S.F.D &
B.M.D. Also sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION:
2KN
2KN/m
A
1m
4KN
2m
D
4m
6m
4m
2I
4I
3I
Step 1: Calculation of relative stiffness :

I
I
L
AB
2
12
4
BC
4
12
6
CD
3
12
4
Member.
Krel.
Step 2: Calculation of Fixed End Moments :

Mfab = Mfba = 0
Mfbc =
2 62
= + 6 KNm
12
Mfcb = 6 KNm
Mfcd =
4 22 2
= + 2 KNm
42
Mfdc = 2 KNm
(no load over span AB)
212
Step 3: Establish simultaneous equations :
Put values of fixing moments and Krel.
Mab = 0 + 6 (2 a b) = 12 a 6 b
Mba = 0 + 6 ( 2 b a ) = 12 b 6 a
Mbc = 6 + 8 ( 2 b c) = 6 16 b 8 c
Mcb = 6 + 8 ( 2 c b) = 6 16 c 8 b
Mcd = 2 + 9 ( 2 c d) 2 18 c 9 d
Mdc = 2 + 9 ( 2 d c) = 2 18 d 9 c
A: : Mab 2 = 0 or
B:
Mba + Mbc = 0
C:
Mcb + Mcd = 0
Mab = 2 KNm
D:
d = 0
Putting these joint conditions in the linear simultaneous equations set up in step No. (3)
12 a 6 b = 2
Mab = 2
12 a 6 b 2 = 0
(1)
Mba + Mbc = 0
12 b 6 a + 6 16 b 8 c = 0
6 a 28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
(2)
Mcb + Mcd = 0
6 16 c 8 b + 2 18 c 9 d = 0
8 b 34 c 9 d 4 = 0
d = 0
(3)
(4) Simplifying we get.
12 a 6 b 2 = 0
(1)
6 a 28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
(2)
8 b 34 c 9 d 4 = 0
(3)
=0
(4)
Putting the value of d in equation (3)

8b 34 c 0 4 = 0
8 b 34 c 4 = 0
(5)
From (1)
a =
Put in (2)
213
6 b 2
12
(6)
6 b 2
12
28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
+ 3 b + 1 28 b 8 c + 6 = 0
25 b 8 c + 7 = 0
34 c 4
b =
8
From (5)
Put in (7)
or
25
(7)
(8)
34 c 4
8
8 c + 7 = 0
106.25 c + 12.5 8 c + 7 = 0
98.25 c + 19.5 = 0
c = 0.1985
From (8)
b =
From (6)
a =
Finally
34 ( 0.1985) 4
8
radians.
by putting value of c
6 x 0.3435 2
12
b = + 0.3435
radians.
a = 0.3384
radians.
a = 0.3384
b = + 0.3435
c = 0.1985
d = 0
Putting these values of rotations in simultaneous equations set up in step # (3) & getting the values
of end moments as follows.
Mab = 12x (0.3384) 6 0..3435 = 1.9918 = + 2 KNm
Mba = 12x (+0.3435) 6x( 0.3384) = 2.092 KNm
Mbc = 6 16(+0.3435)8 ( 0.1985) = + 2.092 KNm
Mcb = 6 16( 0.1985) 8(+0.3435) = 5.572 KNm
Mcd = 2 18 ( 0.1985) 9 0 = + 5.573 KNm
Mdc = 2 18 x 0 9 ( 0.1985) = 0.214 KNm.
214
As the end moments have been calculated and they satisfy the joint conditions. Therefore, the
structure is statically determinate at this stage. Reactions, S.F.D., B.M.D. & elastic curve can now be
sketched.
2KN
2
2
A
1m
+2
0
+2
4m
0
-0.023
-0.023
+0.023
+0.023
6m
+6
+6
2m
+2
-0.58
+5.42
+0.58
+6.58
+1.34
+3.34
+1.977
+5.443
Elastic curve
2KN
1m
4m
+1.977KN
2KN/m
C
5.42
4m
9.92KN
3.34
(6-a)
0.214
0.66KN
+
0 S.F.D.
0.66
0.023
0.023
+2 reactions due to
applied loads
-1.34 reactions due to end moments
+0.66 final reactions
4KN
6M
+5.443KN
2m
+9.92
0
2
2KN/m
4KN
5.572 5.573
0.214
2.092 2.092
a
5.25
X
0
X
+
1.106
+
X
0
B.M.D.
2.092
5.572
TO LOCATE THE MAX. B.M. IN PORTION BC :

5.42
6.58
=
a
(6 a)
5.42 6 5.42.a = 6.58 a
a = 2.71 m
2
Mbc = 2.092 + 5.42 2.71 2.712 = + 5.252 KNm
2
= 5.25 KNm
215
LOCATION OF POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURE :

Near B : (Span BC )
2.092 + 5.42 X X2 = 0
X2 5.42 X + 2.092 = 0
X=
X =
5.42
(5.42)2 4 1 2.092
2
5.42 4.583
2
= 0.418 , 5.002 ,
Near C :
So
X = 0.418 m
Span BC
5.572 + 6.58 X X2 = 0
X2 6.58 X + 5.572 = 0
X =
+ 6.58 (6.58)2 4 1 5.572

2
6.58 4.583
2
X = 0.998 , 5.582
Near C : ( Span CD )
5.573 + 3.34 X"= 0
X" = 1.669 m
Near D : ( Span CD )
0.214 + 0.66 X = 0
X = 0.324 m
These have been shown on BMD.
X = 0.998 m
216
4.4. ANALYSIS OF INDETERMINATE BEAMS DUE TO MEMBER AXIS

ROTATION (SETTLEMENT OF SUPPORTS) :
L
R=
Consider a generalized fixed ended beam settling differentially at B. The angle R is measured
from the original members axis to the displaced member axis and will be +ve if it is clockwise. The
2EI
with consistent units are to be used in the settlement problem and the final slope
absolute values of
L
deflection equation to be used for settlement problems is as follows:
Mab = Mfab +
2EI
( 2 a b + 3 R)
L
Mba = Mfba +
2EI
( 2 b a + 3 R).
L
The above equation is general and can be used to find the end moments due to applied loading and
due to sinking of supports simultaneously. However, it is a common practice to consider end moments
induced due to applied loading separately from those induced due to settlement. The superposition principle
can then be applied afterwards and the final end moments can be obtained.
If all supports of a continuous structure like beams and frames settle by the same amount, no
additional end moments will be induced due to sinking. These will be induced only whenever there is a
differential sinking of supports like the following case. Where support C sinks by w.r.t supports B and D.
B
L1
L2
R
/
(Sign of R is the same if determined at the two ends of a span ). So

Rab = 0 ( Both supports of span AB are at the same level )
Rbc =
L1
Rcd =
L2
( Clockwise angle is positive )
( Counterclockwise angle is negative )
217
The following points are to be strictly followed :

(1)
Consideration and computation of values of R in the span

effected by the settlement.
Use proper sign for R keeping in view the corresponding sign convention.
(2)
(3)
The units of the R.H.S. of the slopedeflection equation should be

those of the B.M. (KNm).
EXAMPLE NO. 4: Analyze the continuous beam shown due to the settlement of support B by slopedeflection method. Draw shear and moment diagrams and sketch the elastic curve.
A
15mm
E=200X106 KN/m2
I=400X10-4m4
1m
4m
2I
5m
4I
4m
3I
SOLUTION:
Step 1: Calculation of F.E.M :
2EI
Mab = Mfab +
( 2 a b + 3 R). where R is in radians
L
As there is no applied loading on the beam, therefore all fixed end moments terms in the slope
deflection equation will be equal to zero.
Step 2: Calculation of R and
2EI
terms for various spans :
L
Span AB.
R=+
0.015
= + 3.75 103 rad
4
2EI 2x(200 106 ) (2 400 106 )

=
L
4
= 80,000 KNm
Span BC :
R=
0.015
= 3 103 rad
5
2EI 2 (200 106 ) (4 400 106)

=
L
5
= 128,000 KNm
KN/m2xm4
m
218
Span CD :
R=0
2EI 2x (200 106) (3 400 106)
=
L
4
= 120,000 KNm
Step 3: Write Slopedeflection Equation in terms of Joint Rotations & R.
Mab = 0 + 80,000 ( 2 a b + 11.25 103)
Mba = 0 + 80,000 ( 2 b a + 11.25 103)
Mbc = 128,000 ( 2 b c 9 103)
Mcb = 128,000 ( 2 c b 9 103)
Mcd = 120,000 ( 2 c d)
Mdc = 120,000 ( 2d c)
Step 4: Joint Conditions (Conditions of Equilibrium + geometry) :
Joint A:
Mab = 0
(Pin support)
(1)
Joint B :
Mba+Mbc=0
(Continuous support)
(2)
Joint C :
Mcb + Mcd=0
(3)
Joint D :
d = 0
(Fixed support)
(4)
Step 5: Simultaneous Equations :

Putting joint conditions in slope deflection equations
160,000 a 80,000 b + 0 + 900 = 0
Mab = 0
(1)
160,000 b 80,000 a + 900 256,000 b 128,000 c 1152 = 0

80,000 a 416,000 b 128,000 c252=0 Mba + Mbc = 0
(2)
256,000 c 128,000 b 1152 240,000 c0=0 Mcb + Mcd = 0 (3)
128,000 b 496,000 c 1152 = 0
Simplifying, finally
160,000 a 80,000 b + 0 + 900 = 0
(1)
80,000 a 416,000 b 128,000 c 252=0
(2)
128,000b 496,000c1152=0
(3)
Solve the above three linear simultaneous equations to get the values of a, b & c which will be
put in the original slopedeflection equations to determine the final end moments.
a =
From (1)
or
900 80000 b
160000
a = 5.625 103 0.5 b
(4)
c =
From (3)
so
219
128000 b 1152
496000
c = 0.258 b 2.32 103
(5)
Put (4) and (5) in (2) , we have.

80,000 [ 5.625 103 0.5 b] 416,000 b 128,000
[ 0.258 b 2.32 103] 252 = 0
450 + 40,000 b 416,000 b+33,024 b+296.96252=0
b =
405.04
342976
b = 1.181 103 radians.

Put b in (1) because a is dominant there.
160,000 a 80,000 (1.181 103) + 900 = 0
900 80000 ( 1.181 103)
160000
a =
a = + 6.215 103
radians.
Put b in (3) because c is dominant there, we get.

c =
128000 ( 1.181 103 ) 1152

496000
c = 2.018 103 red.

a = + 6.215 103 red.
b = 1.181 103 red.
c = 2.018 103 red.
d = 0 red.
Step 6: End Moments : Putting values of rotations in generalized slope deflection equation.
Mab = 80,000 (2 6.215 103+1.181 103 + 11.25 103) = 0 KNm (Check)
Mba = 80,000 (+2 1.181 103 6.215 103 + 11.25 103) = + 592 KNm
Mbc = 128,000 (+ 2 1.181 103 +2.018 103 9 103 ) = 592 KNm
( Note: Mba = Mbc Check is OK )
220

Mcb = 128,000 (+2 2.018 103 + 1.181 103 9 103) = 485 KNm
Mcd = 120,000 (+2 2.018 103 0 ) = + 485 KNm
Mdc = 120,000 (0+2.018 103 ) = + 242 KNm
Note:- A great care should be exercised while putting the direction of end moments in the free body
diagrams and then drawing the composite B.M.D. e.g., a (+ve) end moment would mean that
it is counterclockwise at that particular joint or vice versa. After putting the correct
directions according to the sign convention, we will decide by the nature of B.M. strictly by
keeping in view the sign convention for B.M. (tension at a bottom means +ve B.M.).
592 592
A
4m
5m
-148 -215.4
+148
148KN
485
485
242
4m
+215.4 +181.75
397.15KN
363.4KN
-181.75
Reactions due to
and moments at supports
181.75KN
Final reaction
242KN-m
A
Elastic curve
15mm
397.15KN
148KN
4m
1m
4m
5m
181.75KN
363.4KN
181.75
148
0
148
`81.75
+
+
0 S.F.D. (KN)
215.4
592(tension at the
bottom).
X
242
+ +
0
0
-
X=2.75m
485
(Tension at the top)
B.M.D. (KN-m)
221
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES:
Near B. Span BC
Let it be X.
MX = 592 215.4 X = 0
X = 2.75 m
Near D. Span DC
Let it be X
MX = 242 181.75 X = 0
X= 1.33 m
EXAMPLE NO. 5:- Analyze the following beam by slope deflection method. Draw shear and moment
diagrams. Sketch elastic curve.
Take
I = 400 106m4
and
E = 200 106 KN/m2.
SOLUTION : Consider each span fixed end and compute fixed ended moments. This is a case of
continuous beam carrying loads and subjected to settlements.
3KN/m
A
10KN
4m
B
Rab
5KN
2m
D
Rbc
Rcd
20mm
3I
6m
10mm
2I
8m
10I
8m
3KN/m
A
6m
10KN
4m
4m
5KN
C
6m
2m
222
Step 1: FIXED END MOMENTS

Mfab = 3 62 / 12 = 9 KNm
Mfba = 9 KNm
Mfbc = 10 42 4 / 82 = 10
Mfcb = 10 KNm
Mfcd = 5 2 6/ 8 = 1.875
Mfdc = 5 62 2/82 = 5.625 KNm
Step 2: CALCULATION OF R & 2EI/L TERMS FOR VARIOUS SPANS :

SPAN AB :
R =
+ 0.020
= + 3.33 103 rad.
6
2EI 2 200 106 (3 400 106 )
=
= 80,000 KNm
L
6
SPAN BC :
R =
0.02 0.01
+
= 1.25 103 rad
8
8
2EI 2 200 106 (10 400 106 )
=
= 200,000 KNm
L
8
SPAN CD:
R =
0.01
= 1.25 103 rad
8
2EI 2 200 106 (2 400 106)
=
= 40,000 KNm
L
8
Step 3: SLOPE DEFLECTION EQUATIONS:

Put values of fixed ended moments, Krel and R, we get.
Mab = 9 + 80,000 (2a b + 10 103).
Mba = 9 + 80,000 (2b a + 10 103 )
Mbc = 10 + 200,000 (2b c 3.75 103 ).
Mcb = 10 + 200,000 (2c b 3.75 103 ).
Mcd = 1.875 + 40,000 (2c d 3.75 103 ).
Mdc = 5.625 + 40,000 (2d c 3.75 103 ).
Step 4: JOINT CONDITIONS :
Joint A a = 0
(Fixed support)
Joint B Mba + Mbc = 0
Joint C Mcb + Mcd = 0
Joint D Mdc = 0
(Pin support)
223
Step 5: SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS :

Putting values of Mba, Mbc, Mcb , Mcd and Mdc in terms of
9 160,000 b+800+ 10 400,000 b 200,000 c 750 = 0
Mba + Mbc = 0 and a = 0
560,000 b 200,000 c + 51 = 0
(1)
10 400,000 c 200,000 b 750 + 1.875 80,000 c 40,000 d 150 = 0

200,000 b 480,000 c 40,000 d 908.125=0 Mcb + Mcd = 0 (2)
5.625 80,000 d 40,000 c 150 = 0
Mdc = 0
40,000 c 80,000 d 155.625 = 0
(3) Writing again
560,000 b 200,000 c + 51 = 0
(1)
200,000 b 480,000 c 40,000 d 908.125 = 0
(2)
40,000 c 80,000 d 155.625 = 0

51 200000 c
560000
(4)
155.625 40000 c
80000
(5)
From (1)
b =
From (3)
d =
Put b and d in equ.
(2)
(3)
200,000
40,000
51 200000 c
560000
480,000 c
155.625 40000 c
80000
908.125 = 0
Simplifying
18.2143 + 71428.5714 c 480,000 c + 77.8125 + 200000 c 908.125 = 0

388571.4286 c 848.5268 = 0
we get c = 21.8371 rad. From (4) and (5)

b and d are calculated.
c = 21.8371 104 rad.

b = + 8.7097 104 rad.
d = 8.5346 104 rad.
Step 6: END MOMENTS :
Mab = 9+80,000 (8.7097 104+10 103 ) = +739.32 KNm
Mba =9+80,000 (2 8.7097 104 +10 103 ) = +651.64 KNm
Mbc = 10+200,000 (2 8.7097 104+21.8371 1043.75 103) = 651.64 KNm
Mcb = 10+200,000 (+2 21.8381 1048.7097 1043.75 103) = 60.71 KNm
Mcd = 1.875+40,000 (+2 21.8371 104+8.5346 104 3.75 103) = + 60.71 KNm
Mdc = 5.625+40,000 (+2 8.5346 104+21.8371 104 3.75 103 ) = 0 KNm
224
Step 7: SUPPORT REACTIONS: By applying loads and end moments on free-body diagrams.
3KN/m
739.32
A
651.64KN-m
651.64KN
-m
BB
8m
6m
10KN
60.71KN-m
4m
60.71KN-m
CC
8m
5KN
2m
D
3.84
=+3.75-7.59
8.84
84.04
222.83
=+1.25+7.59
240
=+5-89.04 94.04
=+9+231.83 =+9-231.83
=89.04+5
Net reactions, shear force and bending moment diagrams can now be plotted
Step 8: S.F & B.M. DIAGRAMS & ELASTIC CURVE :
3KN/m
739.32KN-m
651.64KN-m
10KN
4m 60.71KN-m
5KN
2m
D
C
-222.83
240.83KN
31
6m
-84.04 94.04 +8.84

20mm
101
102.88Kn
21
8m
8m
306.87KN
Elastic curve
3.84KN
222.83
240.83
+
8.84
+
84.04
651.64
X=3.13m
94.04
X = 0.646 m
0 -
60.71
739.32
Step 9: POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURE :

NEAR A:
3.84
+
0 S.F.D. (KN).
Let it be at X from A in Span AB

MX = 739.32 + 240.83X 1.5X2 = 0
1.5X2 240.83X + 739.32 = 0
+
0 B.M.D. (KN-m)
225
+ 240.83 (240.83)2 4 1.5 739.32

2 1.5
240.83 231.44
=
3
= 3.13 , 157.42
X=
X = 3.13 m
NEAR C:
Let it be at X from C in Span BC 60.71 + 94.04 X' = 0, X' = 0.646 m
EXAMPLE NO.6: Analyze the continuous beam shown due to settlement of support B by slope
deflection method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION
3KN/m
24KN
A
1m
4m
12KN
C
2.5 m
1m
5mm 5m
4I
2I
4m
3I
D
E=200X106
KN/m2
4
I = 400X10 -6m
B
3KN/m
B
A
4m
24KN
B
2.5m
12KN
1m
3m
Step 1: FIXED END MOMENTS

Mfab = 3 42/12 = 4 KNm
Mfbc = 24 2.52 2.5/52 = 15
Mfcd = 12 12 3/42 = 2.25
Step2: CALCULATION OF R &
2.5m
,
,
,
Mfba = 4 KNm
Mfcb = 15 KNm
Mfdc = 12 32 1/42 = 6.75 KNm
2EI
TERMS FOR VARIOUS SPANS:
L
Span AB :
R=+
0.015
= 3.75 103 rad
4
2EI 2(200 106) (2 400 106)

=
= 80,000 KNm
L
4
226
Span BC :
R=
0.015
= 3 103 rad.
5
2EI 2 (200 106) (4 400 106)

=
L
5
= 128,000 KNm
Span CD :
R=0
2EI 2 (200 106) (3 400 106)
=
L
4
= 120,000 KNm
Step 3: SLOPE DEFLECTION EQUATIONS.
Putting values of fixed end moments,
2EI
and 3R we have.
L
Mab = 4 + 80,000 ( 2 a b + 11.25 103)

Mba = 4 + 80,000 ( 2 b a + 11.25 103)
Mbc = 15 + 128,000 ( 2 b c 9 103)
Mcb = 15 + 128,000 ( 2c b 9 103)
Mcd = 2.25 +120,000 ( 2c d)
Mdc = 6.75 + 120,000 ( 2 d c)
Joint A ;
Mab = 0
(Pin support)
(1)
Joint B ;
Mba + Mbc = 0 (Continuous support)
(2)
Joint C ;
Mcb + Mcd = 0 (Continuous support)
(3)
Joint D ;
d = 0
(Fixed end)

4 160,000 a 80,000 b + 900 = 0
Mab = 0
160,000 a 80,000 b + 904 = 0
(1)
4 160,000 b 80,000 a + 900 + 15256,000 b 128,000 c 1152 = 0

Mba + Mbc = 0
80,000 a 416,000 b 128,000 c 241=0
(2)
15 256,000 c 128,000 b 1152 + 2.25 240,000 c 120,000 d = 0

Mcb + Mcd = 0
(3)
128,000 b 496,000 c 120,000 0 1164.75 = 0

or
128,000 b 496,000 c 1164.75 = 0
Putting d = 0
(3)
227
Finally the equations become

160,000 a 80,000 b + 904 = 0
(1)
80,000 a 416,000 b 128,000 c 241 = 0
(2)
128,000 b 496,000 c 1164.75 = 0
(3)
From (1)
a =
904 80000 b
160000
(4)
From (3)
c =
1164.75128000 b
496000
(5)
Put a & c from (4) and (5) in (2)

80,000
904 80000 b
160000
416,000 b 128,000
1164.75 128000 b 241 = 0

496000
452 + 40,000 b 416,000 b + 300.58 + 33032.26b 241=0

342967.74 b 392.42 = 0
b = 1.144 103
radians
904 + 80000 1.144 103

160000
From (4) a =
a = + 6.222 103 rad.

1164.75 + 128000 1.144 103
3
496000
= 2.053 10 radians.
From (5) c =
c = 2.053 103
a = +6.222 103
b = 1.144 103
c = 2.053 103
d = 0 rad.
rad.
rad.
rad.
rad.
Step 6: END MOMENTS

Putting the values of Fixed end moments, relative stiffness, and end rotations ( values)
in slope-deflection equations, we have.
Mab = 4 + 80,000 ( 2 x 6.222 103 + 1.144 103+ 11.25 103) = 0 KN-m
Mba = 4 + 80,000 (+ 2 1.144 103 6,222 103+ 11.25 103) = + 581 KN-m
Mbc = 15 + 128,000 (+2 1.144 103 + 2.053 103 9 103 ) = 581 KN-m
Mcb = 15 + 128,000 (+ 2 2.053 103 + 1.144 103 9 103) = 495 KN-m
228

Mcd = 2.25 + 120,000 (+ 2 2.053 103)= + 495 KN-m
Mdc = 6.75 + 120,000 (+2.053 103) = 495 KN-m
Now plot SFD, BMD and sketch elastic curve by applying loads and end moments to
free-body diagram.
3KN/m
581 581
A
4m
+145.25
24KN
2.5m495 495
5m
-145.25 -215.2
+6
+6
+151.25
+215.2
+12
=139.25 -203.2
4m
+183.75
+12
-183.75 reaction due to end moments (KN)
+3
+9
+227.2 +186.75
-342.45
Note:
12KN
1m 240
reaction due to applied loads (KN)
-174.75 final reactions (KN)
+413.95
Reactions due to loads and end moments have been calculated separately and then added up
appropriately.
3KN/m
B
1m
24KN
2.5m
12KN
1m
D
413.95KN
151.25KN
4m
5m
Elastic curve.
174.75KN
4m
342.45KN
151.25
0
139.25
186.75
+
203.2
174.75
174.75KN
+
0 S.F.D. (KN)
227.2
227.2
1.37m
581
/
X = 1.37 m
+ +
0 240
B.M.D. (KN-M)
X
=2.86m
POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :
Near B :
Span AB
Let it be X
MX = 581 203.2 X = 0
X = 2.86 m
995
229
Near D :
Span CD
Let it be X
Mx = 240 174.75 X = 0
X = 1.37 m
These have been shown on BMD.
EXAMPLE NO. 7: Analyze the continuous beam shown due to the settlement of support B alone by
slopedeflection method. Draw S.F. & B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :
A
15mm
1m
4m
2I
E=200X106 KN/m2
I=400X10-6 m4
5m
4I
Step 1: FIXED END MOMENTS :

2EI
Mab = Mfab +
( 2 a b + 3 R)
L
4m
3I
__
A generalized slopedeflection equation.
As there is no applied loading on the beam, therefore, all fixed end moment terms in the slope
deflection equation will be equal to zero.
Step 2: CALCULATION OF R AND
2EI
TERMS FOR VARIOUS SPANS
L
Span AB :
R=+
0.015
= + 3.75 103 rad.
4
2EI 2(200 106 ) (2 400 106 )

=
= 80,000 KNm
L
4
Span BC :
R=
0.015
= 3 103 rad.
5
2EI 2(200 106 )(4 400 106)

=
= 128,000 KNm
L
5
Span CD :
R=0
rad.
(Both points C and D are at the same level)
2EI 2(200 106 )(3 400 106 )

=
= 120,000 KNm
L
4
230
Step 3: SLOPEDEFLECTION EQUATIONS :

2EI
Putting
and 3R values, we have.
L
Mab = 80,000 ( 2a b 11.25 103 )
Mba = 80,000 ( 2 b a + 11.25 103 )
Mbc = 128,000 ( 2 b c 9 103 )
Mcb = 128,000 ( 2 c b 9 103 )
Mcd = 120,000 ( 2 c d)
Mdc = 120,000 ( 2 d c )
Joint A ; Mab = 0
(Pin support)
Joint B ; Mba + Mbc = 0
Joint C ; Mcb + Mcd = 0
Joint D ; Mdc = 0
(Pin support)

Putting joint conditions in Slope deflection equation, we have
(Mab = 0)
160,000 a 80,000 b + 900 = 0
(1)
(Mba + Mbc = 0)
160,000 b 80,000 a + 900 256,000 b 128,000 c 1152 = 0
80,000 a 416,000 b 128,000 c252=0
(2)
(Mcb + Mcd = 0)
256,000 c 128,000 b 1152 240,000 c 120,000 d = 0
128,000 b 496,000 c 120,000 d 1152=0
(Mdc = 0)
240,000 d 120,000 c = 0
120,000 c 240,000 d = 0
Re-writing
160,000 a 80,000 b + 0 + 0 + 900 = 0
(1)
80,000 a 416.000 b 128,000 c + 0 252 = 0
(2)
0
128,000 b 496,000 c120,000 d1152 = 0 (3)
0
+
0
120,000 c 240,000 d + 0 = 0 (4)
From (1)
From (4)
900 80000 b
160000
120000 c
d =
240000
d = 0.5 c
a =
(5)
(6)
(3)
(4)
231
Put (5) in (2)

80,000
900 80000 b
160000
416,000 b 128,000 c 252 =0
50 + 40,000 b 416,000 b 128,000 c252 = 0

376,000 b 128,000 c 702 = 0
Put (6) in (3)
(7)
128,000 b 496,000 c 120,000 ( 0.5 c) 1152 = 0

128,000 b 436,000 c 1152 = 0
(8)
From (7)
702 128000 c
376000
b =
(9)
Put b from equation (9) in (8), we have.

128,000
702 128000 c
376000
436,000 c 1152 = 0
238.98 + 43574.47 c 436,000 c 1152 = 0

392,425.53 c 913.02 = 0
c = 2.327 103
radians.
702 + 128000 2.327 103

376000
from (9) b =
b = 1.075 103 rad. Now calculate other rotations from equations.

900 + 80000 1.075 103
160000
from (5) a =
a = + 6.162 103 rad.

from (6)
d = 0.5 ( 2.327 103)
d = + 1.164 103 rad.
Final values of end rotations are:
a = + 6.162 103 rad.
b = 1.075 103 rad.
c = 2.327 103 rad.
d = + 1.164 103 rad.
232
Step 6: END MOMENTS :

Putting values of rotations in slope-deflection equations.
Mab = 80,000 ( 2 6.162 103 +1.075 103+11.25 103 = 0 KN-m
Mba = 80,000(+2 1.075 103 6.162 103+11.25 103 ) = +579 KN-m
Mbc = 128,000 (+2 1.075 103 +2.327 103 9 103 ) = 579 KN-m
Mcb = 128,000 (+2 2.327 103 +1.075 103 9 103 ) = 419 KN-m
Mcd = 120,000 (+2 2.327 103 1.164 103 ) = + 419 KN-m
Mdc = 120,000 (2 1.164 103 + 2.327 103 ) = 0 KN-m
4m
579
579
419 419
5m
-144.75 -199.6
+144.75
144.75KN
304.35 KN
344.35KN
5m
4m
144.75
+
-104.75
Reaction due to
end moments
104.75KN Final reaction
D
304.35KN
144.75KN
1m
4m
+199.6 +104.75
344.35 KN
104.75KN
4m
104.75
+
144.75
104.75
+
0 S.F.D. (KN)
199.6
579
199.6
+
+
0
X=2.9m
Near B : Span BC
Let it be at X from B.
MX = 579 199.6 X = 0
X = 2.9 m
419
B.M.D. (KN-m)
233
4.5. APPLICATION TO FRAMES (WITHOUT SIDE SWAY):

Centre line
Lateral Loads
(i) side sway present
Unsymmeterical
Load
(Side sway Present)
(ii)
2I
2I
Load is symmetrical and

I is same but support conditions
are different (side sway present)
The side sway (relative displacement of two ends of a column) or the horizontal movement of the
structure may become obvious once the structure and the loading is inspected in terms of inertia, E values and
support conditions etc. However, following are the rules and guide lines which may be followed for deciding
whether side sway is present or not.
4.6.
(1)
In case of symmetrical frames subjected to symmetrical loading, the side sway may
be neglected for columns having equal inertia values if support conditions are same.
(2)
If a force is applied in horizontal direction to a symmetrical frame where no arrangement

exists for preventing horizontal movement, the side sway must be considered.(with
reference to all these diagrams).
(3)
An unsymmetrical frame subjected to symmetrical loading might be considered to have

side sway.
UNSYMMETRICAL FRAME :
An unsymmetrical frame is that which has columns of unequal lengths and different end conditions
and moment of inertia the load may be symmetrical or unsymmetrical.
4.7.
STIFFNESS :
Stiffness can be defined as the resistance towards deformation which is a material, sectional and
support parameter. More is the stiffness, less is the deformation & vice versa. Stiffness attracts loads /
stresses.
The stiffness is of various types :
(1)
Axial stiffness (AE).
(2)
Flexural stiffness (EI).
(3)
Shear stiffness (AG).
(4)
Torsional stiffness (GJ).
234
EXAMPLE NO. 8: Analyze the rigid frame shown by slopedeflection method.

10KN
2m
2KN/m
3m
B
3I
2I
4m
2I
3m
D
SOLUTION : Examining loads and support conditions, horizontal moment is not possible.
Step 1: Relative Stiffness :
Member
AB
BC
BD
I
L
Krel.
3
30
5
2
30
4
2
30
3
18
15
20
Step 2: Fixed End Moments :

A
2m
10KN
3m
2KN/m
C
B
4m
Mfab = 10 32 2/52 = 7.2 KNm ,
Mfba = 10 22 3/52 = 4.8 KN-m
Mfbc = 2 42/12 = 2.67 KN-m,
Mfcb = 2.67 KN-m
Mfdb = Mfdb = 0 (There is no load acting within member BD)

Step 3: Generalized Slope deflection Equation :
Put values of fixed end moments.
Mab = 7.2 + 18(2 a b) = 7.2 36 a 18 b
Mba = 4.8 + 18 ( 2 b a)= 4.8 36 b 18 a.
Mbc = 2.67 + 15 ( 2 b c) = 2.67 30 b 15 c.
Mcb = 2.67 + 15 (2 c b) = 2.67 30 c 15 b
Mbd = 0 + 20 ( 2 b d) = 40 b 20 d
Mdb = 0 + 20 ( 2 d b) = 40 d 20 b.
Step 4: Joint Conditions:

Joint A : a = 0
(Being fixed end)
Joint B : Mba + Mbc + Mbd = 0
(1)
Joint C : Mcb = 0
(Pin end)
(2)
Joint D : d = 0
(Fixed end)
235
Continuous joint
Step 5: Simultaneous equations

Putting above joint conditions in slope deflection equations, we have.
4.836 b 18 a+2.67 30 b 15 c 40b20 d = 0
Mba + Mbc + Mbd = 0
Put d = 0 and a = 0.
(1)
4.8 36 b 0 + 2.67 30 b 15 c 40b 0 = 0

106 b 15 c 2.13 = 0
(Mcb = 0)
2.67 30 c 15 b = 0
15 b 30 c 2.67 = 0
106 b 15 c 2.13 = 0
(1)
15 b 30 c 2.67
(2)
Multiply (1) by 2 and subtract (2) from (1)
212 b 30 c 4..26 = 0
15 b 30 c 2.67 = 0
197 b 1.59 = 0
b = 8.07 103 rad.
From
(1) 106 ( 8.07 103 ) 15 c 2.13 = 0

c = 84.96 103 rad.
a = 0 rad.
b = 8.07 103 rad.
c = 84.96 103 rad.
d = 0 rad.
Step 6: End moments.

Putting values of FEM and rotations in slope-deflection equations.
Mab = 7.2 36 (0) 18(8.07 103 )= + 7.345 KNm
Mba = 4.8 36( 8.07 103 ) 18 (0) = 4.509 KNm
Mbc = 2.6730(8.07103 )15 (84.96 103 ) = + 4.187 KNm
Mcb = 2.67 30 (84.96 103 ) 15 ( 8.07 103 ) = 0
Mbd = 40(8.07 103 ) 20 (0) = + 0.323 KNm
Mdb = 40(0) 20 (8.07 103 ) = + 0.161 KNm
(1)
(2)
(2)
236
Draw SFD , BMD and sketch elastic curve.
0.16
10KN
7.345
A 2m
3m
+6
2 KN/m
4.509 4.187
8.48
4m
+4
+4
+4
0.33
+0.57
6.57
-0.57
+1.05 -1.05
B
3.44
0.16 5.05
2.95
3m
0.16
D
0.161
8.48
10KN
A 2m
2KN/m
4.187KN-m
B
C
4m
2.96KN
5.05KN
3m
6.57KN
3.43KN
Vx=2.96-2X=0
x=2.96-2x=0
Mx=2.96x1.48
-1.48
=2.190W-m
6.57
+
3.43
0.323
B.M.D. (KN-m)
+
0
0.16
+
0 S.F.D. (KN)
0.161
X=1m
0.16KN
7.34
0.323KN-m
D
0.16KN
B.M.D. (KN-m)
1.48
X=
S.F.D. (KN)
+
0
-
Point of contraflexure
X=1.12M Mx=2.96x-x=0
5.795
X(2.96-X)=0
X=1.31m
Mx=4.509x3.43Either
x=0
+
+
0
0
4.509
4.187
X=1.31m
0.161KN-m
B
3m
X=1.12m
5.04
+
0
3.43
0.16
6.57
S.F.D. (KN)
0
4.509 KN-m
7.345KN
2.96
2.190
+
X
=2.96m
B.M.D. (KN-m)
+
0
237
6.57
5.04
+
0.16
B
0.43
3.43
2.96
S.F.D.
5.795
2.19
0.523 B
-
+
A
4.5
4.187
7.345
B.M.D.
1
D
ELASTIC CURVE
EXAMPLE NO. 9: Analyze the rigid frame shown by slopedeflection method

10KN
B
2I
2m
1.5m
5KN
2I
1.5m
A
2m
3I
238
SOLUTION:
Inspecting loads and support conditions, horizontal displacement is not possible.

Member
AB
BC
I
L
2
12
3
3
12
4

Mfab =
5 1.52 1.5
= + 1.875 KNm
32
Mfba = 1.875 KNm

Mfbc =
10 22 2
= + 5 KNm
42
Mfcb = 5 KNm
Step 3: Generalized Slopedeflection Equations :
Put values of fixed end moments and Krel.
Mab = 1.875 + 8 ( 2 a b)
Mba = 1.875 + 8 ( 2 b a )
Mbc = 5 + 9 ( 2 b c)
Mcb = 5 + 9 ( 2 c b)
Joint A : a = 0
Being fixed End.
Joint B : Mba + Mbc = 0 Continuous end.

Joint C : c = 0
Being fixed End.

Put a = c = 0 in the joint condition at B.
Mba + Mbc = 0
1.875 16 b 0 + 5 18 b 0 = 0
3.125 34 b = 0
b = + 0.092
a = 0
c = 0
radians.
Krel.
8
9
239
Step 6: End moments.

Put values of rotations in slope-deflection equations.
Mab = 1.875 + 8 (0 0.092) = + 1.140 KNm
Mba = 1.875 + 8 ( 2 x 0.092 0 ) = 3.346 KNm
Mbc = 5 + 9 ( 2 x 0.092 0 ) = + 3.346 KNm
Mcb = 5 + 9 ( 0 0.092) = 5.827 KNm
Now draw SFD , BMD and sketch elastic curve. Doing it by-parts for each member.
5.827
10KN
3.346
3.235
2m
2m
3.235
+5
+5
+0.620
5.62 KN
-0.620
4.380 KN
4.38
3.346
1.5m
+2.5
+0.735
3.235 KN
5KN
1.5m
1.140
+2.5
-0.735
1.765 KN
4.38
SHEAR FORCE AND B.M. DIAGRAMS

3.346KN-m
2m
B
4.380KN
4.38
4.38
Mx=3.346
+4.38X=0
X=0.764m
10KN 5.827KN-m
1.14KN.m 5KN
3.346KN-m
2m
1.5m
1.5m
A
B
C
1.765KN
5.62KN
3.235KN
0
5.62
Mx=5.62X
-5.827=0
X=1.037m
S.F.D. 0
1.765
+
0
S.F.D.
3.235
5.62
5.414
/
0
3.346
1.508
X=0.764m X =1.037m
+
0
0
1.14
0
B.M.D.
3.346
240
S.F.D
BMD
4.38
5.414
+
B
1
3.235
+
1
5.62
3.346
5.827
3.346
Elastic Curve
1.508
+
1.765 A
1.14
4.8. FRAMES WITH SIDE SWAY SINGLE STOREY FRAMES :

For columns of unequal heights, R would be calculated as follows:
B
Rab =
Rcd =
L1
2I
L3
L2
I Rcd
4I
P
L2
Rab
L1
Hd
HA
To show the application to frames with sidesway, let us solve examples.

5KN
B
2m
5m
4I
3m I
I 3m
241
SOLUTION:
I
I
L
Krel.
AB
1
21
3
BC
4
21
7
12
CD
1
21
3
Member
Step 2: Relative Values of R :
Rab = Rcd = = Rrel

or R (columns are of 3m length)
3
Mab = Mfab + Krelab ( 2 a b + Rrel)
Mba = Mfba + Krelab ( 2 b a + Rrel)
Other expressions can be written on similar lines.
NOTE : In case of side sway, R values are obtained for columns only because the columns are supposed
to prevent (resist) side sway not beams.
Mfbc =
5 52 2
= 5.10 KNm
72
Mfcb =
5 22 5
= 2.04 KNm
72
All other F.E.M. are zero because there are no loads on other Spans.
i.e.
&
Mfab = Mfba = 0
Mfcd = Mfdc = 0
Step 4: Slope deflection Equations :

Mab = 0 + 7 ( 2a b + R)
Mba = 0 + 7 ( 2 b a + R)
Mbc = 5.1 + 12 ( 2 b c)
Mcb = 2.04 + 12 ( 2 c b)
Mcd = 0 + 7 ( 2 c d + R)
Mdc = 0 + 7 ( 2 d c + R)
Putting values of FEMs while R will now appear as unknown.
242

Joint A : a = 0
Joint B : Mba + Mbc = 0
Joint C : Mcb + Mcd = 0
Joint D : d = 0
Step 6: Shear Conditions :
(Fixed joint)
(Continuous joint)
(Continuous joint)
(Fixed joint)
Mba
Mcd
C
3m
A
Fx=0
Ha + Hd = 0
(1)
(2)
3m
Ha =
Mab
Mab + Mba
3
Hd =
Mdc
Mdc + Mcd
3
NOTE: Shear forces are in agreement with direction of . The couple constituted by shears is balanced by
the direction of end moments. (Reactive horizontal forces constitute a couple in opposite direction to that of
end momens).
Fx = 0
Ha + Hd = 0
Write in terms of moments.
Mab + Mba + Mdc + Mcd = 0
(3)
Apply equations (1), (2) & (3) and solve for b, c & R. Equation (3) is also called shear condition.
Put a and d equal to zero in joint conditions for B and C in terms of end moments.
Mba + Mbc = 0
so
14 b + 7 R + 5.1 24 b 12 c = 0
Mcb + Mcd = 0
(1)
38 b 12 c + 7 R + 5.1 = 0
2.04 24 c 12 b 14 c + 7 R = 0
or
12 b 38 c + 7 R 2.04 = 0
(2)
Mab + Mba + Mdc + Mcd = 0

7 b + 7 R 14 b + 7 R 7 c + 7 R 14 c + 7R=0
or
21 b 21 c + 28 R = 0
3 b 3 c + 4 R = 0
(3)
re-writing the equations again.

38 b 12 c + 7 R + 5.1 = 0
(1)
12 b 38 c + 7 R 2.04 = 0
(2)
3 b 3 c + 4 R = 0
(3)
243
Subtract (2) from (1)

38 b 12 c + 7 R + 5.1 = 0
12 b 38 c + 7 R 2.04 = 0
26 b + 26 c + 7.14 = 0
(4)
Multiply (2) by 4 & (3) by 7 & subtract (3) from (2)
From (4)
48 b 152 c + 28 R 8.16 = 0
(2)
21 b 21 c 28 R = 0
27 b 131 c 8.16 = 0
(3)
(5)
26 c + 7.14
put in ( 5)
26
26 c + 7.14
27
131 c 8.16 = 0
26
27 c 7.415 131 c 8.16 = 0
b =
and solve for c

(6)
158 c 15.575 = 0
c = 0.0986 rad.
From (6), b =
26 0.0986 + 7.14
26
b = + 0.1760
rad.
From (1)
38 (0.1760) 12 (0.0986)+7R+5.1 = 0
R = + 0.0580
So finally, we have.
a = 0
b = + 0.1760
c = 0.0986
d = 0
R = + 0.0580
END MOMENTS :
Putting above values of rotations and R in slope deflection equations, we have.
Mab = 7 (0 0.176 + 0.058) = 0.826 KNm
Mba = 7 ( 2 0.176 0 + 0.058) = 2.059 KNm
Mbc = 5.1 + 12 ( 2 0.176 + 0.0986) = + 2.059 KNm
Mcb = 2.04 + 12 (+ 2 0.0986 0.176) = 1.786 KNm
Mcd = 7 (+ 2 0.0986 0 + 0.058) = + 1.786 KNm
Mdc = 7 ( 0 + 0.0986 + 0.058) = + 1.096 KNm
Draw SFD , BMD and sketch elastic curve.
244
SHEAR FORCE & B.M. DIAGRAMS : By Parts

5KN
2.059
0.962
3.61
2m
1.786
C 0.962
5m
+3.571
+0.039
3.61
2.059
B
+1.429
-0.039
1.39
1.39
1.786
C
+0.962
+0.961
3m
3m
-0.962
1.096
0.826
D
1.39
3.6
5KN
2.059KN-m
2m
1.786KN-m
C
5m
3.61KN
1.39KN
3.61
Mx=-2.059
+3.61X=0
X=0.57m
Mx=-1.786
/
+1.39X =0
/
X =1.28m
3.61
+
S.F.D.
1.39
1.39
0.962
5.161
X=0.57m
X=1.28m
+
B.M.D.
0.826
+
0.962
0.962 KN
0.962 KN
B
3m
A
2.059KN-m
2.059
X=0.86m
Mx=0.826-0.962X=0
X=0.86 m
1.786
2.059
0.826 kN-m
0.862
0 B.M.D.
0 B.M.D.
1.096
1.786
+
0.961
3m
0.961KN
C
1.786KN-m
0.961
0.961KN
1.096KN-m
D
245
Super impositing member SFDs and BMDs.

5.161
2.059
B
3.61
+
B
0.962
1.786
C
1.786
1
2.059
0.961
S.F.D.
B.M.D.
1
+
0.862 +
0.962
A
SFD
+
D 1.096
BMD
ELASTIC CURVE:-
246
20 KN
B
2m
2I
5m
2I
3m
I 5m
E
D
F
7m
7m
SOLUTION:
Mfbc =
20 22 5
= + 18.16 KNm
72
Mfcb =
20 52 2
= 20.41 KNm
72
Mfad = Mfda = 0
Mfbe = Mfeb = 0
Mfab = Mfba = 0
Mfcf = Mffc = 0
|
|
|
|
As there are no loads on these spans.
Step 2: RELATIVE STIFFNESS:

Member
I
L
Krel.
AB
2
105
7
30
BC
2
105
7
30
AD
1
105
5
21
BE
1
105
3
35
CF
1
105
5
21
247
Step 3: RELATIVE VALUES OF R :
Rrel.
AB
BC
AD
BE
CF
Member
15
5
15
3
15
5
3R
5R
3R
Step 4: SLOPEDEFLECTION EQUATIONS :

Putting the values of fixed end moments.
Mab = 0 + 30 ( 2 a b) = 60 a 30 b
Mba = 0 + 30 ( 2 b a) = 60 b 30 a
Mbc = 8.16 + 30 ( 2 b c) = 8.16 60 b 30 c
Mcb = 20.41 + 30( 2 c b) = 20.4160 c30 b
Mad = 0 + 21 ( 2 a d + 3 R) = 42 a + 63 R
Mda = 0 + 21 ( 2 d a + 3 R) = 21 a + 63 R
Mbe = 0 + 35 ( 2 b e + 5 R) = 70 b + 175 R
Meb = 0 + 35 ( 2 e b + 5 R) = 35 b + 175 R
Mcf = 0 + 21 ( 2 c f + 3 R) = 42 c + 63 R
Mfc = 0 + 21 ( 2 f c + 3 R) = 21 c + 63 R
Joint A : Mad + Mab = 0
(Continuous joint)
(1)
Joint B : Mba + Mbc + Mbe = 0
(Continuous joint)
(2)
Joint C : Mcb + Mcf = 0
(Continuous joint)
(3)
Joint D : d = 0
(Fixed end)
Joint E : e = 0
(Fixed end)
Joint F : f = 0
(Fixed end)
248
Step 6: SHEAR CONDITIONS :

Mad
Mcf
C
Mbe
B
3m
5m
5m
E Meb
Meb+Mbe
He=
3
Mda+Mad
F
Hd=
5
Mda
FX = 0
Hd + He + Hf = 0,
Hf=
Mfc+Mcf
5
Mfc
Now put Hd, He and Hf in terms of end moments. We have
Mda + Mad Meb + Mbe Mfc + Mcf

+
+
=0
5
3
5
or
3 Mda + 3 Mad + 5 Meb + 5 Mbe + 3 Mfc + 3 Mcf = 0
(4)

Putting end conditions in above four equations. We have
(Mad + Mab = 0)
so
42 a + 63 R 60 a 30 b = 0
102 a 30 b + 63 R = 0
(1)
Mba + Mbc + Mbe = 0

so
60 b 30 a + 8.16 60 b 30 c 70 b + 175 R = 0
30 a 190 b 30 c + 175 R + 8.16 = 0
so
(2)
Mcb + Mcf = 0
20.41 60 c 30 b 42 c + 63 R = 0
30 b 102 c + 63 R 20.41 = 0
(3)
3Mda + 3Mad + 5Meb + 5Mbe + 3Mfc + 3Mcf = 0

so, 3(21 a+63 R)+3(42 a+63 R) +5(35 b+175 R 70 b+175 R) +3(21 c+63 R 42 c+63 R)=0
63 a + 189 R 126 a + 189 R 175 b + 875 R 350b + 875 R 63 c + 189 R 126 c + 189 R = 0
189 a 525 b 189 c + 2506 R = 0
(4)
(not a necessary step). Writing in a matrix form to show that slope-deflection method is a stiffness method.
We get a symmetric matrix about leading diagonal.
102 a 30 b + 0
=0
30 a 190 b 30 c + 175 R + 8.16
=0
+ 63 R +
30 b 102c + 63 R 20.41 = 0
249
189 a 525 b 189c + 2506 R
=0
102 a 30b + 63 R
30a 190b 30c + 175 R + 8.116
30b 102c + 63 R 20.41
189a 525b 189c + 2506 R
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
=0
=0
=0
=0
Solve the above equations, find end moments and hence draw, S.F, B.M, elastic curse diagrams.
Solving aboving 4 equations, following values, are obtained.
a = 0.024924, b = 0.0806095, c = 0.225801, R = 0.00196765.( use programmable calculator or
Gausian elimination)
Putting these values in step 4, nodal moments may be calculated as follows:
Mab = 0 + 30 (2a b) = 60a 30b
= 60(0.024924) 30 (0.0806095)
= 0.923 KN-m.
Mba = 60b 30a = 60(.0806095) 30(0.024924) = 4.089 KN-m.
Mbc = 8.1660 (.0806095) 30 (0.225801) = 10.097 KN-m.
Mcb = 20.41 60 (.225801) 30 (0.0806095) = 0.928 KN-m.
Mad = 42 (.024924) +63 (.00196765) = 0.923 KN-m.
Mda = 21(.024924) +63 (.00196765) = 0.3994 KN-m.
Mbe = 70 (.0806095) +175 (.00196765) = 5.987 KN-m.
Meb = 35(0.0806095) + 175 (.00196765) = 3.166 KN-m.
Mef = 42(0.225801) +63 (.001968) = 9.60 KN-m.
Mfc = 21 (0.2258) +63 (.00197) = 4.12 KN-m.
SFD, BMD and elastic curve can be sketched now as usual.
4.9. DOUBLE STOREYED FRAMES WITH SIDE SWAY( GENERALIZED TREATMENT)
FOR R VALUES.
1
P1 C
L1
HE
Hb
1
P2
B 2
L1
1
L2
F
Rbc = Red =
2
L2
If L1 = L3
2
Rab =
L2
1 2
L1
Rab =
Then
Ha
Ref =
2
L3
Ref =
2
L1
HF
L3
250
4.9.1. SHEAR CONDITIONS FOR UPPER STOREY :

Mcb
P1
Mde
L1
L1
Hb
B
Hb=
Mbc
FX = 0
Mbc+Mcb
L1
He
E
He=
Med+Mde
L1
Med
P1-Hb-He=0
Hb and He can be written in terms of end moments as above. Applied load upto Section-1-1.
4.9.2. SHEAR CONDITIONS FOR LOWER STOREY :

Mba
P2
Mef
E
L2
(P1 + P2) - Ha - Hf=0 A
L3
Ha=
Mba+Mab
L2
HF=
Mef+Mfe
L3
Mfe
Mab
FX = 0
Applied shear is to be considered upto Section 2-2. To demonstrate the
application, let us solve the following question.
EXAMPLE NO. 12:- Analyze the following frame by slope deflection method. Consider:
I = 500 106m4 ,
E = 200 106 KN/m2
It is a double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads.
24KN/m
D
10KN
6m 2I
5I
24KN/m
2I
2
B
2
8m
5I
2I
2I
6m
F
A
8m
251
SOLUTION :
Step 1: Relative Stiffness:
I
I
L
Krel
AB
2
24
8
BC
2
24
6
CD
5
24
8
15
DE
2
24
6
EF
2
24
6
BE
5
24
8
15
Member
Step 2: Relative Values of R.

For upper story columns
1 2
Rbc = Rde =
= R1
6
Rab =
2
24
8
Ref =
(Say)
2
24
6
(say)
Ref = 4 R2
(Say)
Rab = 3 R 2
Because lower story columns have different heights.
Step 3: F.E.M :
F.E.M.s are induced in beams only as no loads act within column heights.
Mfbe = Mfcd =
24 82
= + 128 KNm
12
Mfeb = Mfdc = 128 KNm

Step 4: Slope Deflection Equations : Put values of FEMs and R Values for columns.
MAB = 0 + 6 ( 2a b + 3 R2)
MBA = 0 + 6 ( 2b ac + 3 R2)
MBC = 0 + 8 (2b c + R1)
252

MCB = 0 + 8 (2c b + R1)
MCD = 128 + 15 ( 2c d )
MDC = 128 + 15 ( 2d c)
MDE = 0 + 8 ( 2d e + R1)
MED = 0 + 8 ( 2e d + R1)
MEF = 0 + 8 ( 2e f + 4R2 )
MFE = 0 + 8 ( 2f e + 4R2 )
MBE = 128 + 15 ( 2b e)
MEB = 128 + 15 ( 2e b)
Joint A: a = 0
(Fixed joint)
Joint B: MBA + MBC + MBE = 0
(1)
Joint C: MCB + MCD = 0
(2)
Joint D: MDC + MDE = 0
(3)
Joint E: MED + MEB + MEF = 0
(4)
Joint F: f = 0
(Fixed joint)
Step 6: Shear Conditions :

For Upper Storey :
MCB
10
M DE
D
Hc
6m
B
HB =
Hd
6m
M BC
Hb
MBC+MCB
6
E
HE =
M ED
He
MED+MDE
6
FX = 0, 10 Hb He =0 putting values of Hb and He interms of end moments and simplifying, we get.

(5)
60 MBC MCB MED MDE = 0
253
For Lower Storey.

M BA
B
M EF
Hb
8m
6m
Ha
A
HA =
He
MAB
M AB+MBA
8
Hf
F
HF =
MFE
MFE+MEF
6
FX = 0, 10 Ha Hf = 0
Putting the values of Ha and Hf in terms of end moments and simplifying, we get.
(6)
480 6 MAB 6 MBA 8 MFE 8 MEF = 0
Now we have got six equations and Six unknowns. (b, c, d, e, R1, R2)
Putting joint conditions in slope deflection equations we have.
Mba + Mbc + Mbe = 0, 12B+18 R2 16B 8C+8R1+128 30B 15E = 0
(1)
or
58B 8 C 15E + 8R1 + 18R2 + 128 = 0
Mcb + Mcd = 0
16C 8B + 8R1 + 128 30C 15D = 0
(2)
or
8B 46C 15D + 8R1 + 128 = 0
Mdc + Mde = 0
128 30D 15C 16D 8E + 8 R1 = 0
(3)
or
15C 46D 8E + 8 R1 128 = 0
Med + Meb + Mef = 0
16E 8D + 8 R1 128 30E 15B 16E + 32R2 = 0
(4)
or
15B 8D 62E + 8 R1 + 32R2 128 = 0
Putting expressions of end moments in equations 5 and 6 , we have.
or
or
60 (16B8C + 8 R1 16C 8B + 8R1) ( 16E 8D + 8R1 16D 8E + 8R1) = 0

60 + 16B + 8C 8R1 + 16C + 8B 8 R1 + 16E + 8D 8R1 + 16D + 8E 8R1 = 0
(5)
24B + 24C + 24D + 24E 32R1 + 60 = 0
480 6( 6B + 18R2 12B + 18R2) 8(16E + 32R2 8E + 32R2) = 0

or
480 + 108B 216 R2 + 192 E 512 R2 = 0
(6)
or
108 B + 192 E 728 R2 + 480 = 0
Solving above six equations, we have.
b=2.721 rad, c=3.933 rad, d= 3.225 rad, e= 1.545 rad, R1=3.289 rad, R2=0.656 rad.
Putting these in slope deflection equations, the values of end moments are.
Mab= 4.518, Mba= 20.844, Mbc= 48.688. Mcb= 58.384, Mcd=58.384, Mdc=90.245, Mde=90.272,
Med= 76.816, Mef=45.696, Mfe=33.344 , Mbe= 69.53, Meb = 122.495 KN-m
Now SFD, BMD and elastic curve can be sketched as usual.
254
SOLUTION:
It is a double storey frame carrying gravity loads only. Because of difference in column
heights, it has become an unsymmetrical frame.
3 KN/m
C
5I
4m 2I
3 KN/m
2
2I 4m
E
5I
2I
4m
2I
5m
A
5m
Step 1: RELATIVE STIFFNESS.

I
I
L
Krel
AB
4
10
5
BC
2
10
4
CD
5
10
5
10
DE
2
10
4
Ef
2
10
4
BE
5
10
5
10
Member
Step 2: F.E.M :
F.E.Ms. are induced in beams only as they carry u.d.l. No loads act within column
heights.
Mfbe = Mfcd =
3 25
= + 6.25 KNm
12
Mfeb = Mfdc = 6.25 KNm.
255
Step 3: RELATIVE VALUES OF R :
Member
AB
2
20
5
4 R2
BC
(12)
1 2
4
R1
CD
DE
(12)
1 2
4
R1
EF
2
20
4
5 R2
BE
Krel
0
1 2
2 terms have been arbitrarily multiplied by 20 while
has been taken equal to R1.
4
Step 4: SLOPE DEFLECTION EQUATIONS :
By putting FEMs and Krel Values.
Mab = 0 + 8 ( 2 a b + 4 R2) = 8 b + 32 R2
Mba = 0 + 8 ( 2 b a + 4 R2) = 16 b + 32 R2
Mbc = 0 + 5 ( 2 b c + R1) = 10 b 5 c + 5 R1
Mcb = 0 + 5 ( 2 c b + R1) = 10 c 5 b + 5 R1
Mcd = 6.25 + 10 ( 2 c d) = 6.25 20 c 10 d
Mdc = 6.25 + 10 ( 2 d c) = 6.25 20 d 10 c
Mde = 0 + 5 ( 2 d e + R1) = 10 d 5 e + 5 R1
Med = 0 + 5 ( 2 e d + R1) = 10 e 5 d + 5 R1
Mef = 0 + 5 ( 2 e f + 5 R2) = 10 e + 25 R2
Mfe = 0 + 5 ( 2 f e + 5 R2) = 5 e + 25 R2
Mbe = 6.25 + 10 ( 2 b e) = 6.25 20 b 10 e
Meb = 6.25 + 10 ( 2 e b) = 6.25 20 e 10 b
Joint A : a = 0
(Fixed joint)
Joint B : Mba + Mbc + Mbe = 0
(1)
256
Joint C : Mcb + Mcd = 0
(2)
Joint D : Mdc + Mde = 0
(3)
Joint E : Med + Meb + Mef = 0
(4)
Joint F : f = 0
(Fixed joint)
Step 6: SHEAR CONDITIONS :
Upper Storey
Mde
Mcb
Hc
Hd
4m
4m
Hb
E He
Mbc
Mbc+Mcb
Hb=
4
Med+Mde
He=
4
Med
FX = 0, Hb + He = 0 , Now putting their values
Mbc + Mcb + Med + Mde = 0

4
4
(5)
Simplify
(5)

MEF
MBA
4m
5m
F
A
HF
HA
MFE
MAB
Shear Condition: Lower Storey.

FX = 0, Ha + Hf = 0
Ha =
Mab + Mba
Mfe+Mef
5
, Hf = 4
4 (Mab + Mba) + 5 (Mfe + Mef) = 0
Simplify
(6)
257

Putting joint and shear conditions in above six equations and simplify.
or
or
or
or
or
or
Mba + Mbc + Mbe = 0

16 b + 32 R2 10 b 5 c +5 R1 + 6.25 20 b10e = 0
(1)
46 b 5 c 10 e + 5 R1 + 32 R2 + 6.25 = 0
Mcb + Mcd = 0
10 c 5 b + 5 R1 + 6.25 20 c 10 d = 0
(2)
5 b 30 c 10 d + 5 R1 + 6.25 = 0
Mdc + Mde = 0
6.25 5 d 10 c 10 d 5 e + 5 R1 = 0
(3)
10 c 30 d 5 e + 5 R1 6.25 = 0
Med + Mcb + Mef = 0
10 e 5 d + 5 R1 6.2520 e10 b10 e + 25 R2 = 0
(4)
10 b 5 d 40 e + 5 R1 + 25 R2 6.25 = 0
10 b 5 c + 5 R1 10 c 5 b + 5 R1 10 d
5 e + 5 R1 10 e 5 d + 5 R1 = 0
(5)
15 b 15 c 15 d 15 e + 20 R1 = 0
4(Mab + Mba) + 5 (Mfe + Mef) = 0
4 (8 b + 32 R2 16 b + 32 R2 ) +5(10 e + 25 R2 5 e + 25 R2) = 0
(6)
96 b 75 e + 506 R2 = 0
Solving above six equations (by programmable calculator) we have.
b=0.141,
c=0.275,
d= 0.276,
e= 0.156,
R1=0.01224,
By Putting these in slope deflection equations, the values of end moments are.
R2=0.003613.
Mab = 1.012, Mba = 2.14, Mbc = 2.846, Mcb = 3.5162, Mcd = 3.51, Mdc = 3.48, Mde = 3.52,
Med = 2.8788, Mef = 1.65, Mfe = 0.87, Mbe = 4.99, Meb = 4.54
Now SFD, BMD and elastic curve can be sketched as usual.
258
CHAPTER FIVE
5. THE MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD
5.1. Introduction :
Professor Hardy Cross of University of Illinois of U.S.A. invented this method in 1930. However,
the method was well-established by the end of 1934 as a result of several research publications which
appeared in the Journals of American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). In some books, the momentdistribution method is also referred to as a Hardy Cross method or simply a Cross method.
The moment-distribution method can be used to analyze all types of statically indeterminate
beams or rigid frames. Essentially it consists in solving the linear simultaneous equations that were
obtained in the slope-deflection method by successive approximations or moment distribution. Increased
number of cycles would result in more accuracy. However, for all academic purposes, three cycles may be
considered sufficient.
In order to develop the method, it will be helpful to consider the following problem. A propped
cantilever subjected to end moments.
Ma
A
B M
b
EI = Constt,
aa = rotation at end A due

to moment at A.
Ma
A
Ma
EI
B B.D.S. under redundant Ma,
aa
ba
MaL
2EI
Ma Diagram Over Conjugate - beam

EI
+
0
ba = rotation at B due
to moment at A.
+
bb
ab
0
MbL
2EI
Mb
B
B.D.S. under redundant Mb, ab = rotation at A due
0
to moment at B.
Mb
Mb
bb = rotation at B due
Diagram Over Conjugate - beam
EI
EI
to moment at B.
Note: Counterclockwise moment are considered (+ve)

Geometry requirement at B :
b = 0,
or
ba bb = 0 and
(1) b = ba bb =0 (Slope at B).
Now calculate all rotations shown in diagram by using conjugate beam method.
MaL 2 L
2EI 3
aa =
( By conjugate beam theorem)
L
MaL
aa =
3EI
THE MOMENT __ DISTRIBUTION METHOD
MbL L
2EI 3
ab =
ab =
MbL
6EI
MaL L
2EI 3
ba =
ba =
259
MaL
6EI
bb =
bb =
MbL 2L
2EI 3
L
MbL
3EI
Put ba & bb in (1)

MaL
MbL
=
6EI
3EI
or
Mb =
Ma
2
(3)
If Ma is applied at A, then Ma/2 will be transmitted to the far end B.

Also, a = aa ab Geometry requirement at A.
(2)
Put values of aa and ab, we have,
Ma.L Mb.L
aa =
3EI
6EI
=
or
Ma.L Ma.L
3EI
12EI
aa =
3 Ma.L
12EI
aa =
Ma.L
.
4EI
Ma
for above)
2
(by putting Mb =
It can be written as
aa = Ma
L
4EI
or
Ma =
4EI aa
L
(4)
260
5.2. STIFFNESS FACTOR : The term 4EI/L is called the stiffness factor stiffness factor is defined as
the moment required to be applied at A to produce unit rotation at point A of the propped cantilever beam
shown.
5.3. CARRY-OVER FACTOR: The constant (1/2) in equation 3 is called the carry-over factor.
Ma
Mb =
2
Mb 1
=
Ma 2
Carry-over factor is the ratio of the moment induced at the far end to the moment applied at near end for a
propped cantilever beam. Now consider a simply supported beam carrying end moment at A.
Ma
A
Ma
EI
B
aa L
EI = Constt:
MaL
2EI
(M/EI Diagram)
+
2
L
3
MaL
MaL
3aa EI
aa =
=
or
Ma =
L
2EI
3EI
L
Compare this Ma with that for a propped cantilever beam. We find that
Stiffness factor of a simple beam is 3/4th of the cantilever beam. So propped cantilever beam is more stiff.
5.4. DISTRIBUTION FACTOR :
Let us consider a moment applied at joint E as shown. Values shown are the stiflnesses of the
members.
B
10,000
M
4000
E
A
4000
10,000
D
Consider a simple structure shown in the diagram which is under the action of applied moment M.
For the equilibrium requirements at the joint, it is obvious that the summation of moments ( M ) should
be zero at the joint. This means that the applied moment M will be distributed in all the members
meeting at that joint in proportion to their stiffness factor. (This called stiffness concept)
Total stiffness factor = 28,000 = 10,000 + 10,000 + 4,000 + 4,000
4000
1
So
Mae = Mec =
M= M
2800
7
10000
5
Mbe = Med =
M = M. Therefore,
2800
14
Distribution at any end of a member factor is the ratio of the stiffness factor of the member being
considered to the sum of the stiffnesses of all the members meeting at that particular continuous
joint.
261
EXAMPLE NO. 1:- Now take the continuous beam as shown in the figure and analyze it by moment
distribution method.
5 KN/m
A
20KN
5m
C
4I
3I
10m
10m
FIXED END MOMENTS :

41.67
A
41.67
25
25
3/7
C
4/7
16.67
41.67
Locking moment = reactive moment

25
Locking
moment
41.67
25
41.67
B
16.67= net moment at B
7.14
A
Mfab =
B
9.53
16.67
5 102
= + 41.67 KNm
12
Mfba = 41.67 KNm

Mfbc =
20 52 5
= + 25 KNm
102
Mfcb = 25 KNm
M = 16.67 is to be distributed.
(Net moment at B support)
Total stiffness of members of joint B = 7

3
3
so
Mab = M = 16.67 = 7.14 KNm
7
7
4
4
and
Mbc = M = 16.67 = 9.53 KNm
7
7
The distribution factor at joint A is obviously equal to zero being a fixed joint. In the above
diagram and the distribution factor at point C is infact 1 being an exterior pin support. (If we apply moment
to the fixed support, same reactive moment will develop, so redistribution moment is not created for all
fixed supports and if a moment is applied at a pin support, we reactive moment develops.)
Fixed ended moments are sometimes referred to as the restraining moments or the locking
moments. The locking moments are the moments required to hold the tangents straight or to lock
the joints against rotation.
262
Consider the above diagram. Joint A is fixed joint. Therefore, the question of release of this joint
does not arise. Now let us release joint to the net locking moments acting at joint B is 16.67 in the
clockwise direction. After releasing the joint B, the same moment (16.67) will act at joint B in the
counterclockwise direction. This net released moment will be distributed to various members framing into
the joint B w.r.t. their distribution factors. In this case, 7.14 KNm in the counterclockwise direction will
act on member BA and 9.53 KNm in the counterclockwise direction will act on member BC.
Now we hold the joint B in this position and give release to joint C. The rotation at joint C
should be such that the released moment at joint C should be 25 KNm. The same procedure is repeated
for a desired number of cycles. The procedure explained above corresponds to the first cycle.
5.5. STEPS INVOLVED IN MOMENT DISTRIBUTION METHOD:
The steps involved in the moment distribution method are as follows:
(1)
Calculate fixed end moments due to applied loads following the same sign
convention and procedure, which was adopted in the slope-deflection method.
(2)
Calculate relative stiffness.
(3)
Determine the distribution factors for various members framing into a

particular joint.
(4)
Distribute the net fixed end moments at the joints to various members by
multiplying the net moment by their respective distribution factors in the first cycle.
(5)
In the second and subsequent cycles, carry-over moments from the far ends of the same
member (carry-over moment will be half of the distributed moment).
(6)
Consider this carry-over moment as a fixed end moment and determine the
balancing moment. This procedure is repeated from second cycle onwards till
convergence
For the previous given loaded beam, we attempt the problem in a tabular form..
I 3
K= =
10 = 3
L 10
4
and
10 = 4
10
Joints.
Members.
K
Cycle No.
1
2
3
D. Factor
F.E.M.
Balancing
moment.
COM.
Bal.
COM.
Bal.
AB
BA
BC
CB
0
+ 41.67
0.428
41.67
0.572
+ 25
25
0
+ 3.57
0
2.67
0
+ 42.57
+ 7.14
0
5.35
0
+ 1.02
38.86
+ 9.53
+ 12.5
7.15
2.385
+ 1.36
+ 38.86
+ 25
+ 4.77
4.77
3.575
+ 3.575
0
263
NOTE:- Balancing moments are, in fact, the distributed moments.

Now draw SFD , BMD and hence sketch elastic curve as usual by drawing free-body diagrams.
5 KN/m
42.57
A
10m
+25
+0.371
38.86
B
+25
-0.371
25.371
20KN
38.86
10m
+10
+3.886
+24.629
+10
-3.886
+13.886
__ due to applied loads

__ due to end moments
6.114
Rc
Ra
__ net reaction at support

considering both sides of a joint.
38.515
Rb
A
5 KN/m
5m C
10m
10m
25.371
38.515
25.371
13.886
SFD
6.114
6.114
24.629
1.973m
2.8
B.M.D
2.12m
30.570
38.86
42.57
Near A: Span AB
MX = 25.371 X 42.57 2.5 X2 = 0
See free-body diagram
2.5 X 25.371 X + 42.57 = 0

2
X=
25.371
X = 2.12 m
(25.371)2 4 2.5 42.57

2 2.5
264
Near B :
Mx = 38.86 + 24.629 X 2.5 X2 = 0
2.5 X 2 24.629 X + 38.86 = 0
X =
24.629
(24.629)2 4 2.5 38.86

2 2.5
X = 1.973 m
Span BC (near B)
MX// = 38.86 + 13.886X// = 0
X// = 2.8 m
EXAMPLE NO. 2: Analyze the following beam by moment-distribution method. Draw S.F. & B.M.
diagrams. Sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :
3KN/m
A
6KN/m
36KN
2m
5m
8m
2m
EI = Constt:

3 (5)2
= + 6.25 KNm
12
Mfba = 6.25 KNm
Mfab = +
6 82
= + 32 KNm
12
Mfcb = 32 KNm
36 22 2
Mfcd =
+ 18 KNm
42
Mfdc = 18 KNm
Mfbc = +
Step 2: RELATIVE STIFFNESS :

Member.
AB
BC
CD
I
L
1
40
5
1
40
8
1
40
4
Krel.
8
5
10
265
STEP (3) DISTRIBUTION FACTOR :

Joint.
A
D.F.
0
Member.
AB
8
= 0.615
13
5
= 0.385
13
5
= 0.333
15
10
= 0.667
15
10 = 1
10+0
B
B
C
C
D
BA
BC
CB
CD
DC
Attempt and solve the problem now in a tabular form by entering distribution .factors and FEMs.
Joint
Members.
K
Cycle No. D.F.
1
F.E.M
Bal.
2
Com.
Bal.
3
Com.
Bal.
A
AB
8
0
+ 6.25
0
7.918
0
0.7165
0
2.385
BA
8
0.615
6.25
15.836
0
1.433
0
+0.414
23.141
BC
5
0.385
+32
9.914
+2.331
0.897
0.673
+0.259
+23.11
CB
5
0.333
32
+4.662
4.957
1.346
0.4485
+ 0.927
33.16
CD
10
0.667
+ 18
+9.338
+9
2.697
2.3345
+1.856
+33.16
D
DC
10
1
18
+ 18
+4.669
4.669
1.3485
+1.3485
0
Usually for academic purposes we may stop after 3 cycles.

Applying above determined net end moments to the following segments of a continuous beam, we can find
reactions easily.
2.38
A
3KN/m
5m
23.11 23.11
B B
+7.5
+7.5
-5.098
+5.098 -1.261
2.402
6KN/m
8m
+24
+12.598 + (22.739)
35.337
33.16 33.16
C C
+24
+1.261
+18
+8.29
+25.261 +26.29
51.551
36KN
D
+18
__ reaction due to applied load
-8.29
__ reaction due to end moment
9.71 __ net reaction of a support

Final Values considering both
sides of a support.
266
3KN/m
2.38KN
6KN/m
36KN
C
A
2.402
35.337KN
22.739
2m
51.557KN
26.29
0 S.F.D.
b=3.79m
9.71
15.598
X
3.34
0
2.380
33.16
X = 2.293 m
Span BC (near B)
MX = 23.11 + 22.739 X 3 X2 = 0
3 X2 22.739 X + 23.11 = 0
22.739
(22.739)2 4 3 23.11
2x3
X = 1.21 m
Span BC (near C)
MX" = 33.16 + 25.261 X" 3 X"2 = 0
3 X" 2 25.261 X" + 33.16 = 0
X" =
25.261
9.71
Va=2.402-3a=0
19.42 a = 2.402 = 0.8m
3
Vb=22.739-6b=0
+
b=3.79m
0
BMD
23.11
Span AB (near A)
MX = 2.38 + 2.402 X 1.5 X2 = 0
1.5 X2 2.402 X 2.38 = 0
2.402 (2.402)2 + 4 1.5 2.38
X=
2 x 1.5
X =
9.71KN
26.29
a =0.8m
2.40
0
2m
(25.261)2 4 3 33.16
2x3
X" = 1.63 m
Span CD (near C)
MX"= 33.16 + 26.29 X" = 0
X" = 1.26m
267
5.6. CHECK ON MOMENT DISTRIBUTION :

The following checks may be supplied.
(i)
Equilibrium at joints.
(ii)
Equal joint rotations or continuity of slope.
General form of slope-deflection equations is

Mab = Mfab + Krel ( 2 a b )
(1)
Mba = Mfba + Krel ( 2 b a)
(2)
( Mab Mfab)
2 a
Krel
(3)
From (1)
b =
Put (3) in (2) & solve for a.

Mba = Mfba + Krel
Mba = Mfba + Krel
2 (Mab Mfab)
+ 4 a a
Krel
2 (Mab Mfab) +3 a Krel

Krel
(Mba Mfba) = 2 (Mab Mfab) + 3 a Krel

3 a Krel = (Mba Mfba) 2 (Mab Mfab)
or
or
a =
(Mba Mfba) 2 (Mab Mfab)

3 Krel
(4)
a =
(Mba Mfba) 2 (Mab Mfab)

Krel
(5)
a =
Change at far end 2 (Change at near end)

Krel
a =
2 ( Change at near end) (Change at far end)

Krel
a =
(Change at near end)1/2(change at far end)

Krel
Put (4) in (3) & solve for b.

(Mab Mfab) 2 (Mba Mfba) 4(MabMfab)
+
Krel
3 Krel
3 Krel
3 Mab + 3 Mfab 2 Mba + 2 Mfba+4 Mab4 Mfab
=
3 Krel
b =
268
(Mab Mfab) 2 (Mba Mfba)

3 Krel
2 (Mba Mfba) (Mab Mfab)

3 Krel
(Mba Mfba) 1/2 (Mab Mfab)

3/2 Krel

1.5 Krel

Krel
b =
(Change at near end) 1/2(Change at far end)

Krel
These two equations serve as a check on moment Distribution Method.

EXAMPLE NO. 3: Analyze the following beam by moment-distribution method. Draw shear force and
B.M. diagrams & sketch the elastic curve.
SOLUTION :
A
1m
8KN
2m
1.2KN/m
3KN
4m
2I
5m
4I
4m
3I

Mfab = Mfba = 0 ( There is no load on span AB)
Mfbc =
+ 1.2 52
= + 2.5 KNm
12
Mfcb = 2.5 KNm

Mfcd =
8 22 2
= + 4 KNm
42
Mfdc = 4 KNm
269
Step 2: RELATIVE STIFFNESS (K) :

Span
I
L
AB
2
20
4
10
BC
4
20
5
16
Krel
3
20
15
4
Moment at A = 3 1 = 3 KNm. (Known from the loaded given beam according to our sign convention.)
CD
The applied moment at A is counterclockwise but fixing moments are reactive moments.
Step 3: D.F.
Joint
A
D.F.
1
Members.
AB
10
= 0.385
26
BA
16
= 0.615
26
BC
16
= 0.516
31
CB
15
= 0.484
31
CD
4 =1
4 + 0
DC
Now attempt the promlem in a tabular form to determine end moments.

3KN
1m
3 3
A
+3
4m
1.2KN/m
0.38 0.38
B B
5m
+3
4.94 4.94
CC
+3
+0.845
-0.845
-1.064
+1.064
+3
+0.845
-0.845
+1.936
+4.064
1.091
4m
+4
3.845
8KN
2m
+1.235
9.299
+5.235
D
+4
-1.235
2.765
2.765
(due to applied loads)
(due to end moments)
(net reaction)
270
Insert Page No. 294-A
271
3.845 KN
0.845
1.091KN
0.845
9.299KN
X=1.61m
2.765KN
5.235
1.936
+
5m
4m
8KN
2m
1.2KN/m
3KN
A
1m
0 S.F.D.
2.765
2.765
4.064
1.936 - 1.2 x X = 0
X=1.61 m for B in portion BC
0.38
1.94
5.53
X
+
0 B.M.D.
0
3
X
4.94
LOCATION OF POINTS OF CONTRAFLEXURES :

MX = 0.845 X +0.38 = 0
X = 0.45 m from B. in portion BA.
MX = 4.064 X 4.94 0.6 X2 = 0
0.6X2 4.064 X + 4.94 = 0
4.064 (4.064)2 4 0.6 4.94
X =
2 x 0.6
= 1.59 m from C in span BC
MX" = 4.94 + 5.235 X" = 0
X" = 0.94 m from C in span CD
5.7. MOMENTDISTRIBUTION METHOD (APPLICATION TO SINKING OF SUPPORTS) :
Consider a generalized differential sinking case as shown below:
L
EI Constt:
R
MFab A
B
B
MFba
LMFab
4 EI
Bending moments are
induced due to differential
sinking of supports.
MFab
EI
0
LMFba
4 EI
+
0 B.M.D.
L/2
5/6L
MFba
EI
272
(1) Change of slope between points A and B (ab) = 0 ( First momentarea theorem )
(1)
L
L
Mfab
Mfba = 0
4EI
4EI
or
(2) =
Mfab = Mfba
L
5
L
L
Mfab L
4EI
6 4EI Mfab 6 ( Second moment area theorem ), simplify.
5L2 Mfab L2 Mfab
4
4 L2 Mfab
=
4
6EI =
6EI = L2Mfab
6EI
or
Mfab = Mfba =
,
where
R=
L2
L
6EI R
Mfab = Mfba =
L
Equal FEMs are induced due to differential sinking in one span.
The nature of the fixed end moments induced due to the differential settlement of the supports
depends upon the sign of R. If R is (+ve) fizingmment is positive or vice versa. Care must be exercised in
working with the absolute values of the quantity 6EIR/L which should finally have the units of B.M.
(KNm). Once the fixed end moments have been computed by using the above formula, these are
distributed in a tabular form as usual.
EXAMPLE NO.4: Analyse the continuous beam shown due to settlement at support B by moment
distribution method. Apply usual checks & draw S.F., B.M. diagrams & hence sketch the elastic curve take
E = 200 106 , I = 400 106 m4
A
B
2I
4I
D
3I
15mm
1m
4m
5m
4m
SOLUTION :
Step (1) F.E.M. In such cases, Absolute Values of FEMs are to be calculated
6EI
6(200 106 )(2 400 106 )(+0.015)
Mfab = Mfba = 2 =
L
42
= + 900 KNm
(positive because angle R = is clockwise).
L
273
6 (200 106) (4 400 106)(0.015)

52
= 1152 KNm
(Because angle is counter clockwise)
Mfcd = Mfdc = 0
I
Members.
I
L
Krel.
L
Mfbc = Mfcb =
AB
BC
CD
2
20
4
4
20
5
3
20
4
Step 3: D.F : (Distribution Factors)

Joint
D.F.
10
16
15
Members.
A
1
AB
B
0.385
BA
B
0.615
BC
C
0.516
CB
C
0.484
CD
D
1
DC
We attempt and solve the problem in a tabular form as given below:
Joint
Members
K
Cycle
D.F.
1
FEM.
BAL.
2
COM.
BAL.
3
COM.
BAL.
4
COM.
BAL.
5
COM.
BAL.
End Moment.
(change) near end.
1/2(change) far end.
rel =
K
A
AB
10
1.0
+ 900
900
+ 48.51
48.51
+ 29.41
29.41
+ 8.515
8.515
+ 5.164
5.164
0
900
+ 153.515
746.485
+ 74.65
B
BA
10
0.385
+ 900
+ 97.02
450
+ 58.82
24.255
+ 17.03
14.705
+ 10.328
4.258
+ 2.991
+ 592.97
307.03
+ 450
+ 142.97
14.30
C
BC
16
0.615
1152
+154.98
+ 297.22
+ 93.96
19.99
+ 27.21
12.12
+ 16.497
3.51
+ 4.777
592.97
+ 559.03
332.63
+ 226.4
14.15
CB
16
0.516
1152
+ 594.43
+ 77.49
39.98
+ 46.98
24.24
+ 13.605
7.020
+ 8.249
4.256
486.74
+ 665.26
279.515
+ 385.745
24.11
CD
15
0.484
0
+ 557.57
0
37.51
0
22.74
0
6.585
0
3.493
+ 486.74
+ 486.74
122.69
+367.05
24.47
checks have been satisfied. Now Draw SFD , BMD and sketch elastic curve as usual yourself.
D
DC
15
0
0
0
+ 278.79
0
18.75
0
11.37
0
3.293
0
+245.38
+ 245.38
243.37
+ 2.01
0.134
274
5.8. APPLICTION TO FRAMES (WITHOUT SIDE SWAY) :

The reader will find not much of difference for the analysis of such frames.
EXAMPLE NO. 5: Analyze the frame shown below by Moment Distribution Method.
16KN
2m
2m
1.5m
8 KN
2I
3I
1.5m
A
SOLUTION :
Step 1: F.E.M :
Mfab = +
8 1.52 1.5
= + 3 KNm
32
Mfba =
8 1.52 1.5
= 3 KNm
32
Mfbc = +
16 22 2
= + 8 KNm
42
Mfcb = 8 KNm
Members.
I
L
AB
2
12
3
BC
3
12
4
Step 3: D.F :
(Distribution Factors)
Joint.
A
D.F.,
0
Member.
AB
0.47
BA
0.53
BC
CB
Krel
275
Example is now solved in a tabular form as given below:

Joint
Members
K
Cycle D.F.
1
Fem.
Bal.
2
Com.
Bal.
3
Com.
Bal.
(Change) near end

1/2(change)far end
Sum
rel=Sum/(K)
A
AB
8
0
+3
0
1.175
0
0
0
+1.175
1.825
+1.175
0
0
B
BA
8
0.47
3
2.35
0
0
0
0
5.35
2.35
+0.5875
1.7625
+0.22
C
CB
9
0
8
0
1.325
0
0
0
9.325
1.325
+1.325
0
0
BC
9
0.53
+8
2.65
0
0
0
0
+5.35
2.65
+0.6625
1.9875
+0.22
Checks have been satisfied.

DETERMINATION OF SUPPORT REACTIONS, SFD AND BMD.
7.006
5.35
5.35
B
2m
+4
1.5m +1.175
5.175
8KN
9.325
16KN
2m
+8
-0.994
7.006
+8
-0.994
8.994
+4
1.5m - 1.175
1.825 2.825
A
7.006
B,M. & S.F. DIAGRAMS :

16KN
5.35KN-m
2m
B
7.006KN
9.325 KN-m
2m
C
8.994KN
7.006
Mx=7.006X-5.35=0
x=0.764m
Mx=8.994 X-9.325=0
x=1.057 m
0
8.994
S.F.D.
8.994
8.662
0
X
0
B.M.D.
5.35
9.325
276
(rotated member)
Note: It is a column rotated through 90.

7.006
S.F.D.
5.175
8.994
3.825 +
BMD
9.325
+ C
5.35
+
B
8.662
1.825
ELASTIC CURVE
277
EXAMPLE NO.6: Analyze the frame shown in the fig. by Moment Distribution Method.
20KN
A 2m
4m
5I
4m 2I
20KN
B
4m
2m
5I
6m
2I
2I
4m
F
E
6m
6m
SOLUTION :
Step 1: F.E.M :
Mfab =
+ 20 42 2
= + 17.778 KNm
62
Mfba =
20 22 4
= 8.889 KNm
62
Mfbc =
+ 20 22 4
= + 8.889 KNm
62
Mfcb =
20 42 2
= 17.778 KNm
62
Mfad = MFda = 0
Mfbe = Mfeb = 0
There are no loads on these spans.
Mfcf = Mffc = 0
I
L
Members.
Krel
AB
5
12
6
10
BC
5
12
6
10
AD
2
12
4
BE
2
12
6
CF
2
12
4
278
Step 3: Distribution Factor (D.F):

Joint
Member
D.F.
AD
0.375
AB
0.625
BA
0.417
BE
0.166
BC
0.417
CB
0.625
CF
0.375
FC
EB
DA
Now we attempt the problem in a tabular form. Calculation table is attached

Draw SFD, BMD and sketch elastic curve now.
6.667
2.5
2m
20KN
14.447
4m B 2.5
13.33
- 1.296
12.034
+6.67
+1.296
7.966
6.667
+2.5
15
B
+2.5
3.334
12.034
12.034
2.5
6m
4m
6.667
4m
2.5
F
15
6.667
2.5
13.33
- 1.296
12.034
+6.67
+ 1.296
7.966
12.034
A
20KN
2m
14.447
2.5 B 4m
3.334
12.034
Insert Page No. 304-A
279
280
B.M. & SHEAR FORCE DIAGRAMS :

20KN
6.667
2m
14.444
4m
12.034KN
7.966KN
12.034
Mx=12.034 x-6.667= 0
x=0.554m
S.F.D. (KN)
+
0
7.966
Mx=7.966 x -14.444= 0
x=1.813 m
17.401
X
X
+
+
0
6.667
B.M.D. (KN-m)
14.444
20KN
14.444
4m
B
7.966KN
6.667
2m
C
12.034KN
7.966
0
+
0
S.F.D. (KN)
12.034
0.554m
1.813m
+
+
0
F
2.5
6.667
6.667
2.5
6.667
6.667
14.444
6.66
B.M.D. (KN-m)
3.334
0
2.5
2.5
3.334
C
0
3.334
Mx=3.334 - 2.5 x=0

x=1.334m
3.334
0
2.5
2.5
A
3.334
6m
281
F
E
Elastic Curve
EXAMPLE NO. 7:- Analyze the following frame by Moment Distribution Method.
SOLUTION: This is a double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads and hence would be able to
sway both at upper and lower stories.
2KN/m
C
D
3m
2I
3KN/m B
2KN/m
2I
E
2I
2I
5m
Step 1: F.E.Ms Due to applied loads :

Mfab =
3 32
= + 2.25 KNm
12
Mfba = 2.25 KNm

Mfbc =
3 32
= + 2.25
12
Mfcb = 2.25 KNm.

2.52
Mfbe = Mfcd =
= + 4.167 KNm
12
Mfeb = Mfdc = 4.167 KNm
Mfde = Mfcd = 0
Mfef = Mffe = 0
3m
282

Member
AB
BC
DE
EF
CD
BE
I
L
Krel
2
15
3
2
15
3
2
15
3
2
15
3
1
15
5
1
15
5
10
10
10
10
3
3
Step 3: F.E.Ms. Due to side Sway of upper storey:

D
5m
I
E
2I 3m
F
+ 6EI
+ 6E(2I )
=
900 = + 1200 (Note: 900 value is an arbitrary multiplier)
L2
32
+ 6 EI + 6 E(2 I)
Mfde = Mfed =
=
900 = + 1200 (Because R is clockwise)
L2
32
Step 4: F.E.Ms. Due To Side Sway Of Lower Storey :
Mfbc = Mfcb =
I
5m
3m 2I
-R
2
B
R
-R
2
E
R
3m 2I
A
283
Mfbc = Mfcb =Mfde = Mfed =
Mfab = Mfba =
Mfef = Mffe =
6E(2I)
900 = 1200
9
(R is counter clockwise so negative)
+ 6EI(2I)
900 = + 1200
9
(R is clockwise, So positive)
+ 6EI(2I)
900 = + 1200
9
(R is clockwise, So positive)
Determination Of Shear Co-efficients (K1, K2) for upper and lower stories :
M CB
Upper Storey:
M DE
D
3m
3m
3KN/m
M BC
MBC+MCB
3
HB = 4.5+
Shear Conditions :
1. Upper story
Hb + He =0
2. Lower storey
Ha + Hf = 0
Lower Storey
M ED
HB
HE =
HE
MED+MDE
3
(1) where Hb and He values in terms of end

moments are shown in the relavant diagram.
(2)
MBA
M EF
E
3m
3m
3KN/m
HA
HA =
A
M AB
MBA
4.5+ MAB+
3
HF =
MFE
HF
MFE+MEF
3
Where Ha and Hf values in terms of end moments are shown in the relavant diagram
Now we attempt the problem in a tabular form. There would be three tables , one due to loads(TableA),
other due to FEMs of upper story (TableB) and lower story (TableC).
Insert these three tables here. Now end moment of a typical member would be the sum of moment due
284
to applied loads K1 same end moment due to sway of upper story K2 same end moment due to
sway of lower story. Picking up the values from tables and inserting as follows we have.
Mab = 1.446 K1(143.66) + K2 (1099 .625).
Mba = 3.833 K1 (369.4) + K2 (1035.46)
Mbc = 0.046 + K1 (522.71) K2 (956.21)
Mcb = 4.497 + K1 (314.84) K2 (394.38).
Mcd = + 4.497 K1 (314.84) + K2 (394.38)
Mdc = 3.511 K1 (314.84) + K2 (394.38)
Mde = + 3.511 + K1 (314.84) K2 (394.38)
Med = + 2.674 + K1 (522.71) K2 (956.29).
Mef = + 1.335 K1 (369.4) + K2 (1035.46)
Mfe = + 0.616 K1 (193.66) + K2 (1099.625).
Mbe = + 3.878 K1 (153.32) K2 (79.18)
Meb = 4.009 K1 (153.32) K2 (79.18)
Put these expressions of moments in equations (1) & (2) & solve for K1 & K2.
0.046 + 522.71 K1 956.21 K2 4.497 + 314.84 K1 394.38 K2
+2.674+522.71 K1 956.29 K2+3.511+314.84 K1 394.38 K2 = 13.5
1675.1 K1 2701.26 K2 11.858 = 0
(3)
1.446 143.66 K1 + 1099.625 K2 3.833 369.4 K1 + 1035.46 K2

+0.646193.66 K1+1099.625 K2+1.335369.4K1+1035.46K2 = 40.5
1076.12 K1 + 4270.17 K2 40.936 = 0
(4)
From (3)
K2 =
1675.10 K1 11.858
2701.26
Put K2 in (4) & solve for K1

1076.12 K1 + 4270.17
1675.10 K1 11.858
2701.26
40.936 = 0
1076.12 K1 + 2648 K1 18.745 40.936 = 0

1571.88 K1 59.68 = 0
K1 = 0.03797
From (5)
K2 =
1675.1 (0.03797) 11.858

2701.26
K2 = 0.01915
(5)
Putting the values of K1 and K2 in above equations , the following end moments are obtained.
FINAL END MOMENTS :
Mab = 1.446 0.03797 x 143.66 + 0.01915 x 1099.625 = + 17.05KNm
Mba = + 1.97 KNm
Mbc = + 1.49 KNm.
Mcb = 0.095 KNm.
Mcd = + 0.095 KNm
Mdc = 7.91 KNm
Mde = + 7.91 KNm
Med = + 4.21 KNm
Mef = + 7.14 KNm
Mfe = + 14.32 KNm
Mbe = 3.46 KNm
Meb = 11.35 KNm
These values also satisfy equilibrium of end moments at joints. For simplicity see end
moments at joints C and D.
Space for notes:
285
286
Insert Page No. 309AB
Insert Page No. 309C
287
288
CHAPTER SIX
6. KANIS METHOD OR ROTATION CONTRIBUTION
METHOD OF FRAME ANALYSIS
This method may be considered as a further simplification of moment distribution method wherein
the problems involving sway were attempted in a tabular form thrice (for double story frames) and two
shear co-efficients had to be determined which when inserted in end moments gave us the final end
moments. All this effort can be cut short very considerably by using this method.
Frame analysis is carried out by solving the slope deflection equations by successive
approximations. Useful in case of side sway as well.
Operation is simple, as it is carried out in a specific direction. If some error is

committed, it will be eliminated in subsequent cycles if the restraining moments and
distribution factors have been determined correctly. Please note that the method does not give
realistic results in cases of columns of unequal heights within a storey and for pin ended columns both of
these cases are in fact extremely rare even in actual practice. Even codes suggest that RC columns framing
into footings or members above may be considered more or less as fixed for analysis and design purposes.
Case 1. No side sway and therefore no translation of joints derivation.
Consider a typical member AB loaded as shown below:
Tangent at B
Mab
A
Tangent at A
P1
P2
Mba
b
Elastic Curve
L
A GENERAL BEAM ELEMENT UNDER END MOMENTS AND LOADS

General Slope deflection equations are.
2EI
Mab = MFab +
( 2a b )
L
2EI
Mba = MFba +
( a 2b )
L
equation (1) can be re-written as
Mab = MFab + 2 Mab + Mba
and
(1)
(2)
(3)
where MFab = fixed end moment

at A due to applied loads.
EI
Mab = rotation contribution of near end A of member AB = (2a)
L
2EI a
= 2E k1 a
L
/
M ba = rotation contribution of for end B of member AB.
2 EI b
So
M/ba =
= 2Ek1 b
L
=
(4) where k1=
(5)
I1
L1
KANIS METHOD OF FRAME ANALYSIS
289
Now consider a generalized joint A in a frame where members AB, AC, AD.........meet. It carries a
moment M.
B
k1
k3
M
A
k2
k3
D
For equilibrium of joint A, Ma = 0

or
Mab + Mac + Mad + Mae..................= 0
Putting these end moments in form of eqn. (3)
or
MF (ab, ac, ad) + 2 M (ab, ac, ad ) + M (ba, ca, da) = 0

Let MF (ab, ac, ad) = MFa (net FEM at A)
So
MFa + 2 M (ab, ac, ad) + M (ba, ca, da) = 0
From (6), M (ab, ac, ad) =
(6)
1
[(MFa + M (ba, ca, da)] (7)
2
From (4), M (ab, ac, ad) = 2Ek1 a 2 Ek2 a 2 Ek3 a + ...............

= 2 Ea ( k1 + k2 + k3)
= 2 Ea (k), ( sum of the member stiffnesses framing in at joint A)
or
a =
M (ab, ac, ad)

2E (k)
(8)
From (4), Mab = 2 Ek1 a. Put a from (8), we have

Mab = 2E k1
M (ab, ac, ad)

k1
=
[ M (ab, ac, ad)]
2E (k)
k
From (7), Put M (ab, ac, ad)

k1 1
So
Mab =
(MFa + M (ba, ca, da))
k 2
290
or
Mab =
on similar lines
and
1 k1
[ MFa + M (ba, ca, da)]
2 k
Mac =
M/ad =
1 k2
2 k
1 k3
2 k
rotation contribution of near

end of member ad.
sum of the rotations contributions of far

ends of members meeting at A.
Sum of rotation factors at near end of members ab, ac, ad is
1 k1 1 k2 1 k3
1 k1 + k2 + k3 + .........
=
2 k 2 k 2 k
2
k
1
, sum of rotation factors of different members meeting at a
2
joint is equal to
1
2
Therefore, if net fixed end moment at any joint along with sum of the far end contribution of
members meeting at that joint are known then near end moment contribution can be determined. If
far end contributions are approximate, near end contributions will also be approximate. When Far
end contributions are not known (as in the first cycle), they can be assumed to be zero.
6.1. RULES FOR CALCULATING ROTATION CONTRIBUTIONS :__ Case-1: Without sides way.
Definition: Restrained moment at a joint is the algebraic sum of FE.Ms of different members
meeting at that joint.
1.
Sum of the restrained moment of a joint and all rotation contributions of the far ends of
members meeting at that joint is multiplied by respective rotation factors to get the
required near end rotation contribution. For the first cycle when far end contributions
are not known, they may be taken as zero (Ist approximation).
2.
By repeated application of this calculation procedure and proceeding from joint to joint
in an arbitrary sequence but in a specific direction, all rotation contributions are known.
The process is usually stopped when end moment values converge. This normally happens after
three or four cycles. But values after 2nd cycle may also be acceptable for academic.
6.2. Case 2:__ With side sway (joint translations)

In this case in addition to rotation contribution, linear displacement contributions ( Sway
contributions ) of columns of a particular storey are calculated after every cycle as follows:
291
6.2.1. For the first cycle.

(A) Linear Displacement Contribution ( LDC) of a column = Linear displacement factor (LDF) of a
particular column of a story multiplied by [storey moment + contributions at the ends of columns
of that story]
3
Linear displacement factor (LDF) for columns of a storey =
2
3 k
Linear displacement factor of a column =
Where k=stiffness of the column being
2 k
considered and k is the sum of stiffness of all
columns of that storey.
1
6.2.2. (B)
Storey moment = Storey shear x of storey height.
3
6.2.3. (C)
Storey shear : It may be considered as reaction of column at horizontal beam / slab
levels due to lateral loads by considering the columns of each sotrey as simply supported beams in
vertical direction. If applied load gives + R value (according to sign conversion of slope
deflection method), storey shear is +ve or vice versa.
Consider a general sway case.
6.3. SIGN CONVENSION ON MOMENTS:

clockwise rotations are positive.
Counter-clockwise moments are positive and
For first cycle with side sway.

(D)
Near end contribution of various

members meeting at that joint.
= respective rotation contribution factor [Restrained moment +

far end contributions]
Linear displacement contributions will be calculated after the end of each cycle for the columns only.
FOR 2ND AND SUBSEQUENT CYCLES.
(E) Near end contributions of various =
members meeting at a joint.
Respective rotation contribution factor [Restrained

moment + far end contributions + linear displacement
contribution of columns of different storeys meeting
at that joint].
292
6.4. Rules for the Calculation of final end moments (sidesway cases)
(F)
For beams, End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contributions.
(G)
For columns, End moment. = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contribution +
linear displacement contribution of that column for the latest cycle.
6.5. APPLICATION OF ROTATION CONTRIBUTION METHOD (KANIS METHOD)

FOR THE ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS BEAMS
Example No.1: Analyze the following beam by rotation contribution method. EI is constant.
7k/ft
36K
6k/ft
A
C
B
16
24
D
12
EI = constt.
Note.
Analysis assumes continuous ends with some fixity. Therefore, in case of extreme hinged
supports in exterior spans, modify (reduce) the stiffness by 3/4 = (0.75).for a hinged end.
Step No. 1. Relative Stiffness.

Span
I
L
Krel
AB
16
1
48
16
BC
24
1
24
CD
12
1
12
4 x (3/4)
K modified.
(exterior or discontinuous hinged end)

Step No.2.
Fixed end moments.
Mfab = +
wL2
3 162
= +
= + 64 K-ft.
12
12
Mfba = 64
Mfbc = +
6 242
= + 288
12
Mfcb = 288
Pa2b
+ 36 62 6
= + 54
2 =
L
122
Mfdc = 54
Mfcd = +
293
Step No.3. Draw Boxes, enter the values of FEMs near respective ends of exterior boxes and rotation
contribution factors appropriately (on the interior side).
restraining moment =
algebraic sum of FEM
meeting at that joint is extend
in inner box..
FEMs
A
+64 -64 -0.5( 3 )

+288
-288
3+2 +224
*
*
-44.8 +55.76
0 * -67.2 -0.3*
-0.2
-0.2
-55.95 +60.95
0 -83.92
-57
+61.94
0 -84.48
-234
+54
-54
*
+83.64 -14.82
-0.3
+91.43 -18.71
+92.9 -19.45
-0.5( 3 )
3
*-0.5
-54
* = Distribution factors.
A C( Far end contribution)

B
D( Far end contributions)
FIRST CYCLE

Joint B: 0.3 (+224 + 0 + 0) = 67.2 (Span BA)

Joint C: 0.2( 234 44.8 + 0) = +55.76 (Span CB)
and
0.2 ( 224 + 0 + 0) = 44.8 (Span BC)
and
0.3( 234 44.8 + 0) = +83.64 (Span CD)
Joint D: 0.5( 54 +83.64) = 14.82 (Span DC)
2nd cycle:
A
C ( Far end contributions)
B
D (far end contributions)
Joint B. 0.3 (+ 224+0 +55.76) = 83.92 Joint C: 0.2 ( 234 55.95 14.82) = 60.95
0.2 (+224+0 +55.76) = 55.85
0.3 ( 234 55.95 14.82) = 91.43
Joint D. 0.5 ( 54 + 91.43) = 18.715
3rd cycle: Singular to second cycle procedure. We stop usually after 3 cycles and the answers can be
further refined by having another couple of cycles. (Preferably go up to six cycles till difference in moment
value is 0.1 or less). The last line gives near and far end contribution.
Step No. 4.
FINAL END MOMENTS
For beams.
End moment = FEM + 2near end cont. + Far end contribution.
Mab = + 64 + 2 x 0 84.48 = 20.48 k ft.

Mba = 64 2 x 84.48 + 0 = 232.96 k ft.
Mbc = + 288 2 x 57 + 61.94 = +235.9 k ft.
Mcb = 288 + 2 x 61.94 57 = 221.12
Mcd = + 54 + 2 x 92.9 19.45 = + 220.35
Mdc = 54 2 x 19.45 + 92.9 = zero
The beam has been analyzed and we can draw shear force and bending moment diagrams as usual.
294
6.6. Rotation Contribution Method: Application to frames without side sway.

Example No 2:
Analyze the following frame by Kanis method ( rotation Contribution Method )
9K
1 k/ft
6
10
2I
2I
10
Step No. 1
3I
12
Relative Stiffness.
Span
I
L
Krel
K modified.
AB
16
3
240
16
45
45
BC
12
2
240
12
3
40
4
30 (Exterior hinged end)
BD
10
2
240
10
48
48
103
Step No.2.
FEMs
Mfab =
9 6 102
= + 21.1 K-ft
162
Mfba =
9 10 62
= 12.65
162
Mfbc =
1 122
= + 12
12
Mfcb = 12
Mfbd = Mfdb = 0 ( No load within span BD)
Step No. 3.
295
Draw Boxes, enter values of FEMs, rotation contribution factors etc.

B
+21.1
0*
+12
-12
-12.65
* -0.65
*
*
+0.079 +5.96
+0.119
-0.5
-0.183
-0.122
-0.647 +6.32
-0.97
-0.69
+6.345
-1.03
*
-0.195
* rot. cont.
factor.
+0.126
-1.03
-1.10
-12
FEM's
*
0
D
(rotation contribution factor)
Apply all relevant rules in three cycles. Final end moments may now be calculated.
End moment = FEM + 2 x near end contribution. + Far end contribution
For Columns : End moment = FEM + 2 x near end contribution + Far end contribution + Linear
displacement contribution of that column. To be taken in sway cases only.
Mab = 21.1 + 2x0 1.03 = + 20.07 Kft
Mba = 12.65 2 x 1.03 + 0 = 14.71
Mbc = +12 2 x 0.69 + 6.345 = 16.965
Mbd = 0 2x1.1 +0 = 2.2
Mcb = 12 + 2x 6.345 0.69 = 0
Mdb = 0 + 2x01.10 = 1.10
Equilibrium checks are satisfied. End moment values are OK. Now SFD and BMD can be drawn as usual.
Example No. 3: Analyse the following frame by rotation Contribution Method.
SOLUTION:It can be seen that sway case is there.
For beams.
16k
15
5
B
10
4I
D
A
20
296
Step No. 1.
Step No. 2.
Relative Stiffness.
Member.
AB
10
BC
20
CD
10
I
L
1
10
10
4
10
20
1
10
10
Krel
1
2
1
FEMs
+ 16 5 152
= + 45
202
2
16 5 15
MfCB =
= 15
202
All other fixing moments are zero.
Step No.3
Draw Boxes, enter FEMs and rotation Contribution factors etc. Apply three cycles.
MfBC =
+45
*
-0.167
+45
*
-0.333 -14.98
-18.93
-19.57
-7.51
-9.49
-9.80
LDC
-15
*
-0.333 -15
+9.98
+10.67
+10.47
*
-0.167
+5.0
+5.35
+5.25
0
LDC
+1.8825
+3.105
+3.41
-0.75
-3/2(1/2)=
-0.75
LDF
Linear disp.
factors
FEMs
* = rotation factors.
*
*
0 0
A
0 0
D
Rotation factor
Rotation factor
See explanation of calculations on next page.

Note: After applying the first cycle as usual, calculate linear displacement contribution for columns of all
storeys. Repeat this calculation after every cycle.
Linear displacement contribution (LDC) of a column=Linear displacement factor [ story moment +
contribution of column ends of that storey)
Storey moment is zero because no horizontal load acts in column and there is no storey shear.
After 1st cycle: Linear Disp. Cont = 0.75 [ 0 + 5.0 7.5 + 0 + 0] = + 1.8825
For 2nd cycle onwards to calculate rotation contribution, apply following Rule:
Rotation contribution = rotation contribution factor [restrained moment + far end contributions +
linear displacement contribution of columns. of different. storeys meeting at that joint.]
297
2nd cycle.
Joint B.
and
Joint C.
and
A
C( Far ends)
0.167 [ +45 + 0 + 9.98 + 1.8825 ] = 9.49
(Span BA)
0.333 [ do ] = 18.93
(Span BC)
0.333 [ 15 18.93 + 0 + 1.8825 ] = + 10.67
(Span CB)
0.167 [ do ] = + 5.35
(Span CD)
After 2nd cycle. Linear displacement contribution is equall to

storey moment.
= 0.75 [ 0 9.49 + 0 + 5.35 + 0 ] = + 3.105

After 3rd cycle.
After 3rd cycle , linear displacement. contribution of columns is equall to
storey moment.
= 0.75 [ 0 9.80 + 5.25 + 0 + 0 ] = 3.41

Calculate end moments after 3rd cycle.
For beams:
End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution. + Far end contribution.
For columns.
End moment = FEM + 2 near end contribution + Far end contribution.

+ linear displacement. contribution of that column.
Applying these rules

Mab = 0 + 0 9.80 + 3.41 = 6.3875 k.ft.
Mba = + 0 2 9.80 + 0 + 3.41 = + 16.19
Mbc = + 45 2 19.57 + 10.47 = + 16.33
Mcb = 15 + 2 10.47 19.57 = 13.63
Mcd = 0 + 2 5.25 + 0 + 3.41 = 13.91
Mdc = 0 + 2 0 + 5.25 + 3.41 = 8.66
By increasing number of cycles the accuracy is increased.
298
Example No 4 : Solve the following double story frame carrying gravity and lateral loads by rotation
contribution method.
2 KN/m
C
D
(I)
2I
3m 2I
2I
2 KN/m
3 KN/m B
E
(I)
2I
2I
3m 2I
F
5m
I
SOLUTION :
If this is analyzed by slope-deflection or Moment distribution method, it becomes very lengthy and
laborious. This becomes easier if solved by rotation contribution method.
Step 1: F.E.Ms.
+ 3 32
Mfab =
= + 2.25 KNm
12
Mfba = 2.25 KNm
Mfbc = + 2.25 KNm
Mfcb = 2.25 KNm
2 52
= + 4.17 KNm
12
Mfdc = 4.17 KNm
Mfcd =
Mfbe = + 4.17 KNm

Mfeb = 4.17 KNm.
Mfde = Mfed = 0
Mfef = Mffe = 0
Step 2: RELATIVE STIFFNESS :
Span
I
L
AB
2
15
3
10
BC
2
15
3
10
299
BE
1
15
5
CD
1
15
5
DF
2
15
3
10
EF
2
15
3
10
LINEAR DISPLACEMENT FACTOR = L.D.F. of a column of a

particular storey.
L.D.F. =
3 K
2 K
Where K is the stiffness of that column & K is the stiffness of columns of that storey. Assuming columns
of equal sizes in a story. ( EI same)
3
10
= 0.75
2 (10 + 10)
3
10
L.D.F2 =
= 0.75
2 (10 + 10)
L.D.F1 =
(For story No. 1)

(For story No. 2)
Storey Shear :
This is, in fact, reaction at the slab or beam level due to horizontal forces. If storey shear causes a
(ve) value of R, it will be (ve) & vice versa.
For determining storey shear the columns can be treated as simply supported vertical beams.
(1)
(2)
Storey shear = 9 KN ( For lower or ground story. At the slab level of ground story)
Storey shear = 4.5 ( For upper story ). At the slab level of upper story root)
Storey Moment ( S.M) :

S.M. = Storey shear + h/3 where h is the height of that storey.
3
SM1 = 9 = 9
( lower story )
3
3
S.M2 = 4.5 = 4.5
( Upper story )
3
Rotation Factors
The sum of rotation factors at a joint is . The rotation factors are obtained by dividing the
value between different members meeting at a joint in proportion to their K values.
300
ab =
1 k1
2 k
ac =
1 k2
etc.
2 k
Rotation Contributions:
The rule for calculating rotation contribution is as follows.
Sum the restrained moments of a point and all rotation contribution of the far ends of the members
meeting at a joint. Multiply this sum by respective rotation factors to get the required rotation
contribution. For the first cycle far end contribution can be taken as zero.
Span
Rotation factor.
AB
10
BC
10
BE
3
0.5 = 0.065
23
BA
10
10
0.5 = 0.217
23
CB
10
0.385
CD
0.115
DC
0.115
DE
10
0.385
ED
10
0.217
EB
0.065
EF
10
0.217
(Being fixed end)
1 10
= 0.217
2 23
FE
10
0 (Being fixed end)
Now draw boxes, enter FEMs values, rotation factors etc. As it is a two storeyed frame, calculations on a
single A4 size paper may not be possible. A reduced page showing calculation is annexed.
Restraining
Moment
1.92
cd=
-0.115
cb = -0.385
R.C.=Rotation Contribution.
-0.39
-0.89
-1.74
-2.55
Linear Dis- -3.18
-3.65
placement
factor(L.D.F) -3.99
-4.23
-0.75
-6.50
-6.30
-6.00
-5.61
-5.05
-4.24
-2.46
-0.9
F.E.M.= +4.17
R.C.
-0.12
-0.25
-0.52
-0.76
-0.95
-1.09
-1.19
-1.26
Linear Displacement Contribution

L.D.C.
2.7
6.71
9.87
12.25
14.00
15.3
16.21
16.21
301
-4.17=F.E.M.
R.C.
0.49
0.13
-0.11
-0.3
-0.45
-0.56
-0.64
-0.7
dc=
-0.115
-4.17
de=-0.385
R.C.
1.65
0.45
-0.35
-1.00
-1.50
-1.87
-2.14
-2.34
F.E.M. = 0
L.D.C.
2.7
6.71
9.87
12.25
14.00
15.30
16.21
16.21
-4.93
-4.69
-4.37
-3.88
-3.23
-2.33
-1.1
0.55
F.E.M. = +2.25
R.C.
L.D.F.
= -0.75
F.E.M. = 0
R.C.
R.C.
ed=-0.217
bc=-0.217
be
4.17
=-0.065
ba=-0.217
F.E.M. = -2.25
R.C.
-0.9
-2.96
-4.24
-5.05
L.D.F.=
-5.61
-0.75
-6.00
-6.30
-6.50
F.E.M. = 0
L.D.C.
7
9.8
11.68
12.96
13.87
14.53
14.99
15.00
F.E.M. = +4.17
R.C.
-0.27
-0.89
-1.27
-1.51
-1.68
-1.89
-1.95
-1.95
F.E.M. = -4.17
R.C.
0.16
-0.33
-0.70
-0.97
-1.16
-1.31
-1.41
-1.48
eb=
-0.065
-4.17
ef=-0.217
R.C.
0.55
-1.1
-2.33
3.23
-3.88
-4.37
-4.69
-4.93
F.E.M. = 0
L.D.C.
7
9.8
11.68
12.96
13.87
14.53
14.99
15.00
L.D.F.
= -0.75
F.E.M. = 0
F.E.M. = +2.25
Double storey frame carrying gravity and lateral loads Analysed by Rotation Contribution Method.
302
First Cycle
Near end contribution = Rotation factor of respective member (Restrained moment +

far end contributions).
Joint
B =
R.F. ( 4.17 )
C =
R.F. ( 1.92 0.9 )
D =
R.F. ( 4.17 0.12)
E =
R.F. ( 4.17 + 1.65)
After First Cycle :

Linear Displacement Contribution := L.D.F.[Storey moment + Rotation contribution at the end
of columns of that storey].
L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 0.9 + 0.55) = 7
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 0.9 0.39 + 0.55 + 1.65) = 2.7
For 2nd Cycle And Onwards :
Near end contribution = R.F.[Restrained moment + Far end contribution + Linear displacement
contributions of columns of different storeys meeting at that joint]
Joint
B=
R.F. (4.17 + 0.16 0.39 + 7 + 2.7 )
C=
(1.92 + 0.49 2.96 + 2.7)
D=
( 4.17 0.25 + 0.55 + 2.7)
E=
( 4.17 + 0.45 0.89 + 2.7 + 7 ).
After 2nd Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 2.96 1.1) = 9.8
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 2.96 0.83 1.1 + 0.45) = 6.71
3rd Cycle :
Joint
B=
R.F. ( 4.17 0.33 0.83 + 9.8 + 6.71)
C=
( 1.92 + 0.13 4.24 + 6.71 )
D=
( 4.17 1.1 0.52 + 6.71)
E=
( 4.17 1.27 0.35 + 9.8 + 6.71)
303
After 3rd Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 4.24 2.33) = 11.68
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 1.74 4.24 0.35 2.33) = 9.87
4th Cycle :
Joint
R.F. ( 4.17 0.70 1.74 + 11.68 + 9.87)
B=
C=
( 1.92 0.11 5.05 + 9.87)
D=
( 4.17 0.76 2.33 + 9.87 )
E=
( 4.17 1 1.51 + 9.87 + 11.68).
After 4th Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 5.05 3.23) = 12.96
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 5.05 2.55 1.00 3.23) = 12.25
5th Cycle :
Joint
R.F. (4.17 0.97 2.55 + 12.25 + 12.96)
B=
C=
( 1.92 0.3 5.61 + 12.25)
D=
( 4.17 0.95 3.23 + 12.25 )
E=
( 4.17 1.5 1.68 + 12.25 + 12.96)
After 5th Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 5.61 3.88) = 13.87
(ground storey)
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 5.61 3.18 1.5 3.88 ) = 14

6th Cycle :
Joint
R.F. (4.17 1.16 3.18 + 14 + 13.87 )
(1.92 0.05 6 + 14)
( 4.17 3.88 1.09 + 14)
( 4.17 1.87 1.68 + 14 + 13.87)
(First Floor)
304
After 6th Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 6 4.37) = 14.53
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 6 3.65 1.87 4.37) = 15.3
7th Cycle :
Joint
R.F. (4.17 1.31 3.65 + 15.3 + 14.53)
(1.92 0.56 6.30 + 15.3)
( 4.17 1.19 4.37 + 15.3)
( 4.17 1.89 2.14 + 15.3 + 14.53)
After 7th Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 6.30 4.69 ) = 14.99
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 6.3 3.99 2.14 4.69 ) = 16.21
8th Cycle :
Joint
R.F. (4.17 1.41 3.99 + 16.21 + 14.99)
(1.92 6.5 0.64 + 16.21)
( 4.17 4.69 1.26 + 16.21)
( 4.17 2.34 1.95 + 16.21 + 14.99)
After 8th Cycle :

L.D.C1 = 0.75 ( 9 6.5 4.93) 15
L.D.C2 = 0.75 ( 4.5 6.5 4.23 4.93 2.34). 16.21
FINAL END MOMENTS :
(1) Beams or Slabs :
= F.E.M + 2 (near end contribution) + far end contribution of that particular
beam or slab.
(2) For Columns :
= F.E.M + 2 (near end contribution) + far end contribution of that particular
column + L.D.C. of that column. Applying these rules we get the following end
moments.
305
END MOMENTS :
Mab = 2.25 + 2 0 6.5 + 15
+ 10.75 KNm
Mba = 2.25 2 (6.5) 1 + 15
0.25
Mbc = 2.25 2 6.5 4.23 + 16.21
+ 1.23
Mbe = 4.17 2 (1.95) 1.48
1.21
Mcb = 2.25 2 4.23 6.5 + 16.21
Mcd = 4.17 2 1.26 0.7
+ 0.95+1
Mdc = 4.17 2 0.7 1.26
6.83
Mde = 0 2 2.34 4.93 + 16.21
+ 6.60
Med = 0 2 4.93 2.34 + 16.21
+ 4.01
Meb = 4.17 2 1.48 1.95
9.08 KNm
Mef = 0 2 4.93 + 15
+ 5.14
+ 10.07
Mfe =
0 2 0 4.93 + 15
Now frame is statically determinate and contains all end moments. It can be designed now.
Space for notes:
306
CHAPTER SEVEN
7. INTRODUCTION TO COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD
The column analogy method was also proposed by Prof. Hardy Cross and is a powerful technique
to analyze the beams with fixed supports, fixed ended gable frames, closed frames & fixed arches etc.,
These members may be of uniform or variable moment of inertia throughout their lengths but the method is
ideally suited to the calculation of the stiffness factor and the carryover factor for the members having
variable moment of inertia. The method is strictly applicable to a maximum of 3rd degree of indeterminacy.
This method is essentially an indirect application of the consistent deformation method.
The method is based on a mathematical similarity (i.e. analogy) between the stresses developed on
a column section subjected to eccentric load and the moments imposed on a member due to fixity of its
supports. *(We have already used an analogy in the form of method of moment and shear in which it was
assumed that parallel chord trusses behave as a deep beam). In the analysis of actual engineering structures
of modern times, so many analogies are used like slab analogy, and shell analogy etc. In all these methods,
calculations are not made directly on the actual structure but, in fact it is always assumed that the actual
structure has been replaced by its mathematical model and the calculations are made on the model. The final
results are related to the actual structure through same logical engineering interpretation.
In the method of column analogy, the actual structure is considered under the action of applied
loads and the redundants acting simultaneously on a BDS. The load on the top of the analogous column is
usually the B.M.D. due to applied loads on simple spans and therefore the reaction to this applied load is
the B.M.D. due to redundants on simple spans considers the following fixed ended loaded beam.
P1
P2
WKN/m
Ma A
B MB
L
EI=Constt.
(a) Given beam
under loads
(d) Loading on top of

analogous column,
Ms diagram, same as(b).
1 (Unity)
0
(b) B.M.D. due to
applied loads, on simple span
plotted on the
compressin side.
L
(e) X-section of analogous
column.
0
MB
MA (c) B.M.D. due to

redundants, plotted
on the compression
side on simple span
Mb
Ma
(f) Pressure on bottom of

analogous column,
Mi diagram.
COLUMN ANALOGY METHOD
307
The resultant of B.M.Ds due to applied loads does not fall on the mid point of analogous column
section which is eccentrically loaded.
Msdiagram = BDS moment diagram due to applied loads.
Mi diagram = Indeterminate moment diagram due to redundants.
If we plot (+ve) B.M.D. above the zero line and (ve) B.M.D below the zero line (both on
compression sides due to two sets of loads) then we can say that these diagrams have been plotted on the
compression side.
(The conditions from which MA & MB can be determined, when the method of consistent
deformation is used, are as follows). From the Geometry requirements, we know that
(1)
The change of slope between points A & B = 0; or sum of area of moment diagrams between
A & B = 0 (note that EI = Constt:), or area of moment diagrams of fig.b = area of moment diagram
of fig..c.
(2)
The deviation of point B from tangent at A = 0; or sum of moment of moment diagrams between A
& B about B = 0, or Moment of moment diagram of fig.(b) about B = moment of moment diagram
of fig.(c) about B. Above two requirements can be stated as follows.
(1)
Total load on the top is equal to the total pressure at the bottom and;
(2)
Moment of load about B is equal to the moment of pressure about B),

indicates that the analogous column is on equilibrium under the action of applied loads
and the redundants.
7.1. SIGN CONVENTIONS:

It is necessary to establish a sign convention regarding the nature of the applied load (Ms
diagram) and the pressures acting at the base of the analogous column (Midiagram.)
1.
Load ( P) on top of the analogous column is downward if Ms/EI diagram is (+ve) which means that
it causes compression on the outside or (sagging) in BDS vice-versa. If EI is constant, it can be
taken equal to units.
Outside
C
Inside
2.
Upward pressure on bottom of the analogous column ( Mi diagram) is considered as (+ve).
3.
Moment (M) at any point of the given indeterminate structure ( maximum to 3rd degree) is given by
the formula.
M = Ms Mi,
which is (+ve) if it causes compression on the outside of members.
308
EXAMPLE NO. 1: Determine the fixedended moments for the beam shown below by the method of
column analogy.
SOLUTION:
Choosing BDS as a simple beam. Draw Ms diagram. Please it on analogous column.
W/Unit length.
A
EI=Constt.
L
2
WL
8
+
WL3
12 WL3
12
L
2
WL 0
12
2
WL
12 0
WL2 /24
Ms-diagram
(B.M.D. due to applied
loads on B.D.S.)
Loading on top of
analogous column.
X-section of
1 analogous column
Mi-diagam
2
Pressure on bottom of
WL
analogous column.(uniform as
12
resultant falls on the mid point of
analogous column section
2
WL (Final BMD) M = Ms - Mi
12
P
A
A = L I (area of analogous column section).
WL3
=
12(Lx1)
WL2
Mi =
.
In this case, it will be uniform as resultant of Ms
12
diagram falls on centroid of analogous column)
Pressure at the base of the column =
(MS)a = 0 ,
(Ms at point A to be picked up for M-s diagram)
Ma = (Ms Mi)a
WL2
= 0
12
WL2
Ma =
12
(net moment at point A)
WL2
WL2
=
12
12
WL2 WL2
Mc = (Ms Mi)c =
8
12
3 WL2 2 WL2
WL2
Mc =
=
. Plot these values to get M = Ms Mi diagram.
24
24
The beam has been analyzed.
Mb = (MsMi)b = 0
309
EXAMPLE NO. 2:- SOLVING THE PREVIOUS EXAMPLE, IF B.D.S. IS A CANTILEVER

SUPPORTED AT A.
W/unit-length
A
EI=Constt.
L
3
L/4
WL
6
3/4L
0 Ms-diagram
(It creates hagging so load acts upwards)
The resultant of Ms diagram does not fall on
the centroid of analogous column.
WL
2
L/4
3
WL
6
L/2
yo
M
1
yo
Centroidal axis
Area of Ms diagram
X-section of
3
analogous column. Carrying eccentric load of WL /6

3
Eccentric load wL /6 acts on centre of
analogous column x-section with an
associated moment as well
(Eccentric load = Concentric load plus accomprying moment)
A =
bh
L WL2
WL3
=
=
(n+1)
2(2+1)
6
X =
b
L
L
=
=
(n+2)
(2+2)
4
(from nearest and)
Alternatively centroid can be located by using the following formula)

X =
MXdX
MdX
L
MdX =
o
L
MXdX =
o
WX2
W X3
WL3
dX = | =
( Same as above)
2 3 o
2
6
L
WX2
WX3
XdX =
dx
2
2
o
L
X =
W X4
WL4
| =
2
4 o
8
MXdX
MdX
310
X =
WL4
6
3
= L.
8
(WL3) 4
(from the origin of moment
expression or from farthest end)

NOTE : Moment expression is always independent of the variation of inertia.
Properties of Analogous Column Xsection :

1.
2.
3.
Area of analogous column section, A = L 1 = L

L3
Moment of inertia,
I yo yo =
12
L
Location of centroidal column axis, C =
2
3
A e=M =
WL L = WL , ( L is distance between axis yo yo and the centroid of Ms diagram

4
24
6 4
where the load equal to area of Ms diagram acts.)
(Mi)a =
P
Mc
A
I
(P is the area of Ms diagram and is acting upwards so negative

C=
L
L3
and I =
)
2
12
WL3 WL4 . L . 12
(Load P on analogous column is negative)

6.L
24 . 2 . L3
WL2
WL2
( Reaction due to MC/I would be having the same

6
4
direction at A as that due to P while at B these
2WL2 3 WL2
=
two would be opposite)
12
=
5
WL2
12
WL2
2
Ma = (Ms Mi)a
(Ms)a =
WL2
5
+
WL2
12
2
6 WL2 + 5 WL2
12
Ma =
WL2
12
311
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
P Mc
A
I
(Mi)b =
WL3
WL4 L 12
+
24 2 L3
6L
WL2 WL2
+
6
4
2WL2 + 3 WL2
12
WL2
=
12
(Ms)b = 0
=
WL2
WL2
=
12
12
Same results have been obtained but effort / time involved is more for this BDS).
Mb = (Ms Mi)b = 0
EXAMPLE NO. 3: Determine the F.E.Ms. by the method of column analogy for the following loaded
beam.
3.1 SOLUTION: CASE 1 ( WHEN BDS IS A SIMPLE BEAM )
P
b
a
L
Pab
L
+
L+a
3
Ms-diagram
L+b
3
1 (Pab)
Pab
xL= 2
2 L
e
Pab
2
1 x-section of analogous column

L
e =
L L + a 3 L 2 L 2a
L 2 a
=
=
2 3
6
6
( The eccentricity of load w.r.t

mid point of analogous column)
Pab L 2 a Pab
M=
2 6 = 12 (L 2a)
312
Properties of Analogous Column X section

.
1.
A =L1=L
2.
I =
L3
12
3.
C =
L
2
P
Mc
A
I
(Mi)a =
(Mi)a
Pab Pab
L 12
+
(L 2a)
2L
12
2 L3
Pab
Pab
+
(L 2a)
2L
2 L2
PabL + PabL 2 Pa2b

2 L2
2 PabL 2 Pa2b
2 L2
PabL Pa2b
L2
Pab (L a)
L2
a+b=L
b=La
Pab . b
=
L2
(Mi)a
Pab2
L2
(Ms) a = 0
Net moment at A = Ma = (Ms Mi) a
=0
Ma =
Pab2
L2
Pab2
L2
313
The (ve) sign means that it gives us tension at the top when applied at A.
(Mi)b =
P
MC
A
I
Pab
Pab
L 12
(L 2a)
2L
12L2
2 L3
Pab
Pab
(L 2a)
2L
2L2
PabL PabL + 2Pa2b

2L2
2Pa2b
2L2
(Mi)b =
Pa2b
L2
(Ms)b = 0
Mb = (Ms Mi)a = 0
Mb =
Pa2b
L2
Pa2b
L2
The minus sign means that it gives us tension at the top.

EXERCISE 3.2:- If B.D.S. is a cantilever supported at A:
We solve the same exercise 3.1 but with a different BDS.
P
a
EI=Constt
L
1 Pa(a) =
2
Pa 2
2
0 Ms-diagram (load equal to area of

Ms diagram acts upwards)
The upper eccentric load has been now
placed on centroid axis of analogous column
section plus accompaying moment.
Pa
L
2
a
3
2
Pa
2
e
M
L
L/2
1 x-section of analogous column under

load and accompaying moment at column
centroidal aixis.
314
e =
L
a
3L 2a
=
2
3
6
Pe = M =
Pa2 3L 2a Pa2 (3L 2a)

=
2 6
12
L3
Properties of Analogous Column section : A = L , I = 12 , C = 2

(Mi)a =
P
MC
A
I
Pa2
Pa2 (3L 2a) . L . 12
(Due to upward P= Pa2/2, reaction at A

2L
12 . 2 . L3
and B is downwards while due to moment,
Pa2
Pa2 (3L 2a)
=
reaction at B is upwards while at A it is

2L
2L2
downwards. Similar directions will have
=
Pa2L 3Pa2L + 2Pa3

2L2
4 Pa2L + 2Pa3
2L2
2Pa2L + Pa3
L2
Pa2 (a 2L)
L2
Pa2 (2L a)
L2
(Mi)a =
Pa2 (L + b)
L2
(Ms)a = Pa
Ma
= (Ms Mi)a
= Pa +
Pa2(L + b)
L2
PaL2 + Pa2 L + Pa2b

L2
the same sign to be additive or viceversa)
We can write 2L a = L + L a = L + b
315
PaL (L a) + Pa2 b
L2
PabL + Pa2 b
L2
Pab (L a)
L2
Pab . b
L2
Ma
Pab2
L2
(Mi)b
P
MC
A
I
Pa2
Pa2 (3L 2a)
+
2L
2L2
Pa2 L + 3Pa2L 2Pa3

2L2
2 Pa2 L 2Pa3
2L2
Pa2 L Pa3
L2
+Pa2 (L a )
L2
Pa2 b
L2
(Mi)b
( Same result as was obtained with a different BDS)
(Ms)b = 0
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
=0
Mb =
Pa2 b
L2
Pa2 b
L2
( Same result as obtained with a different BDS)
316
EXAMPLE NO.4: Determine the F.F.Ms. by the method of column analogy for the following loaded beam.
SOLUTION:
Choosing cantilever supported at B as BDS.
w/unit length
B
A
L/2
L/2
EI = Constt
If B.D.S. is
a cantilever
supported 0
at b.
WL3
48 L
8
0
= WL x L
4
2
Ms-diagram
2
WL
8
WL3
48
e=3/8 L
M
1
L
L
L
4L L
3L
=
=
2
8
8
8
WL3
3L
WL4
= Pe = M =
=
8
48
128
Eccentricity =
Moment
Analogous column
section.
e=
Where P = Area of Ms diagram=
WL3 bh
=
48 n+1
Properties of Analogous column section.

L3
L
and
C =
2
12
Step 1: Apply P= Area Of BMD(Ms diagram ) due to applied loads in a BDS at the center of analogous
column section i.e. at L/2 from either side.
Step 2: The accompanying moment Pe, where e is the eccentricity between mid point of analogous column
section and the point of application of area of Ms diagram, is also applied at the same point along
with P.
Step 3: Imagine reactions due to P and M=Pe. At points A and B, use appropriate signs.
P
MC
(Mi)a =
( Subtractive reaction at A due to P)

A
I
3
4
WL
WL L 12
=
+
( P is upwards, so negative. Reactions due to this P
48.L
128 2 L3
at A and B will be downwards and those due to
moment term will be upward at A and downward
WL2
3WL2
=
+
at B. Use opposite signs now for A)
48
64
4WL2 + 9WL2
=
192
+ 5 WL2
=
192
A = L, I =
317
(Ms)a = 0
( Inspect BMD drawn on simple determinate span)
Ma = (Ms Mi)a
5WL2
= 0
192
5WL2
Ma =
192
P
MC
Mc
(Mi)b =
( Additive reactions at B as use negative sign with

term)
A
I
I
2
2
4WL 9WL
=
192
13 WL2
=
192
WL2
(Ms)b =
8
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
WL2
13 WL2
24 WL2 + 13 WL2
=
+
=
8
192
192
11
2
Mb =
WL
192
The beam is now statically determinate etc.
Comment [A1]:
EXAMPLE NO. 5: Determine the F.E. Ms by the method of column analogy for the following loaded beam.
SOLUTION:
W/Unit length
B
A
L/2
EI=Constt:
bh
A= n+1
WL3
L
x
WL4
24
2
A=
=
4
192
b
X=
n+2
=
X=
L/2
L
10 0
x L (L) = WL
( 1xWxL
2
2) 3 2
24
Ms-diagram
4
WL
192
2(3+2)
L
10
WL4
192
1
L
L
L
5L L 4L 2
=
=
= L
2
10
10
10 5
4
5
WL
2 L WL
M=
192 5 = 480
e=
Analogous column section
318
Properties of Analogous column section.

A=L,
(Mi)a
(Mi)a
L3
L
, C=
2
12
P
MC
=
A
I
I=
WL4
WL5 L 12
+
(Downward reaction at A due to P and upward reaction at A due to M)
192L
480 2 L3
WL3
WL3
+
192
80
80WL3 + 192 WL3

15360
112 WL3
15360
(Mi)a =
( Divide by 16)
7 WL3
960
(Ms)a = 0
Ma
= (Ms Mi)a
Ma
= 0
(Mi)b =
7
7
WL3 =
WL3
960
960
P
MC
A
I
WL3
WL3
192
80
80 WL3 192 WL3

15360
272 WL3
15360
17 WL3
960
WL3
(Ms)b =
24
=
Mb = (Ms Mi) b
319
WL3
17
+
WL3
960
24
40 WL3 + 17 WL3
960
Mb =
23 WL3
960
Note : After these redundant end moments have been determined, the beam is statically
determinate and reactions , S.F, B.M, rotations and deflections anywhere can be
found.
7.2. STRAIGHT MEMBERS WITH VARIABLE CROSS SECTION.
EXAMPLE NO. 6: Determine the fixedend moments for the beam shown by the method of column analogy
SOLUTION:__ BDS is a simple beam.
90kn
3kn/m
A
4m
B
6m
I=2
10m
I=1
2
3.83m
Ms dia. due
EI to U.D.L.
0a
only.
Ms dia due
EI to point
load only.
3x16 = 96
8
P2
b90
0
3kn/m
45
C
8m
P4
135
4m
(reactions due to UDL)
24kn 6m 10m 24kn

M=24x6-3 x (6)2
2 90kn
=90kn-m
4m
12m
8m
P1
90x12x4
16
= 270
67.5
yo
P3
x
1/2
16+4
3 =6.67m
M=22.5x6 =135kn-m
1
M
9.15m
90x4 =22.5kn
16
(reactions due to
concentrated load)
67.5kn
6.85m
Analogous
column
x-section.
Ms
diagrams will be taken full first and then load corresponding to areas of these
EI
diagrams on left 6m distance will be subtracted. (P2 and P4 will be subtracted from P1 and P3 respectively).
The above two
In this solution, two basic determinate structures are possible.

(1) a simply supported beam.
(2) a cantilever beam.
320
This problem is different from the previous one in the following respects.
(a)
Ms diagram has to be divided by a given value of I for various portions of span.
(b)
The thickness of the analogous column X section will also vary with the variation of
inertia. Normally, the width 1/EI can be set equal to unity as was the case in previous
problem, when EI was set equal to unity.
(c)
As the dimension of the analogous column X section also varies in this case, we will have
to locate the centroidal axis of the column and determine its moment of inertia about it.
(1) SOLUTION:- By choosing a simple beam as a B.D.S.

P1 =
2
16 96 = 1024 KN ( Load corresponding to area of entire BMD due to UDL)
3
6
MdX = (24X 1.5 X2) dX (Simply supported beam moment due to UDL of left 6/ portion)
o
6
= 12X2 0.5X3 | = 12 36 0.5 216 = 432 108 = 324

o
area of abc = 324

6
MXdX = (24X 1.5X2) XdX

o
6
= (24X2 1.5X3) dX
o
6
24 3
1.5 4
1.5
X
X | = 8 63
64
3
4
4
o
= 1242
MxdX
1242
X =
=
= 3.83 m from A. (of left 6/ portion of BMD)
342
MdX
=
P2 =
1
324
( area abc) =
= 162 KN( To be subtracted from Ms diagram )
2
2
P3 =
1
16 270 = 2160 KN ( Area of BMD due to concentrated Load)
2
P4 =
1
6 67.5 = 202.5 KN ( To be subtracted from Ms diagram )
2
321
Properties of Analogous column x section.

Area = A = 1 10 +
X =
1
6 = 13 m2
2
XdA
(1 10) 5 + (1/2 6 13)
=
A
13
from R.H.S.
= 6.85 m ( From point B) . It is the location of centroidal axis YoYo.

Iy0 y0
1 103
0.5 63
+ 10(1.85)2 +
+ (0.5 6) (6.15)2 = 240 m4
12
12
by neglecting the contribution of left portion about its own centroidal axis.
=
Total load to be applied at the centroid of analogous column x section.

= P 1 + P3 P2 P4
= 1024 + 2160 162 202.5
= 2819.5 KN
Applied Moment about centroidal axis = M = + 1024 (1.15) 2160 (0.18) 162 (5.32) 202.5 (5.15)
= 1116 KNm , clockwise (Note: distance 5.32 = 9.15 3.83 (and 5.15 = 9.15 4)
The (ve) sign indicates that the net applied moment is clockwise.
P
MC
(Mi)a =
( subtractive reactions at A)
A
I
2819.5
1116 9.15
,
13
240
= + 174.34 KNm
(Ms)a = 0
=
(Preserve at A due to
Mc
is downwards so negative).
I
Ma = (Ms Mi)a = 0 174.34

= 174.34 KNm
2819.5
1116 6.85
+
, ( Note the difference in the values of C for points A and B.)
13
240
= + 248.74 KNm
(Mi)b =
(Ms)b = 0
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
= 0 248.74
= 248.74 KNm
The ve sign with Ma & Mb indicates that these cause compression on the inside when applied of these points.
322
EXAMPLE NO.7: Determine the F.E.Ms. by the method of column analogy.

SOLUTION:
1. Choosing a simple beam as a B.D.S.
90kn
4m
3kn/m
A
IC
6m
2IC
3m
3x13
8 =63.4
P2
45
1.95
b
m
2IC
2
54
d
P3
2.58
27
2.25
Ms
EI
diagram due to U.D.L.
6.5 m
90x9x4 =249.23
13
249.23 P6
Ms diagram due to point load.
2.67
124.62
EI
m
P1
2m
P5
83
41.5
(13+4)
yo
P
3 =5.67m
175.9kn 4
x
877.6kn-m
6.66m
6.34m
1/2 Analogous column

x-section
yo
3KN/m
(BDS under UDL)
13m
19.5
(M3)L
(M4)R
19.5
= 19.5 3 1.5(3)2 = 45 KNm ( 3m from A )

3
= 19.5 4 (4)2 = 54 KNm ( 4m from B)
2
90
(BDS under point load)
4m
62.307
9m
27.69
(M3)L = 27.69 3 = 83 KNm ( 3m from A)

( M4)R = 62.307 4 = 249.22 (4m from B)
3
MdX = area abc = (19.5 X 1.5 X2) dX

o
323
19.5 2
1.5 3
=
X
X | = 74.25
2
3
o
3
MXdX = (19.5 X2 1.5 X3) dX =

o
19.5 3
1.5 4
X
X |
3
4
o
= 145.12
X =
145.12
74.25
= 1.95.m ( From point A as shown )

4
Area def = MdX = (19.5X 1.5 x2) dX = 124

o
MXdX = (19.5 X2 1.5 x3) dX

o
19.5X3
1.5 4
=
X |
4
3
o
= 320
X =
320
= 2.58 m ( From point B )
124
P1 =
2
63.4 13 = 549.5 KN( Due to entire BMD due to UDL )
3
P2 =
1
1
(area abc) =
(74.25) = 37.125 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
2
P3 =
1
1
(area def) =
(124) = 62 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
2
P4 =
1
249.23 13 = 1620 KN ( Entire area of BMD due to point load)
2
P5 =
1
41.5 3 = 62.25 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
P6
1
4 124.62 = 249.23 KN ( To be subtracted )
2
324
Properties of Analogous column x section.

A =
X
X
Iyoyo
1
1
4 + 1 6 +
3 = 9.5m2
2
2
(0.5 4) 2 + (1 6) 7 + (0.5 3) (11.5)

9.5
= 6.66 ( From point B) meters
=
0.5 43
1 63
+ (0.5 4)(4.68)2 +
+ (1 6)(0.34)2
12
12
+
0.5 32
+ (1.5)(4.84)2
12
= 101.05
Total concentric load on analogous column x section to be applied at centroidal column axis )
P = P1 P2 P3 + P4 P5 P6 = 549.5 37.125 62 + 1620 62.25 249.23
= 1759 KN
Total applied moment at centroid of analogous column due to above six loads is
= 549.5 (0.16) + 37.125 (4.39) 62(4.08) + 1620 (0.99) + 62.25 (4.34) 249.2 (3.99)
= + 877.6 clockwise.
(Mi)a =
P
MC
A
I
( Reactions due to P and M are subtractive at A)
1759
877.6 6.34
9.5
101.05
= + 130 KNm
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms Mi)a = 0 130 = 130 KNm
(Mi)b =
P
MC
A
I
1759
877.6 6 6.66
+
9.5
101.05
= + 243 KNm
(Ms)b = 0
( Reactions due to P and M are additive at B)
325
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
= 0 243
Mb = 243 KNm
Now the beam has become determinate.
EXAMPLE NO. 7:- (2) Choosing cantilever supported at B as a B.D.S. Let us solve the loaded beam
shown below again.
3KN/m
A
2I
90KN
3m
2I
4m
6m
P1=1098.5
bh
A = n+1
13x253.5
P1 =
3
=1098.5
2.25m
X' =
b
=
n+2
P2=
6.75
13.5
e121.5
Ms/EI diagram due to u.d.l

(2nd degree curve)
4x360
=720
2
4
3
60.79
b
13
X' =
=
4 =3.25
n+2
bh
P4 = A= n+1 =
3.25m
P4 = 720
=1.33
126.75
3x 13x13/2
g =253.5
1.33m
180
360
Ps=360KN 1.33m
Ms/EI diagram due to point load
yo
1/2
1089.75Kn
3894KN-m
6.66m
6.34m
yo
3KN/m
BDS under UDL
P3= 367
4m
B
3m
3
Area abc = MdX =

o
10m
3 2
2 X dX
39
253.5
1/2
326
= 1.5
X3
| = 0.5 33 = 13.5
3 o
MXdX = (1.5X3)dX =
o
( Upwards to be subtracted)
43
1.5X
|
4 o
= 30.375
Location of centroidal axis from B: ( 1/2 3 + 1 6+1/2 4)X =(1/2 4 2+1 6 7+1/2 3 11.5)
9.5X= 63.25 0r X = 6.66m from B or 6.34 m from A. (already done also)
location of centroid of area abc = X
30.375
= 2.25 m ( From A)
13.5
4
Area defg = MdX = (39X 253.5 1.5X2)dX

o
Moment expression taken from B considering BDS under UDL.

4
X2
1.5 3
= 39
253.5 X
X |
3
2
o
= 734
(Area is always positive).
MXdX = (39X2 253.5X 1.5X3)dX

o
4
39X3
253.5X2
1.5X4
|
3
2
4 o
= 1292
X =
1292
734
X = + 1.76 m From B
(Centroid of area defg)
P1 = 1098.5 KN ( Area of entire BMD due to UDL )

P2 =
1
1
(area abc) = (13.5) = 6.75 K( To be subtracted)
2
2
P3
1
1
( area defg) = (734) = 367 KN( To be subtracted )
2
2
P4 = 720 KN( Area of entire BMD due to point Load )

P5 =
1
180 4 = 360 KN
2
327
Total concentric load on analogous column X section is

P = P1 + P2 + P3 P4 + P5
= 1098.5 + 6.75 + 367 720 + 360
= 1084.75 KN( It is upward so reactions due to this will be downward)
Total applied moment at centroid of column
= 6.75 (6.34 2.25) + 1098.5 (6.66 3.25)
367 (6.66 1.76) + 720 (6.66 1.33) 360 (6.66 1.33)
= 3894 KNm (anticlockwise)
Properties of Analogous column X section.

A=
1
1
4 + 1 6 + 3 = 9.5
2
2
X = 6.66 meters From B as in previous problem.

Iyoyo = 101.05 m4
(Mi)a =
as in previous problem.
P
MC
( Reactions are subtractive at A)

A
I
1084.75
3894 6.34
+
9.5
101.05
(Mi)a = + 130 KNm ( Same answer as in previous problem )

(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms Mi)a
Ma = ( 0 130) = 130 KNm
(Mi)b =
P
MC
( Reactions are additive at B )

A
I
1084.75
3894 6.66
9.5
101.05
= 370.83 KNm
=
(Ms)b = 253.5 360 = 613.5 KNm

Mb = (Ms Mi)b = 613.5 + 370.83
Mb = 243 KNm
Now beam is determinate. Please note that the final values of redundant moments at supports
remain the same for two BDS. However, amount of effort is different.
328
7.3. STIFFNESS AND CARRYOVER FACTORS FOR STRAIGHT MEMBERS

WITH CONSTANT SECTION:__
For the given beam, choose a simple beam as BDS under Ma and Mb
Ma=K a
A
Mb=(COF)Ma
a
b
A
Ma
B
EI=Constt:
B
BDS under Ma
B
BDS under Mb
Ma
EI
Mb
+
0
2/3L
1
Ma
= MaL
xLx
2EI
2
EI
MbL
2EI
2/3L
L/3
M/EI Loading on the

conjugate beam for a
single BDS.
L/3
Reaction on the
0 Mb conjugate
EI beam.
__
a
aL/2
a
1 Analogous
EI column
section.
By choosing a B.D.S. as simple beam under the action of Ma and Mb, we can verify by the use of
conjugate beam method that b = 0. In this case, we are required to find that how much rotation at end A is
required to produce the required moment Ma. In other words, a (which is in terms of Ma and Mb can be
considered as an applied load on the analogous column section). The moments computed by using the
P MC
formula
will give us the end moments directly because in this case Ms diagram will be zero.
A
I
So, M = Ms Mi = 0 Mi = Mi.
Properties of analogous column section:

A=
L
,
EI
I=
1
EI
L3
L3
=
12
12EI
factor
Downward load on analogous column = a at A.
Accompanying moment = a
and
C=
L
( About centroidal column axis )
2
L
for use in above formula.
2
Ma =
Ma
P
MC
+
A
I
a EI
+
L
a EI
3a EI
+
L
L
4 EI
a
L
Where
329
a L L 12EI
( Reactions are additive at A and are upwards)
2 2 L3
4 EI
= Ka
L
Where Ka = stiffness factor at A.

Mb =
P
MC
( Reactions are subtractive at B)

A
I
a EI
3a EI
L
L
2a EI
L
2EI
. a
L
The (ve) sign with Mb indicates that it is a (ve) moment which gives us tension at the top or
compression at the bottom.
(COF) a b Carryover factor from A to B =
Mb
2
1
=
=+
Ma
4
2
BY PUTING A EQUAL TO UNITY , MA & MB WILL BE THE STIFFNESS FACTORS AT

THE CORRESPONDING JOINTS. STIFFNESS FACTOR IS THE MOMENT REQUIRED TO
PRODUCE UNIT ROTATION.
In the onward problems of members having variable X-section, we will consider a = b = 1
radians and will apply them on points A & B on the top of the analogous column section. The resulting
moments by using the above set of formulas will give us stiffness factor and COF directly.
330
EXAMPLE NO. 8: Determine the stiffness factors at A & at B and the carry-over factors from A to B
and from B to A for the straight members with variable X-sections shown in the figure below..
SOLUTION:
Draw analogous column section and determine its properties.
A
B
2I
2I
6m
I
6m
4m
1
1
1
x6+
x6+
x4
EI
2EI
2EI
1 rad
3
6
2
=
+
+
EI EI
EI
1 A
11
= EI
2EI
1 rad
A=
7.73
B
1
EI
1
2EI
Centroidal axis
8.27m
7.73m
Taking moments of areas about point B.

(0.5 6) 3 + (6 1) 9 + (4 0.5) 14
X =
11
X = 8.27 meters from B.
I
0.5 63
1 63
+ (0.5 6) (5.27)2 +
+ (1 6)
12
12
(0.73)2 +
0.5 43
+ (0.5 4) (5.73)2
12
181.85
EI
Consider loads acting at centroid of analogous column and determine indeterminate moments at A and B.
P
MC
Ma =
A
I
=
P
MC
1 EI
7.73 7.73 EI
+
=
+
A
I
11
181.85
Ma = 0.419 EI = 0.419 16
EI
L
EI
Ma = 6.71
L
Ka = 6.71
(by multiplying and dividing RHS by L)
Mb =
EI
7.73 8.27 EI 16
11
181.85
L
= 4.17
(COF)AB =
331
(by multiplying and dividing by L)
EI
L
Mb
4.17
=
= 0.62
Ma
6.71
(COF)AB = 0.62
Now applying unit radian load at B. This eccentric load can be replaced by a concentric load Plus
accompanying moment.
1 rad
1 rad
8.27
7.73
8.27
Considering eccentric 1 rad load to be acting at centroid of section alongwith moment.

EI (8.27 7.73 EI) 16
Ma =
181.85
11
L ,
Ma = 4.17
EI
L
EI (8.27 8.27 EI) 16

Mb = +
181.85
11
L
Mb = 7.47
(multiplying and dividing by L)
(multiplying and dividing by L)
EI
L
Kb = 7.47
(COF)ba Carryover factor from B to A =
Ma
4.17
=
Mb
7.47
(COF)ba = 0.56
332
7.4. APPLICATION TO FRAMES WITH ONE AXIS OF SYMMETRY:

EXAMPLE NO. 9:- Analyze the quadrangular frame shown below by the method of column analogy.
Check the solution by using a different B.D.S.
SOLUTION:
Axis of Symmetry w.r.t. geometry
B
C
5I
12KN
6m
2I
2I
6m
A
10m
The term axis of symmetry implies that the shown frame is geometrically symmetrical (M.O.I. and
support conditions etc., are symmetrical) w.r.t. one axis as shown in the diagram. The term does not include
the loading symmetry (the loading can be and is unsymmetrical).
Choosing the B.D.S. as a cantilever supported. at A.
B
12KN
C
5I
6m 2I
6m
2I
A
72 kN-m
10m
Ms-diagram
5I
12 kN-m
6m 2I
6m 2I
2
A
Force=108
EI
36
EI
Ms - Diagram
EI
333
Ms
giving tension
EI
on outside will act upwards on the analogous column section. Sketch analogous column section and place
load.
According to our sign convention for column analogy, the loading arising out of negative
C 1
5
y=2.27m
5m
Mxx
x
3.73m
108
EI
5m
x
Myy
2m
A
D
1
2
Properties of Analogous Column Section:
(1)
A =
1 6 2 + 1 10 = 8
5
EI
2
5 10 10 + 2 2 6 3 EI
=
= 2.27 m about line BC. (see diagram)
8
EI
1/2
10 (1/5)3
0.5 63 1
Ixx = 2
+ (0.2 10) (2.27)2
+ 6 x (0.73)2 +
12
12
2
=
Iyy =
31.51 4
m
EI
0.2 103
6 0.53
2
+ 2
12
12 + (6 0.5) (5)
167 4
m
EI
187
clockwise.
EI
540
Myy = 108 5
=
clockwise.
EI
Applying the formulae in a tabular form for all points. Imagine the direction of reactions
at exterior frame points due to loads and moments.
Ma = ( Ms Mi)a
P
Mx y
My X
( Mi)a =
A
Ix
Iy
Mxx = 108 1.73 =
334
POINT
Ms
P/A
A
B
C
D
72
0
0
0
13.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
Mx y
Ix
22.14
+ 13.47
+ 13.47
22.14
My X
Iy
16.17
16.17
+ 16.17
+ 16.17
Mi
51.81
16.20
+ 16.14
19.47
M=
MsMi
20.19
+ 16.20
16.14
+ 19.47
Note: Imagine the direction of reaction due to P, Mx and My at all points A, B, C and P. Use
appropriate signs. Repeat the analysis by choosing a different BDS yourself.
EXAMPLE NO. 10: Analyze the quadrangular frame shown by the method of column analogy.
3KN/m
5I
6m
2I
2I
6m
D
10m
Choosing B.D.S. as a cantilever supported at A.

3KN/m
C
150K n-m
D
30
BDS under loads
335
Draw Msdiagram by parts and then superimpose for convenience and clarity.
Free Body Diagrams
30
3 KN/m
150
B
150
30 B
B
150
150
A
150
D
150
30
3KN/m
150
B
150
150
Ms-Diagram
100
2.5
75
B
30
450
Ms - Diagram
EI
6m
3m
For Portion BC
bb
10 30
300
Area =
=
=
= 100
n+1
2+1
3
b
10
10
X' =
=
=
= 2.5 from B.
n+2
2+2
4
75
A
Note:
10m
As BMD on portions BC and AB are negative the loads equal to their areas will act upwards.
M
Now sketch analogous column section carrying loads arising from contributions.
EI
336
2.25m
100
y
C
B
450
2.275m
1/5
Mx
6m
0.725m
My
3.725
3m
1/2
1/2
10m
Analogus colmun section

y
Properties of analogous column section:

1
8
1
A = 2 6 + 10 =
(as before)
EI
2 5
y =
1 10 1 + 2 6 1 3
5
10
2
8
= 2.275 about line BC (as before)
1
1
1
1 3
Ix = 2 63 + 6 (0.725)2 + 10 + 10 (2.275)2
5
2
2

5
31.51 4
m
EI
(as before)
0.2 103
6 0.53
2
Iy = 2
12
12 + (6 0.5) 5 +
=
166.79 4
m (as before)
EI
Mx = 450 0.725 100 2.275 = 95.75 KNm Clockwise

My = 450 5 + 100 2.75 = 2525 KNm clockwise.
P = 100 + 450 = 550 KN
Now this eccentric load P and MX and My are placed on column centroid.
Applying the formulae in a tabular form.
Ma = ( Ms Mi)a
and
( Mi)a =
337
P
Mx y
My x
A
Ix
Iy
POINT
Ms
P/A
A
B
C
D
150
150
0
0
68.75
68.75
68.75
68.75
Mx . y
Ix
11.32
+ 6.91
+ 6.91
11.32
My . x
Iy
75.69
75.69
+ 75.69
+ 75.69
Mi
155.76
137.53
13.85
4.38
M=
MsMi
5.76
12.47
13.85
4.38
EXAMPLE NO. 4: Determine stiffness factors corresponding to each end and carry-over factors in both
directions of the following beam.
SOLUTION:
A
B
5I
2I
4I
2m
1.5m
2m
I
1m
3I
2m
Sketch analogous column section.

o
1/5
1/EI
4.74m
1/3EI
3.76m
yo
Properties of Analogous Column Section :

A=
1
1
1
1
2 + 1.5 + 2 + 1 1 + 2
5
2
4
3
A=
3.32
EI
Taking moment about B of various segments of column section.

1
1
1
1
2 1 + 1 1 2.5 +
2 4 + 1.5 5.75 + 2 7.5
4
2
5
3
X =
3.32
X =
12.4725
3.32
X = 3.76 m from B.
338
Iyoyo =
1 23 1
1 13
+ 2 (2.76)2 +
+ (1 1)(2.26)2
3 12 3
12
1 (2)3
4
1 (1.5)3
2
1
2
+
+ 2(0.24) +
12
12
4
1 (2)3
5
1
1
+ 1.5 (1.99)2 +
+ 2(3.74)2
12
2
5
=
1.
19.53
EI
Determination of stiffness factor at A (ka) and carry-over factor from A to B. Apply unit load at
A and then shift it along with moment to centroidal axis of column as shown below:
1 rad
8.5m
1
=
4.74
4.74
3.76
P MC
Ma =
A
I
EI
EI
=1
+ 4.74 4.74
3.32
19.53
= 1.45 EI
,
multiply and divide by L
EI
EI
Ma = 1.45 8.5 = 12.33
L
L
Ka = 12.33
EI
4.74 3.26 EI
Mb =
3.32
19.53
= 0.61 EI = 0.61 8.5
EI
EI
= 5.19
L
L
EI
Mb = 5.19
L
Mb
5.19
(COF)a b =
=
= 0.42
Ma
12.33
(COF)a b = 0.42
(multiply and divide by L)
2.
339
Determination of stiffness factor at B (Kb) and carry-over from B to A. Apply a unit load at B and
them shift it along with moment to centroidal axis of column as shown below:
Ma
P
Mc
A
I
1 rad
8.5m
1
=
3.76
4.74
Ma
= 0.61 8.5
multiply and divide by L.
EI
EI
= 5.19
L
L
P
Mc
A
I
EI
3.76 3.76 EI
+
3.22
19.53
=1..03 EI = 1.03
Mb
3.76
EI
3.76 4.74 EI
3.32
19.53
= 0.61EI
Mb
= 8.76
EI
8.5
L
EI
L
Kb = 8.76
(COF)b a =
Ma
5.19
=
= 0.6
Mb
8.76
(COF) b a = 0.6
multiply and dividing by L.
340
EXAMPLE NO.12: Analyze the following gable frame by column analogy method.
SOLUTION :
3 kN/m
3m
3I
3I
7m
14 m
Choosing a simple frame as BDS

3kN/m
7 .62
73.5
73.5
7.62
C
D
21
21
E
Ms-diagram
B.D.S under loads
6
2.8
24.5 24.5
C
x
B
6
6 2.8
4.7
4.375
Ms diagram
EI
341
Taking the B.D.S. as a simply supported beam.

MX
= 21X 1.5X2
MX
= Mc at X = 7m
Mc
= 21 7 1.5 X 72
taking X horizontally.
= 73.5 KNm
Sin
3
= 0.394
7.62
Cos
7
= 0.919
7.62
P1 = P2 =
2
24.5 7.62 = 124.46
3
P = P1 + P2 = 248.92
7
1.5 3
21
MX dX = (21 X 1.5X2) dX = X2
X = 343
3
2
o
o
7
1.5 4
21
(MX)X dX = (21 X2 1.5X3)dX = X3
X
4
3
o
o
= 7 73
X =
1.5
74 = 1500.625
4
(MX) X dX
1500.625
=
343
MX dX
X = 4.375 Horizontally from D or B. Shift it on the inclined surface.

Cos =
a=
4.375
a
4.375
4.375
=
0.919
Cos
a = 4.76
342
Now draw analogous column section and place loads on top of it.
124.46
124.46
2.8
6
3m
B
4.7
6
C
2.17 m
1/3
X
Mx
4.83 m
E
1
PROPERTIES OF ANALOGOUS COLUMN SECTION

1
A = 2 (1 7) + 2 7.62= 19.08 m2
3
2[(1 7) 3.5] + 2
3 7.62 8.5 49 + 43 18
Y =
19.08
Y = 4.83 m from A or E
1 73
2
Ix = 2
12 + (1 7) (4.83 3.5)
19.08
1 (7.62)3
1
3
+2
( 0.394 )2 + (7.62) ( 1.5 + 2.17)2 ,
3
12
the first term in second square bracket is

So
Now
bL3
Sin2
12
= 154.17
Ix 154 m4
7 13
2
Iy = 2
12 + (7 1) 7
1 (7.62)3
1
3
+2
(0.919 )2 + 7.62 (3.5)2 ,
3
12
343
the first term in second square bracket is
bL3
Cos2
12
=770.16
Iy 770 m4
So
Total load on centroid of analogous column

P = P1 + P2 = 124.46 + 124.46 = 248.92 KN
Mx = 2 [124.46 4.05 ] , 4.05 = 2.17 + 4.76 Sin = 2.17 + 4.76 0.394.
Mx = 1007 (clockwise).
My = 0 (because moments due to two loads cancel out)
Applying the general formulae in a tabular form for all points of frame.
Ma = ( Ms Mi)a
P
Mx y
My X
( Mi)a =
A
Ix
Iy
Point
A
B
C
D
E
Ms
(A)
P/A
(1)
0
0
+ 73.5
0
0
+ 13.05
+ 13.05
+ 13.05
+ 13.05
+ 13.05
Mx .Y
Ix
(2)
31.58
+ 14.19
+ 33.81
+ 14.19
31.58
My .X
Iy
(3)
0
0
0
0
0
(B)=Mi
(1)+(2)
+(3)
18.53
+ 27.24
+ 46.86
+ 27.24
18.53
M=
Col (A)(B)
+ 18.53
27.24
+26.64
27.24
+ 18.53
EXAMPLE NO. 13:- Analyze the frame shown in fig below by Column Analogy Method.
10kN
B
C
3I
2kN/m
2I
2I
4m
D
3m
Choosing the B.D.S. as a cantilever supported at A.
344
MA = 10 x 1.5 + 2 x 4 x
4
2
MA = 31 KNm
10 kN
B
2kN/m
A
31
8
10
B.D.S
Draw Free Body Diagrams and sketch composite BMD:

10
15
1.5
1.5
10
C
10
15
15
15
2kN/m
4m
no B.M.D
A
8
31
31
10
10
10
7.5
15
5
15
,
31
Ms-diagram
15.5
Ms diagram
EI
345
Properties Of Analogous Column Section :

Sketch analogous column section and show loads on it. BMD along column AB is split into a rectangle and
other second degree curve.
1
1
A = 4 2 + 3 = 5 m2
2
3
3 1 1 + 2 1 4 2
3 6
2
Y =
5
Y = 1.63 m From line BC
3
1 3
0.5 + 4 + (0.5 4) (0.37)2
3
12
3
1
Ix =
+ 3 (1.63)2 + 2
12
12
3
= 8.55 m4
1
4 0.53
2
Iy = (3)3 + 2
12 + (4 0.5) (1.5)
3
= 9.83 m4
P1
0.5
1.0
C
1/3
1,63 m
P2
4m
0.37
P3
2.37 m
I
D
y
3m
346
Total load on top of analogous column section acting at the centroid.

P = 3.75 + 30 + 10.67 = 44.42 KN upward.
P1 =
1
1.5 5 = 3.75, P2 = 7.5 4 = 30,
2
X' =
4
= 1 meters for A.
4
P3 =
4 7.5
= 10
2+1
MX = 3.75 x 1.63 + 30 x 0.37 + 10.67 x 1.37

= 19.61 KN-m clockwise.
My = 10.67 1.5 + 30 1.5 + 3.75 1 = 64.76 clockwise.
Applying the general formulae in a tabular form for all points of frame.
Ma = ( Ms Mi)a
P Mx y
My X
( Mi)a =
A
Ix
Iy
Point
A
B
C
D
Ms
P/A
(1)
31
15
0
0
8.88
8.88
8.88
8.88
Mx
.y
Ix
(2)
5.44
+ 3.74
+ 3.74
5.44
My
.X
Iy
(3)
9.88
9.88
+ 9.88
+ 9.88
Mi
(1)+(2)
+ (3)
24.2
15.02
+ 4.74
4.44
M
Ms Mi
6.8
+ 0.02
4.74
+ 4.44
EXAMPLE NO. 14:- Analyze the following beam by column analogy method.
SOLUTION :
Choosing B.D.S as cantilever supported at B
10kN
3kN/m
3I
1.5I
Ms-diagram
due to u.d.l. only
96
4m
2m
2m
(a)
(b)
6
32
24
1m
( c)
96
72
1.33
347
40 Ms diagram due to concentrated load only

Slectch analogous column section and determine its proteins
P1 2.14
2c
1.5m 6
P2=1.33
16
e
24
24
72
3.21m
Ms-diagram
EI due to u.d.l
P3=18.67
P4=80
1.33
40
MS diagram due to point load.
EI
Slectch analogous column section and determine its properties.
1.5
P2
P3
P6
2.14
P4
1/1.5
1/3
4.78
yo
3.21
3.22
Analogous
1 column
section
1.33
24 4
48 4
+
+ 24 4 = 224 KN. Corresponding to full Ms diagram, due to u.d.l.
3
2
Location of P1 from B
224 X = 96 1.33 + 96 2 + 32 5
X = 2.14 meters
1
P4 =
4 40 = 80 KN,
Corresponding to full Ms diagram due to point load.
2
Note: Area of 32 and its location of Ms diagram due to u.d.l. has been calculate d by formula e used in
moment area Theorems.
2
2
1.5 X3
area (abc) = MXdX = 1.5X2 dX =
= 4
3
o
o
P1 =
1.5 X4
(MX) X dX = 1.5X3dX =
4 o = 6
o
6
X =
= 1.5m from A
4
2
area (bcde) = (MX) dX = 1.5X2dX 1.5 X2 dX

o
348
= 1.5
X3
X3
1.5 = 28
3 o
3 o
(MX)X dX = 1.5 X3dX 1.5 X3dX = 90

o
X =
90
28
= 3.21 meters from A (centroid of area bcde)

P3 =
1
1
1
1
(area bcde) =
(28) = 18.67 KN , P2 = area abc = 4 = 1.33
1.5
1.5
3
3
P4 = 80 KN
Total concentric load on analogous column section.

P = P1 + P2 + P3 P4
= 224 + 1.33 + 18.67 80
= 284 KN (upward)
Total applied moment = M = 224 1.68 80 1.89 18.67 1.57 1.33 33 3.28
= 426.79 KN-m (It means counter clockwise)
This total load P and M will now act at centroid of analogous column section.
Properties of Analogous Column Section.

A=
1
1
2+
2+14=6
3
1.5
(1 4) 2 + 2
X =
1
1
5 + 2 7
1.5
3
6
= 3.22 from B.
1 23
1.5
1 43
1
2
2
Iyoyo =
+ (1 4)(1.22) +
+
12
12
1.5 2 (1.78)
349
1 23
3
1
+
+ 2 (3.78)2
12
3
12
= 25.70 m4
(Mi)a =
P Mc
A
I
284
426.79 4.78
+
6
25.7
= + 32.05 KN-m
(Ms)a = 0
Ma = (Ms Mi)a = 0 32.05
Ma = 32.05 KNm
P Mc
A
I
(Mi)b =
284
426.79 3.22
6
25.7
= 100.81
(Ms)b = 72 40 = 112
Mb = (Ms Mi)b
= 112 + 100.81
Mb = 11.19 KNm
The beam has been analyzed. It is now statically determinate.
350
CHAPTER EI GHT
8. PL ASTI C ANAL YSI S OF STEEL STRUCTURES
8.1. I ntr oduction:
Although the terms Plastic analysis and design normally apply to such procedures for steel
structures within the yield flow region, at almost constant stress, however the Idea may also be applied to
reinforced concrete structures which are designed to behave elastically in a ductile fashion at ultimate
loads near yielding of reinforcement.
The true stress-strain curve for a low grade structural steel is shown in fig. 1 while an idealized
one is shown in fig. 2 which forms the basis of Plastic Analysis and Design.
E
B
F
f
Stress
f
Stress
AB-Elastic
BC-Yeild points
CD-Plastic Strain flow
DE-Strainhardening
EF-Failure
Strain
Fig 1:
(B,C) Plastic
Elastic
Strain
Fig 2:
8.2. Advantages of Plastic Analysis

1.
Relatively simpler procedures are involved.
2.
Ultimate loads for structures and their components may be determined.
3.
Sequence and final mode of failure may be known and the capacity at relevant stages may be
determined.
8.3. Assumptions in Plastic bending
1.
The material is homogeneous and isotropic.
2.
Member Cross-section is symmetrical about the axis at right angles to the axis of bending.
3.
Cross-section which were plane before bending remain plane after bending.
4.
The value of modulus of Elasticity of the material remains the same in tension as well as in
compression.
5.
Effects of temperature, fatigue, shear and axial force are neglected.
6.
Idealized bi-linear stress-strain curve applies.
8.4. Number of Plastic Hinges
The number of Plastic Hinges required to convert a structure or a member into a mechanism is
one more than the degree of indeterminacy in terms of redundant moments usually. Thus a determinate
structure requires only one more plastic hinge to become a mechanism, a stage where it deflects and
rotates continuously at constant load and acquires final collapse.
So Mathematically
N = n+ 1
where N = Total number of Plastic hinges required to convert a structure into a mechanism.
and
n = degree of indeterminacy of structure in terms of unknown redundant moments.
PLASTIC ANALYSIS METHOD
351
8.5. Plastic Hinge.

It is that cross-section of a member where bending stresses are equal to yield stresses
= y= fy. It has finite dimensions.
My
MpC
Mp
From bending equation =
or y =
or y =
so Hp = Zp y
I
I
Zp
M
I
I
From elastic bending

=
or
= M
where
= Z
y
I
y
y
So M= Z and Z is elastic section modules and is equal to the first moment of area about N.A
Z = A ydA.
8.6. Plastic moment of a r ectangular section.
Consider a simple rectangular beam subject to increasing bending moment at the centre. Various
stress-strain stages are encountered as shown below.
B
<
<y
= y
C
=y
= y
>y
>>y
= y
C
2D
3
D
2
T
case A: M<My
> y
= y
case B: M=My case C
T
= y
case D
>>y
Var ious Str ess-str ain distr ibutions

Case A - Stresses and strains are within elastic range.
Case B - Stresses and strains at yield levels only at extreme fibers
Case C - Ingress of yielding within depth of section.
Case D - Full plastification of section.
On the onset of yielding = y and M = My = y.Z.
On full plastification
= y and M = Mp = y.Zp.
or Zp = A yda (First moment of area about equal area axis).
All compact sections as defined in AISC manual will develop full plastification under increasing
loads realizing Mp. However local buckling of the compression flange before yielding has to be avoided
by providing adequate lateral support and by applying width / thickness checks as was done during the
coverage of subject of steel structures design.
Case B. Str esses and Str ains at yield at extr eme fibr es only.
Consult corresponding stress and strain blocks.
M = Total compression la = Area la
where Area
= Area in compression (from stress block).
= Average compression stress.

la
= Lever arm i.e. distance b/w total compressive and tensile forces.
BD
y + o
2
So
M
=
2 2 . 3 D
352
In general
M = Cjd or Tjd , where C and T are total compressive and tensile forces respectively
which have to be equal for internal force equilibrium.
BD2
BD2
, but
=Z
6
6
or
My
= y
So
My
= y.Z.
3
Z= Elastic Section modules = I = BD D
C
12
2
BD2
6
Case D: Full plastification, = y upto equal ar ea axis.

M
= Cla =
= y .
B. D (y) D
2
2
BD2
4
or
Zp =
where la is lever arm

BD2
, where ZP = Plastic section Modules.
4
A
[y1 + y2] (first moment of areas about equal area axis)
2
(distance from equal area axis to the centroids of two portions of area.)
or Mp = y . Zp
or Zp =
and y1 + y2 = D/2
Case C: M oment Capacity in Elasto - Plastic r ange. Extreme fibres have yielded and the yielding
ingresses in the section as shown by the stress distribution.
y
1
D
2
C1
C2
la2
D
2
where
la1 = lever axis b/w C1 and T1
la2 = lever axis b/w C2 and T2
C1 = Av.stress X area of element No.1
C2 = Av-stress acting on element No.2 x
la1
area of element 2.
T2
2
1
T1
y
case C : Stress-Distribution
DZ
2
D
= [ C1la1 + C2 . la2 ] (A) , la1= Z+
2 = +Z
2
C1
D
= (y) B Z
2
C2
2
2
4
la2 = Z 2 = Z
3
3
y + o Z . B = y ZB and so, putting values of C1 , C2 la1 and la2 in equation A above.

2
2
= y . B
= y . B
353
D
4
D
Z.B
2 Z 2 + Z + y 2 x 3 Z
D2
2
4 Z +
D2
2
= y . B
4 Z +
D2 Z 2
= y . B
4 3
Mr
= M r = y . B
Mp
Simplifying
2
y BZ 2
3
2 2
Z
3
,
where M r is moment of resistance.
3D2 4Z 2
12
__
For rectangular section.
Calculating on similar lines, Plastic moment for various shapes can be calculated.
8.7. Shape Factor ()
It is the ratio of full plastic moment Mp to the yield moment My. It depends on the shape of
Cross-section for a given material.
Mp y . Zp
Zp
Shape Factor = =
=
or
=
(Ratio of Plastic section modulus to
My
Z
y . Z
Elastic Section Modulus).
8.8. Calculation of Shape Factor for differ ent Sections.
B
(1)
B
D/2
y1
dy
y
D
(2)
8.8.1
So
y2
For r ectangular section.

BD3
I
D
I
=
,
= Z , C=
12
C
2
BD3 2
BD2
Z
=
=
6
12 D
A
BD D D
Zp
=
[y1 + y2] =
+
2
2 4
4
or alternatively, Zp =
ydA.
D/2
BD2
=
4
= 2
y . Bdy
o
D/2
Zp
BD2 6
6
=
=
=
= 1.5
Z
4
4 BD2
= 2B
o
ydy.
= 1.5
or Zp =
BD2
4
so [Mp is 1.5 times My]
354
8.8.2
For Cir cular Cr oss-section

D4
2
I
=
,
A =
D
4
64
I
D4
2
D3
Z
=
=
=
,
C
D
64
32
A
Zp
=
[y1 + y2]
2
b
dy
y
D
(a) Cross-Section
D2 2D 2D
+
,
8 3
3
D3
=
6
=
Zp
(b) Strain
Distribution
(c) Stress at full

plastification Distribution
D
4r
4D
2D
, y1 =
=
=
2
3
3 2
3
3
Zp
D 32
32
=
=
=
1.7
Z
6 D3
6
= 1.7 , [Mp is 1.7 times My]
r=
8.8.3 Hollow Cir cular Section
2D
3
2d
3
d
D
I
C
Z min =
Zp =
=
Zp =
(D4 d4)
64
2
Z min =
(D4 d4) .
64
D
(D4 d4)
32D
A
[ y1 + y2] , putting values.
2
2 (D3 d3)
2
(D d2) 2
8
3 (D2 d2)
D3 d3
6
putting values
Ay = A 1y1 + A 2y2
D2 2D d2
2d
(D2 d2) y =
.
8
8
8
3
3
D3 d3
(D2 d2) y =
8
I2 12
355
32D
D3 d3
6 (D4 d4) Putting Z and Z p
32 D(D3 d3)
6 (D4 d4)
8 (D3 d3)
12 (D2 d2)
2 (D3 d3)
y =
3 D2 d2
for N-A or equal area axis.
y =
For D = 10
d = 8
= 1.403
For I - Section:
B
y
C1
b/2
D
C2
la
2
d
la
1
T2
T1
stress
distribution
strain
distribution
As = Z =
I
Z
Z
I
D
and C =
C
2
(BD3 bd3)
(BD3 bd3)
,
My = y . Z = y
, Putting value of Z from (1)
12
6D
3
3
I
(BD bd ) 2
=
=
Mp = C1 la1 + C2 la2
C
12
D
BD3 bd3
d
D-d
=
(1)
la1= +
6D
2
2 2 = (D+ d)/2,
D
Dd
d
la2 =
2 2 2= 2
(D d) (D + d)
d
d
Mp= y . B
+ y . (B b)
2
2
2
2
B
d
2
Mp = y (D2 d2) +
(B b)
4
4
Mp
y(BD2 bd2)
BD
=
My
4
y(BD3 bd3)
3D (BD2 bd2)
=
if
2 (BD3 bd3)
=
Mp =
BD2 bd2
4
B = 4
b = 3.75
D = 8
, shape factor = 1.160
d = 7.5
356
Similarly for T-section, Equilateral Triangle and hollow rectangular section the values of shapefactor are 1.794, 2.343 and 1.29 respectively. For diamond shape its value is 2.0.
8.9. Significance of Shape Factor
Zp is First moment of area about equal area axis.
1.
It gives an indication of reserve capacity of a section from on set of yielding at extreme fibres
to full plastification.
2.
If My is known,, Mp may be calculated.
3.
A section with higher shape factor gives a longer warning before collapse.
4.
A section with higher shape factor is more ductile and gives greater deflection at collapse.
5.
Greater is the value, greater is collapse load factor c
8.10. Collapse load of a str uctur e.
Collapse load is found for a structure by investigating various possible collapse mechanisms of
a structure under conceivable load systems. For any given mechanism, possible plastic hinge locations
are determined by noting the types of loads and support conditions remembering that under increasing
loads, the plastic hinges would form in a sequence defined by corresponding elastic moments at the
possible plastic hinge locations. Collapse loads ar e usually the applied loads multiplied by collapse
load factor c . c is defined as the r atio of the collapse load to the wor king load acting on any
str uctur e / element . The value of c may indicate a margin of safety for various collapse mechanisms
and steps can be taken in advance to strengthen the weaker structural elements before erection. Benefit of
` strength reserve is obtained due to increased moments of resistance due to plastification. The reserve
of strength is large if the section widens out near the vicinity of neutral surface.
8.11. Assumptions made in Plastic Theor y.
The plastic analysis is primarily based on following assumptions.
1.
For prismatic members,, the value of Mp is independent of magnitude of bending moment.
2.
The length of plastic hinge is limited to a point.
3.
Material is very ductile and is capable of undergoing large rotations / curvatures at the
constant moment without breaking.
4.
The presence of axial force and shear force does not change the value of Mp.
5.
The structure remains stable until the formation of last plastic hinge and serviceability would
not be impaired till such time.
6.
Loads acting on structure are assumed to increase in proportion to each other.
7.
Continuity of each joint is assumed.
8.12. Fundamental Theor ems of Plastic Collapse.

When degree of redundancy increases beyond 2 or 3 in situations where collapse mechanism is
not very clear, we try to pick up collapse load with the help of three fundamental theorems.
a.
Lower bound theorem or static theorem.
b.
Upper bound theorem or kinematic theorem.
c.
Uniqueness theorem.
357
8.12.1 Lower Bound theor em

A Load computed on the basis of bending moment distribution in which moment nowhere
exceeds Mp is either equal to or less than the true collapse load .
8.12.2 Upper bound theor em
A load computed on the basis of an assumed mechanism is either equal to or greater than true
collapse load . When several mechanisms are tried, the true collapse load will the smallest of them.
8.12.3. Uniqueness theor em
A load computed on the basis of bending moment distribution which satisfies both plastic
moment and mechanism conditions is true plastic collapse load .
Moment
Kinematic
Theorems.
True
Mp
Static
Theorems.
Curvature.
8.13. M ethods of analysis

Basically there are two methods of analysis.
a.
Equilibrium Method.
b.
Mechanism Method.
8.13.1. Equilibr ium M ethod

Normally a free bending moment diagram on simple span due to applied loads is drawn and
B.M.D due to reactants is superimposed on this with due regard to their signs leaving the net moment
distributed. Then by making the moment values equal to Mp values at the known potential plastic hinge
locations, a revised diagram can be drawn. Then by splitting the simple span moment due to applied
loads in terms of relevant Mp, the values of collapse load can be determined.
8.13.2. M echanism M ethod
In this approach, a mechanism is assumed and plastic hinges are inserted at potential plastic
hinge locations. At plastic hinges the corresponding rotations and deflections are computed to write work
equations which may be written as follows.
Work done by external loads = Actual loads x Average displacements = Work absorbed at
Plastic hinges (internal work done) = Mp.
358

W. = Mp . .
Typically
In both methods, the last step is usually to check that M < Mp at all sections.
8.14. Values of Collapse loads for differ ent loaded str uctur es.
Beam Under loads
Collapse load Pc or Wc
P
L/2
L/2
Mp
L
Mp
L
16
2/3L
Mp
L
Mp
L
Mp
L
L/2
Mp
L2
11.65
L/
3
Mp
L2
Mp
L
Mp
L
P
L/3
Mp
L2
359
8.15. I n or der to explain the above pr ocedur e, L et us solve examples.

Analysis of a Continuous beam by M echanism M ethod.
EXAM PL E NO. 1:- Consider the beam loaded as shown. Three independent possible collapse
mechanisms along with potential plastic hinge locations are shown.
SOL UTI ON: degree of indeterminacy in terms
of moments = n = 2 ( moments at A and B)
No of Plastic hinges required = 2 + 1 = 3
20K
20K
20K
4
12
First possible beam mechanism for span AB.

/2
4
1.5
Second possible beam mechanism for span AB.

2
8
3
Possible beam mechanism for span BC

Real Hinge
Write work equations for all mechanisms and find corresponding Mp values.
M echanism (1)
20 4 + 20 2
120
Mp
= Mp . + Mp.1.5 + Mp
= 3 Mp
= 40 K-ft.
M echanism (2)
20 4 + 20 8 = Mp . + Mp.3 + Mp . 2
360

240
Mp
= 6 Mp
= 40 K-ft
M echanism (3)
20 4
= Mp. + Mp . 2 + 0
80
= 3 Mp .
Mp
= 26.67 K-ft.
Minimum Collapse load or Max. Mp will be the collapse mechanism
So
Mp
= 40 K-ft.( Corresponding to mechanisms 1 and 2)
8.16. EXAM PL E NO.2:-Find the collapse load for the following continuous beam loaded as shown.
SOL UTI ON:
Do elastic analysis by three moment equation to find Mb and Mc. Apply the equation
twice to spans AB and BC and then BC and CD. (In this case, noting symmetry and concluding that
Mb = Mc, only one application would yield results).
B
2T/m
8m
6m
8m
16
16
36
85.33
85.33
4m
3m
(Simple span B.M.D. due to loads)
By using three-moment equation

8 Ma + 2Mb 8 + 6 + Mc 6 = 6 85.33 4 6 36 3
8
6
I
I I
I
Ma
= 0 , 34 Mb = 364 So Mb = Mc = 10.70 T m ( By symmetry)
8.17. Maximum bending moment in a member car r ying UDL
ML
W=wL
L/2
L/2
R
1
R2
ML
M
R
Mc
Mmax
B.M.D
yo
xo
zo
Consider a general frame element subjected to Udl over its span alongwith end moments plot BMD.
361
After derivation we find the location of maximum moments X o, Y o and M C.

In some books, plastic huge is stated to form in the centre of span. However, the formulae given below
are very precise and give correct location of plastic huges due to u.d.l.
Where, ML = Moment at left of element
MR = Moment at right of element
MC = Moment at centre of element
X o , Z o , yo = Location of max. moment from left, right and centre respectively as shown on BMD.
MR ML
10.70 o
=
2x8
WL
yo
MC
MC
= 21.35 T m
WL 2
(M R M L )
+
8
2
= 0.6687 m
=
2(8)2
+
8
WL . yo
2L
= Mc +
M max
= 21.79 T m
Xo
10.70
2
(2)
M max
(1)
4M C 3M R M L
WL
= 21.35 +
2 8 (0.6687)
2x8
4 (21.35) 3 (10.7) 0
= at 3.313 m from A and D.
28
Plastic hinges would form first at a distance X o = 3.313 m from points A and D and then at
points B and C.
Now determine collapse load by mechanism method.
SOL UTI ON: No internal work is absorbed at real hinges.
362
8m
2T/m
8m
First possible collapse mechanism of span AB.

Real Hinge
3.13m
3.13
0.707
1.707
Second possible collapse mechanism of span AB.
For fir st M echanism

(2 8)
So
Mp
3.313
= Mp 1.707 + 0.707 Mp + 0
2
= 10.98 T m
For second M echanism

Mp . + Mp . + Mp . 2 = (2 6)
30
2
Mp = 4.5 T m
So
Mp = 10.98 T m
or
Load factor =
Mp
10.98
8.18. Types of Collapse

Three types of collapses are possible as described below.
1.
Complete collapse
2.
Partial collapse
3.
Over complete collapse.
8.18.1. Complete Collapse

If in a structure, there are R redundancies and collapse mechanism contains (R + 1) plastic
hinges, it is called a complete collapse provided the structure is statically determinate at collapse.
363
8.18.2. Par tial Collapse:

If in a structure, the number of plastic hinges formed at collapse do not render the structure as
statically determinate it is called a partial collapse.
8.18.3. Over Complete Collapse
If in a structure there are two or more mechanisms which give the same value of collapse load
(or collapse load factor c) then this type of collapse is known as overcomplete collapse.
8.19. Analysis of Fr ames
In portal frames, three types of mechanisms are possible.
1.
Beam Mechanisms (due to gravity loads)
2.
Sway Mechanisms (due to lateral loads).
3.
Combined Mechanisms (both loads).
Step 1:
Draw frame in thickness in two lines i.e., solid lines and broken lines. Solid lines are outside
of frame and broken lines are inside of frame.
Step 2: Nodal moments creating compression on out sides are positive or vice-versa.
+
Outside
Inside
Outside
Step 3: Hinge cancellation at joints occur when rotations of different signs are considered and
mechanisms are combined.
EXAM PL E NO. 3:- Analyse the frame shown below
SOL UTI ON:
1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are possible plastic Hinge locations. Three independent mechanisms are possible
Beam mechanisms, Sway mechanisms and Combined mechanisms are possible.
364
20
2
15
5
3
5
5
1. Beam M echanism
Write work equation ( Fig A )
20 .5 = M2 ( ) + M3 (2 ) + M4 ( )
100 = M2 + 2M3 M4 by taking as common above.
(1)
Remember that wor k is always positive.
putting M2 = Mp
M3 = Mp
M4 = Mp in equation (1), we have
100 = 4 Mp or [ = 0.04 Mp]
20
2
5
3
1
5
(a) Beam mechanism of element 2-4
20
5
4
2
+
3
+
1
(b) Sway Mechanism of Columns
15
365
20
-2
5
15
5
3
+
1
(c) = a + b combined mechanism
2. Sway M echanism:
15 .5 = M1( ) + M2 + M4 ( ) + M5 ()
75
= M1 + M2 M4 + M5
M1, M2, M4 and M5 are all equal to Mp
75
= 4 Mp or [ = 0.053 Mp]
(2)
3. Combined M echanism:
20 . 5 + 15 . 5 = M1 () + M2 (0) + M3 (2 ) + M4 ( 2 ) + M5 ()
175
= M1 + 2M3 2 M4 + M5
(3)
all these moments are equal to Mp
175
= 6 Mp , [ = 0.034 Mp ] or Mp = 29.15 .
Keeping in mind the definition of a true mechanism [one giving highest value of Mp in terms of
Pc or lowest value of Pc in terms of Mp or ]
Combined mechanism is the true collapse mechanism.
So
= 0.0343 Mp
It will be a complete collapse if the structure is statically determinate and moment anywhere
does not exceed Mp value since there are n + 1 plastic hinges in the true collapse mechanism
Note: M oment checks ar e nor mally applied at those plastic hinge positions which ar e
not included in the tr ue collapse mechanism . In the true collapse mechanism which is combined
mechanism in this case, moments at points 1, 3, 4 and 5 are equal to Mp, we need to find and check
moment value at point 2 only in this case.
The generalized work equations 1 and 2 in terms of moments may be used for the purpose
alongwith their signs.
100 = M2 + 2M3 M4
(1)
75
= M1 + M2 M4 + M5
(2)
Noting that = 0.0343 Mp
eqn (1) becomes
100 0.0343 Mp= M2 + 2Mp + Mp so M2 = 0.431 Mp < Mp O.K.
eqn (2) becomes
75 (0.0343 Mp) = + Mp + M2 + Mp + Mp so M2 = 0.42755 Mp < Mp O.K.
Net value of M2 = algebraic sum of equations 1 and 2 as combined mechanism is
combination of case A and case B.
366
M2 = ( 0.431 0.427 ) Mp = 0.858 Mp < Mp O.K.

If at this stage a higher load factor is specified by the designer, there is no need to revise the
frame analysis and following formula can be applied to get increased Mp value.
specified new collapse load factor
x (Mp Present)
present calculated collapse load factor
8.20. EXAM PL E NO. 4:- Par tial or incomplete collapse:
Find collapse load factor for the following loaded frame. Mp is 80 KN-M for all members.
(Mp) new
37.5
2
5m
7.5m
7.5m
12.5
4
Mp=80KN-m
1
SOL UTI ON: Draw three possible independent collapse mechanisms. Write work equation and find 1, 2,
3, 4 and 5 possible plastic hinge locations.
1. Beam M echanism:
(35.5 ) 7.5 = M2 + M3 2 + M4 ()
281.25
= M2 + 2M3 M4
(1)
moment at 2, 3 and 4 is equal to Mp. so
281.25
= 4 Mp (work is always + ve)
or
= 1.1377
2. Sway M echanism:
(12.5 ) 5
= + M1 ( ) + M2 () + M4 () + M5 ()
62.5
= M1 + M2 M4 + M5
(2), Moment at 1,2,4 and 5 is Mp.
4
62.5
= 4 Mp or =
80 = 5.12
62.5
= 5.12
37.5
-2
7.5
37.5
7.5
12.5
+
5
(a) Beam mechanism
(b) Sway Mechanism
(c) Combined mechanism
3. Combined M echanism:
(37.5 ) (7.5)+ (12.5 ) (5)= M1 () + M2 0 + M3 (2) + M4 (2) + M5 ()
343.75
= M1 + 2M3 2M4 + M5 (3) Moment at 1,3,4 and 5 is Mp
343.75
367
= 6 Mp
or
6 x 80
= 1.396
343.75
= 1.396.
Therefore, according to kinematic theorem, beam mechanism containing 3 Plastic hinges (one
less than required) is the collapse mechanism for this frame with 3 redundancies. (N= n+ 1)= 3+ 1= 4
are required.;
Note: In partial or incomplete collapse, only a part of the structure becomes statically
determinate.
Check moments at locations (1) and (5) with = 1.1377 , M2 , M3 , M4 = Mp
substituting is eqn (2).
62.5 = M1 + M2 M4 + M5 or 62.5 (1.1377) = M1 + Mp + Mp + M5
88.937
= M5 M1 (4) or
M1 M5 = 88.937 (4)
Putting same values in eqn (3)
343.75 (1.137) = M1 + 2Mp + 2Mp + M5
= M1 + M5 + 4 80
70.84 = M5 M1 (5)
Values of M1 and M5 cannot be found from either of equations (4) and (5) as this is incomplete
or partial collapse. Instead of a unique answer on values of M1 and M5 which do not violate yield
criteria, different pairs of possible values of M1 and M5 can be obtained satisfying equations 4 and 5.
Therefore, according to Uniqueness theorem beam mechanism is the true collapse mechanism. It is a
partial collapse case.
8.21. EXAM PL E NO. 5:- Over complete collapse
Determine c for the following loaded frame.
36
2
3m
24
4
3m
63
6m
42
42
SOL UTI ON:
Mp
5
Sketch possible independent collapse mechanisms. Notice that locations where beam and
column meets, plastic huge is formed in weaker member near the joint.
368
36
3
2
4
2
(a) Beam mechanism
(b) Sway mechanism
6( + )
36
3
2
3
+2 )
3
24
4
-2
+
2
-( + )
1
(c) Combined mechanism
(a + b)
+( + )
(d) Another Combined mechanism

(b+c)
1. Beam M echanism: Fig A

(36) 3 = M2 + M3 (2) M4
108
= M2 + 2M3 M4
108
= 42 + 2 x 63 + 42
(1)
All are equal to respective Mp. Putting values.
= 1.944
2. Sway M echanism Fig B.
(24) 6 = M1 () + M2 () + M4 () + M5()
144
= M1 + M2 M4 + M5
144
= 42 + 42 + 42 + 42
(2)
or = 1.166
3. Fir st Combined M echanism Fig C

(24 ) (6) + (36) (3) = M1 () + M2 (0) + M3 (2) + M4 (2) + M5 ()
252
= M1 + 2M3 2M4 + M5
294
252
(3)
= 1.166
4. Second Combined M echanism Fig D

(36 )3+ 24 (+ )6= M1 ( )+ M2 ()+ M3 (2) + M4 ( + 2) + M5 ( + )
396 = M1 + M2 + 2M3 2M4 + 2M5
396 = 2(42) + 42 + 2(63) + 3 x 42 + 2 x 42
369
462
= 1.166
396
= 1.166.
Note: In overcomplete collapse, more than one mechanism give the same value of collapse load
factor. Any or both of the collapse mechanisms can contain extra number of plastic hinges than those
required for complete collapse. So in this case fig c and d mechanisms give the same value. This was
the case of over complete collapse.
Space for notes:
THE THREE MOMENT EQUATION
369
CHAPTER NI NE
9. THE THREE M OM ENT EQUATI ON
Most of the time we are concerned with the classical analysis of statically determinate structures.
In this chapter we shall consider the analysis of statically indeterminate (externally) beams due to applied
loads and due to settlement of supports. It must be remembered that supports for beams may be walls or
columns. As we know that for the analysis of statically indeterminate systems, compatibility of
deformations is also essential requirements in addition to considerations of equilibrium and statics. By
compatibility it is understood that deformations produced by applied loads should be equal to those
produced by redundants. It has been already mentioned that reactions occur at supports in various
directions if
(i)
There is some action (applied load) in that direction.
(ii)
There is restraint offered by support in that directions
Action and reactions are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction. In the structural analysis it
is sometimes customery to think that rotations are generally associated with moments and deflections or
translations are associated with loads. It must also be kept in mind that we never analyze actual structural
systems or sub-systems, it is only the idealized ones which are analyzed. Representing beams and
columns by just a straight line located on their centroidal axis is also a sort of idealization on the
structural geometry. Reactions and loads are, therefore, also idealized and are shown by a sort of line
loads acting on a point.
The three-moment equation is a good classical analysis tool in which support moments produced
by the loads as well as by the differential settlements can be easily calculated by using second-moment
area theorem which states that
The deviation of a point A on the elastic curve w.r.t any other point B on the elastic curve is
1
multiplied by the moment of area of B.M.D s between those two points. The moments of
equal to
EI
B.M.D s are taken about a line passing through the point of loaded beam where deviation is being
measured.
The method is essentially based on continuity (equality) of slopes on the either side of a support
by reducing an indeterminate system to its determinate equivalents as follows by using supperposition.
An indeterminate beam under applied loads and redundant moments is equated to corresponding
detemrinate system carrying these two effects separately. Let-us derive the three-moment equation.
Consider a generalized two-span beam element under the action of applied loads and redundant
support moments acting on BDS.
370
C/
A/
ha
A1
hc
B
C
C1
Tangent at B
I1
I2
L1
L1
A1
BMD due to
applied loads
on simple spans
A2
a1
Fig (a)
Fig (b)
a2
Mb
A4
Ma
Generalized
redundant moment
diagram
A3
A5
Mc
A6
L1/3
Fig ( c)
L2/3
2/3 L1
2/3 L2
Fig(a) is an indeterminate beam subjected to applied load (udl in this case) which has shown
settlement such that support B is at a lower elevation than support at A and C and difference of elevation
w.r.t intermediate support B is ha and hc. The angle B on either side of support B must be equal. Fig(b)
is B.M.D. due to applied load on simple spans where A 1 is Area of B.M.D. on span L 1 and A 2 is area of
B.M.D. on span L 2. a1 and a2 are the locations of centroids of B.M.D s on L 1 and L 2 from left and right
supports respectively. So invoking continuity of slopes and knowing that for small angels = tan.
AA 1
CC1
=
L1
L2
371
Evaluate AA 1 by second Moment Area Method. We know that

AA 1
= AA / A 1A /
=
ha deviation of point A / on the elastic curve from the tangent drawn at

point B on the elastic curve.
= ha
1
L1
2
A 1a1 + A 3
+ A 4 L 1
EI 1
3
3
expressing A 3 and A 4 in terms of moments

AA 1
AA 1
L1
= ha
1
L1 1
2
1
A 1a1+
MaL 1 + L 1 MbL 1
EI 1
3 2
3
2
= ha
1
MaL 12 MbL 12
A 1a1 +
+
EI 1
6
3
ha
1 A 1a1 MaL 1 MbL 1
+
+
L 1 EI 1 L 1
6
3
Now evaluate
CC1
divide by L 1
(1)
CC1
on similar lines. We have from geometry
L2
= C1C/ CC/
= (deviation of point C/ from tangent at B) hc
=
1
2
L2
A 2a2 + A 5 L 2 + A 6 hc
EI 2
3
3
expressing A 5 and A 6 in terms of Moments

CC1
CC1
L2
1
2
1
L2 1
A 2a2 + L 2 MbL 2 +
MCL 2 hc
EI 2
3
2
3 2
1
L 22
L 22
A 2a2 + Mb
+ MC hc divide by L 2
EI 2
3
6
1 A 2a2 Mb L 2 MC L 2 hc
+
+
EI 2 L 2
3
6 L2
(2)
Equating (1) and (2), we have

ha
1
L 1 EI 1
A 1a1 + Ma L 1 + Mb L 1 = 1 A 2a2 + Mb L 2 + Mc L 2 hc
6
3
EI 2 L 2
3
6 L2
L1
372
Multiply by 6E and simplify, we have after re-arrangement

Ma
L 1
6 A 1a1 6 A 2a2 6 Eha 6 Ehc
L 1 L 2
L 2
I 1 + 2Mb I 1 + I 2 + Mc I 2 = I 1L 1 I 2L 2 + L 1 + L 2
The above equation is called three-moment equation.

9.1. Analysis of Continuous Beams by thr ee-M oment Equation.
We apply three moment equation to two spans at a time which gives us one equation. With the
successive applications, the required member of equations are obtained and are solved simultaneously.
EXAM PL E:
Analyze the continuous beam shown below by three-Moment equation.

Take E = 20 106 KN/m2 and I c = 40 10-6 m4.
12 KN
32 KN
A
9.6 KN/m
3m
D
Do
Lo
6m
8m
6m
Io =
2Ic
4Ic
2Ic
Lo
2m
Fig (a)
9.6 x 8
8
A1 = 0
= 76.8
32 x 6
= 48
4m
409.6
BMD
A3
A2
3m
Fig (b)
144
SOL UTI ON:

When a fixed support at either end is encountered, an imaginary hinged span of length L o and
Interia I o = is added to conform to acted support conditons and to make the method applicable in
similar situations.
The same has already been done in Fig(a). Fig (b) is the BMD s on simple spans, their Areas
and its locations.
Apply three-moment equation to spans AB and BC at a time. We have
6
8
6 409.6 4
6
8
2Ic + 2Mb 2Ic + 4Ic + Mc 4Ic = 6 0 4Ic 8
Ma
Simplify and multiplying by Ic both sides of equation, we get.

3Ma + 10 Mb + 2 Mc = 307.2
put Ma = 24 KN-m
10 Mb + 2 Mc = 235.2
divide by 10
Mb + 0.2 Mc = 23.52
(1)
373
Now apply three-moment equation to spans BC and CD

8
8
6
6 409.6 4 6 144 3
6
Mb + 2 Mc
4Ic
4Ic + 3Ic + MD 3Ic = 4Ic 8 3Ic 6
Simplify and multiply by Ic, we have,
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 MD = 307.2144 = 451.3
divide by 2
Mb + 4 Mc + MD = 225.625
(2)
Now apply three-moment equation to spans CD and DDO
6
6
Lo
6 144 3
Lo
Mc + 2 MD
3Ic
3Ic + + Mdo = 3Ic 6
Simplify and multiply by Ic both sides of equation.
2 Mc + 4 MD = 144
divide by 2
Mc + 2 MD = 72
(3)
We have obtained three equations from which three-Unknowns Mb, Mc and MD can be calculated.
Subtract equation (2) from (1)
Mb + 0.2 Mc
= 23.52
Mb + 4 Mc + MD
= 225.625
3.8 Mc
MD
= 202.105
Multiply equation (4) by (2) and add in equation (3)
7.6 Mc 2MD = 404.21
Mc + 2 MD = 72
6.6 MC
= 332.21
So
(4)
Mc = 50.3 KN-m
put Mc in equation (1), we get Mb = 13.46 KN-m
put Mc in (3), we get MD = 10.85 KN-m.
Finally
Mb = 13.46 KN-m
Mc = 50.3 KN-m
MD = 10.85 KN-m
Checks:
The above calculated values of moments are correct if they satisfy the continuity of slope
requirements. Slopes at any intermediate support point can be calculated from the two adjacent spans by
using conjugate beam method. While applying checks, it is assumed that reader is well conversant with
the conjugate beam method. Before we could apply checks, it is necessary to plot reactant moment
diagram (support-moments) to get their contribution in slope calculation. Here is the statement of
conjugate beam theorem number one again.
M
The shear force at any point on the conjugate beam loaded with diagram is the slope at the
EI
corresponding point in the actual beam carrying applied loads. In applying the conjugate -beam method,
we must use the original sign convention for shear force as applied in strength of Materials subject. (i.e.,
left up, right-down, positive)
374
2m
6m
8m
6m
A4
A6
A8
O
A5
O
10.85
13.45
24
A7
A9
Fig ( c)
BMD divided into convenient shapes.

50.3
Fig(c) is the reactant moment diagram

The areas of positive BMD s act as loads in downward direction to which reactions are
upwards. The areas of negative BMD s act as loads in upward direction to which support reactions are
downwards. The direction of reaction is accounted for in the signs appropriately.
8(50.3 13.45)
A4 = 13.45 6 = 80.7
A7 =
= 146.2
2
6(24 13.45)
A5 =
= 31.65
A8 = 10.85 6 = 65.1
2
6(50.3 10.85)
A6 = 13.45 8 = 107.6
A9 =
= 118.35
2
Checks. SPAN AB
S.F at A = a
1 A4 2
1 80.7 2
A5 =
31.65
EI 2 3
2EIc 2
3
30.725
EIc
1 A4 1
1 80.7 31.65
+ A5 =
+
2EIc 2
3
2EIc 4
3
25.45
Clockwise.
EIc
(There is no check on this value as, it is not a continuous support)
SPAN BC
b
1 A2 A6 1
1 409.6 107.3 1
A7 =
147.5
4EIc 2
2 3
4EIc 2
2
3
25.46
Clockwise
EIc
1 A2 A6 2
1 409.6 107.3 2
+
+ A7 =
+
+ 147.5
4EIc 2
2
3
4EIc 2
2
3
13.18
EIc
375
SPAN CD
1 A3 A8 2
1 144 65.1 2
A9 =
118.33
3EIc 2
2 3
3EIc 2
2
3
= 0
13.16
EIc
1 A3 A8 1
1 144 65.1 118.33
+
+ A9 =
+
+
3EIc 2
2
3
3EIc 2
2
3
(Fixed end)
All slope values have been satisfied. This means calculated support moment values are correct.
Now beam is statically determinate we can construct SFD and BMD very easily. We have seen that
numerical values of E and I are required in this case only if one is interested in absolute values of .
However, these values are required while attempting a support settlement case. Determine reactions and
plot SFD and BMD.
376
12 KN
32 KN
A
2m
9.6 KN/m
6m
8m
13.76
3m
6m
32.031 KN
69.203
5.806
26.194 KN
33.79
1.76
SFD
12
5.806
3.52m
43.009
BMD
13.44
10.856
-24
50.308
EXAM PL E-2:
Analyze the continuous beam shown below by three moment equation if support at B
sinks by 12 mm. Take E = 20 106 KN/m2; Ic = 40 10-6 m4.
A
D
Do
12mm
6m
2Ic
B
8m
6m
Lo
4Ic
3Ic
Io =
2.0
A
O
A1
A3
A2
C
O
A5
A4
Fig (b)
Reactant moment diagram
A1 to A5 are areas of adjusted BMD.
0.8
-1.6
377
SOL UTI ON:

As the extreme right support is fixed, an imaginary Hinged span of length Lo and Ic = has
already been added to make the method applicable and to conform to the support characteristic at D.
Now it is a sort of continuous support. Only analysis due to differential settlement at B is required. Had
there been some applied loads also, those could have been considered at the same time also.
Now EI = 20 106 40 106 = 800 KN-m2.
we also know that Ma = 0 and MDO = 0 being extreme hinge supports.
Spans AB and BC
When we consider these spans and compare them with the derivation, we find that situation is
similar so both ha and hc terms are positive and equal to 12 mm using three-moment equation.
6
6
8
8
6E 12 10-3 6E 12 103
+ 2Mb
+
+ Mc =
+
6
8
2Ic
2Ic 4Ic
4Ic
Ma
put Ma = 0, simplify and multiply by Ic

2Mb (3+ 2) + Mc (2) = EI C 12 10-3 + 0.75 EI C 12 10-3
put EI = 800
10 Mb + 2 Mc = 9.6 + 7.2 = 16.8
Mb + 0.2 Mc = 1.68
divide by 10
(1)
Spans BC and CD
Comparing these two spans with the derivation, we notice that ha term is equal to 12mm and
hc term is zero.
8
8
6
6
6E( 12 10-3)
+ 2Mc
+
+ Md =
+ 0
8
4Ic
4Ic 3Ic
3Ic
Ma
Simplify and multiply by Ic

2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 Md = 7.2
Mb + 4 Mc + Md = 3.6
divide by 2
(2)
Spans CD and DDO

There is no load and settlement on these two spans so right handside of equation is zero
6
6 Lo
Lo
3Ic + 2Md 3Ic + + Mdo = 0
Mc
378
We know that Mdo = 0;
Lo
= 0
Simplify and multiply by Ic

2 Mc + 4 Md = 0
divide by 2
Mc + 2 Md = 0
(3)
Above three linear simultaneous equations which are solved. Subtract (2) from (1)
Mb + 0.2 Mc
Mb + 4 Mc + Md
3.8 Mc Md
=
1.68
= 3.6
= 5.26
(4)
Now multiply equation (4) by 2 and add to equation (3)

7.6 Mc 2 Md
Mc + 2 Md
6.6 Mc
= 10.56
= 0
= 10.56
Mc = 1.6 KN-m
Md =
Mc
= + 0.8
2
Mb = 2 KN-m
Plot end moment diagram. Add and subtract equal areas on spans BC and CD and apply
conjugate beam method.
1
62= 6
2
1
A2 =
82= 8
2
1
A3 =
6 0.8 = 2.4
2
1
A4 =
8 1.6 = 6.4
2
1
A5 =
6 1.6 = 4.8
2
Compute slopes at supports.
A1 =
a = Slope due to settlement (configuration) + due to end moments

12 103
1 A1
12 103
1 6
=
+
=
+
= 3.25 103 rad.
2EIc 3
6
6
1600 3
Span AB
b =
379
12 103
1 2 12 106
1 2
+
A1 =
+
6
2EIc 3
6
6
1600 3
= -5 104 rad.
Span BC
b =
12 103
1 2
1
12 103
1
2 8 1 6.4
+
A2 A4 =
+
8
4EIc 3
3
8
3
4 800 3
b = 5 104 rad.
c =
12 103
1 1
2
+
A2 + A4
8
4EIc 3
3
c = 1 103 rad.
Span CD
c = 0 +
1 1
2
1
1 2.4 2 4.8
A3 A5 =
3EIc 3
3
3
3 800 3
c = 1 103 rad.
d = 0 +
1 2
1
1
2 2.4 + 1 4.8
A3 + A5 = 0 +
3EIc 3
3
3
3 800 3
d = 0
(Fixed end)
Checks on slopes have been satisfied so computed moment values are correct. Now beam is
determinate. SFD and BMD can be plotted.
Resolve same problem, for a differential sinking of 12 mm at support C. we get the following equations.
Mb + 0.2 Mc
Mb + 4 Mc + Md
Mc + 2 Md
= 0.72
= 8.4
= 4.8
(1)
(2)
(3)
Solution gives
Mc = + 3.49
Md = 4.145
Mb = 1.418
apply continuity checks and plot SFD and BMD.
Unsolved Examples:
Solve the following loaded beams by three-moment equations.
380
70 KN
3m
B
8m
12m
EI = Constt.
Final equations:
Ma + 0.5 Mb
Ma + 5 Mb + 1.5 Mc
Mb + 2 Mc
= 90.312
= 213.12
= 0
(1)
(2)
(3)
End Moment Values:

Mc = 16.41
Mb = 32.82
Ma = 73.91
60 KN
72 KN
6m
24 KN
16 KN/m
24 KN/m
4m
A
Lo
C
6m
12m
6m
3Ic
10Ic
2Ic
Final Equations:
2 Ma + Mb
2 Ma + 6.4 Mb + 1.2 Mc
1.2 Mb + 8.4 Mc
End moment values:
Ma = 0.361 KN-m
Mb = 215.28 Kn-m
Mc = 147.25 Kn-m
A
= 216
= 1555.2
= 1495.2
1.5 m
(1)
(2)
(3)
15 mm
E = 200 x 106 KN/m2

-6
Ic = 400 x 10 m
3Ic
10Ic
2Ic
6m
12m
6m
Final Equations:
2 Ma + Mb
2 Ma + 6.4 Mb + 1.2 Mc
= 600
= 1800
(1)
(2)
381
= 600
1.2 Mb + 8.4 Mc
(3)
End moment values:

Ma = 537.69 KN-m
Mb = 475.38
Mc = 139.34 KN-m
15 KN
3 KN/m
B
20 KN
C
5m
8m
8m
3m
2I
2I
End moment values:

Ma = 75 KN-m
Mb = 21.75
Mc = 60 KN-m
12 KN
2m
9.6 KN/m
B
8m
6m
2I
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc
2 Mb + 8 Mc
32 KN
C
6m
4Ic
= 235.2
= 451.2
3m
3Ic
(1)
(2)
End moment values:

Ma = 24 KN-m
Mb = 12.88
Mc = 53.18
Md = 0
12 KN
2m
9.6 KN/m
B
6m
2I
32 KN
C
8m
4Ic
3m
6m
3Ic
382
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 MD
2 Mc + 4 MD
= 235.2
= 451.2
= 144
(1)
(2)
(3)
End moment values:

Ma = 24 KN-m
Mb = 13.455
Mc = 50.33
Md = 10.835
B
3m
4.5 mm
6m
2m
8m
2Ic
Final equations:
10 Mb + 2 Mc
2 Mb + 8 Mc + 2 Md
2 Mc + 2 MD
6m
4Ic
= 6.3
= 2.7
= 0
3Ic
(1)
(2)
(3)
End moment values:

Ma = 0
Mb = 0.7714
Mc = 0.707
Md = 0.707
64 KN
A
3m B
C
9m
EI = Constt.
Final equations:
2 Ma + Mb
= 144
2 Ma + 10 Mb + 3 Mc = 288
Mb + 2 Mc
= 0
End moment values:
(1)
(2)
(3)
383
Mb = -19.2
Mc = 9.6
Ma = 62.4
B
3m
3 mm
4.5 mm
E = 200 x 106 KN/m2
-6
Ic = 400 x 10 m
Final equations:
Mb + 0.2 Mc
Mb + 4 Mc + MD
Mc + 2 MD
End moment values:
Ma = 0
Mb = 5.45
Mc = 0.27
MD = 5.86
6m
8m
6m
2Ic
4Ic
3Ic
= 5.4
= 1.5
= 12
(1)
(2)
(3)
INFLUENCE LINES
383
CHAPTER TEN
10. I NFL UENCE L I NES
This is also another very useful technique in classical structural analysis. Influence lines are
plotted for various structural effects like axial forces, reactions, shear forces, moments and thrust etc. As
structural members are designed for maximum effects, ILD s help engineer decide the regions to be
loaded with live load to produce a maxima at a given section.
An influence line is a graphical representation of variation of a particular structural effect at a
given section for all load positions on its span.
Two methods, viz, static method and virtual displacement method are used for the construction
of ILD s. Mostly it is the later method which is prefered. All structures in general and Railway and
Highway bridges in particular are frequently subjected to various types of moving loads. As influence
lines describe variation at a particular section for all load positions on span, the effects of moving loads
can be calculated very easily. It must be remembered that a system of moving loads moves as a unit. For
Railway bridges standard cooper s E-60 and E-72 loadings are used whereas for highway bridges
AASHTO lane loadings and truck loadings or sometimes tank loadings are used. When dealing with
calculations regarding moving loads the problem is how to place the system so as to produce maximum
effects at a given section. Sometimes mathematical criteria are used for the live load purpose and
sometimes simple inspection is made. In each case influence lines help us simplify the things.
10.1. Statical M ethod of Constr ucting I nfluence L ines
In this method, a load may be placed at several positions within span/(s) and a mathematical
expression for a particular structural effects at a section is set-up. By placing limits of X (the distance),
the shape and ordinates of influence lines (called influence co-efficients also) can be determined.
For example consider the cantilever loaded below and let moment at fixed end A be represented
by its influence line.
For a generalized load position as defined by distance X in the diagram, moment at A is.
P
A
X
B
l
I.L.D. for Ma
L
Ma = P (L X)
0< X < L
Minus sign with P shows a negative moment at A for all load positions (consider sign
convention for moments)
384
For X = 0 (load at point B) moment at A is PL. Influence co-efficient is L at B. If X = L

load is at A so moment at A is zero. Influence co-efficent is zero. In between A and B, moment at A
varies linearly, joining the points, ILD for Ma is obtained. Now even if several loads are placed on the
cantilever, Ma is simply the sum of all loads when multiplied by corresponding ordinates.
If a cantilever supports a ud.l, the above I.L.D for Ma is applicable. Consider a strip of width
dX located at a distance X from free end,
wdX
b
w
A
L-X
dX
y
Ma = WydX = w ydX
o
Where ydX is area of I.L.D between limits zero to b.

o
10.2. I nfluence L ines for beam Reactions:

ILD s for reactions in case of simple beams and compound beams (determinate beams resting
over several supports) can be drawn by using the already described procedure. Consider a simple beam
with a single load sitting at any moment of time as shown
From statics it can be shown that
P
A
X
B
Ra =
PX
L
Rb =
P(L - X)
L
X/L
l
yi
I.L.D. for Ra
(L - X)
L
yi
l
I.L.D. for Rb
Ra =
PX
L X
and Rb = P
L
L
0< X < L
INFLUENCE LINES
385
When X = 0 (load at B); Ra = 0 and Rb = P
(by putting limits in above expressions)
When X = L (load at A); Ra = P and Rb = 0
(by putting limits in above expressions)
Instead of maximum co-efficients equal to P it is costomary to have them equal to 1 so that these
could be evaluated by the product of loads and respective ordinates and these diagrams become valid for
several loads. So algebraically
Ra = Pi yi
Rb = Pi yi
10.3. Pr incipal of Vir tual Displacements:
Consider a simple beam under the action of load P as shown. Ra can be found by virtual
displacements by imagining that support at A has been removed and beam is under the action of load P
and Ra. Under the action of Ra, beam is displaced as A / B. The virtual work equation is
B
L
Ra
Ra AA / Py = 0
So Ra =
(Force displacement)
Py
where y is the displacement due to Ra under P.
AA /
If AA / = 1, Ra = Py
A result already obtained.
This procedure of drawing ILDs is more useful for the complicated cases.
10.4. Reactions for Compound Beams:
A beam resting over several supports which has been made determinate by the availability of
inserted hinges at suitable points is called a compound beam. The following Rules must be kept in mind
while constructing ILD s for such cases.
1. Points of I.L.D corresponding to supports should show zero displacement except where
virtual displacement is given (in case of reactions).
2. Portion of the beam between hinges which are straight before virtual displacements should
remain straight after virtual displacement.
3. If a beam is continuous over two consecutive support and there is a hinge after these two
supports, that portion of beam behaves a unit in case the virtual displacement is given
elsewhere.
4. Portions of beam between pins which is straight before virtual displacement, shall remain
386
straight after virtual displacement.

Considering these guidelines given, draw influence lines for reactions for the following beam.
I. L. D for Ra
I
I. L. D for Rb
I
I. L. D for Rc
I. L. D for Rd
+
+
I
I. L. D for Re
If positive areas of above diagrams are loaded, upward reactions at corresponding support will
occur or vice-versa.
Construct Influence lines for reactions for the following compound beam by virtual
displacements.
INFLUENCE LINES
387
I. L. D for Ra
I
I. L. D for Rb
I
I. L. D for Rc
I. L. D for Rd
I
+
+
I. L. D for Re
I
I. L. D for R f
Evaluation of maximum upward and down reaction due to concentrated loads and udl can be
done by using the basic principles described already.
If several moving loads, from right to left direction, approach left hand support of a simple
beam, the left reaction continues to increase and becomes maximum till leading wheel is at the left
support. This corresponding first maxima will decrease immediately if the load falls off and leaves the
span from left upon further advance, reaction at left support will start increasing and will become
maximum again when second wheel is at the left support. So there will be as many maxima as is the
number of loads.
Evaluation of reactions due to live load udl is rather simple as the span portion required to be
loaded for maximum upward and downward support reactions are obvious by the simple inspection. Of
course positive areas if loaded will give maximum upward reactions and vice-versa.
388
10.5. I nfluence L ines for Shear For ce:

In structural analysis, normally we develop the methods by considering simple cases and some
generalized conclusions are drawn which can then be applied to more complicated cases. So consider the
following simple beam wherein a moving load (right to left) occupies the position shown at any instant of
time.
Using left-up and write-down as sign convention for positive shear force.
Ra
Rb
For all load positions to right of point C, the shear force for at C (Vc) is equal to + Ra.
Vc = Ra
It means that for load position between point B and C, the Shape of ILD for SF at C will be the
same as the shape of ILD for + Ra.
For all load positions to left of point C, the shear force at C (Vc) is equal to Rb.
Vc = Rb
It means that for load position between point A and C, the shape of ILD for SF at C will the
same as shape of ILD for Rb. Knowing that positive ILD is drawn above the reference line and negative
ILD is drawn below the reference line, we obtain the ILD for Vc as shown below with the help of ILD s
for reactions (+ Ra1 Rb)
C
A
B
a
b
L
Ra
Rb
I. L. D. for + Ra
b/L
I. L. D. for Vc
a/L
I. L. D. for - Rb
INFLUENCE LINES
389
Mathematically
Ra =
PX
L
Rb = P
0< X < L
(L X)
L
0< X < L
At X= 0, load is at B and Vc is zero. At x= b, load is at C and Vc = + Ra =
Pb b
or if P= 1.
L
L
a
b
and can be obtained by using similar triangles. Now inspect the ILD for Vc.
L
L
For a right to left advance of load system, Vc keeps on increasing till the leading load is at the
section , when leading load just crosses the section, Vc drops by the magnitude of load and this process
continues. So we can write that for maximum SF at a section, the load should be at that section . This
is the first criterion of calculation of Vmax. Now the question comes to mind that which load among the
moving load system should be placed at the section? To address this question, we have noted, that change
in SF at a section, V, is equal to change in Ra (Ra) minus the load leaving the Section. (Pn)
The ordinates
So,
V = Ra Pn
If W is sum of all the loads on the span L before advance of a, it can be shown that
Wa
L
Ra =
So,
V =
Wa
Pn
L
Any load which reverses this expression, should be brought back and placed at that section to
realize the maximum SF at that section. So a change in the sign of above expression can be regarded as
the second criterion for maximum shear force at a section.
It can also be shown that loads entering or leaving the span as a result of any particular advance
do not affect the above expression very significantly.
The above method is called the statical method. The same shape of ILD for Vc can be obtained
by virtual displacement method also.
C
A
B
a
b
V
V
L
Ra
b/L
+
a/L
Rb
I. L. D. for Vc
390
Now imagine that resistance to vertical displacement at C has been destroyed (imagine a sort of
cut at the section) and the vertical shear force as shown (opposite to sign convention for positive shear
force). The area enclosed between the original position before virtual displacement and the deformed
position after virtual displacement is the ILD for Vc.
10.6. I nfluence L ine Diagr ams for Bending M oment:
Again we consider the simple beam under the action of a simple moving load as shown. Let it be
required to construct ILD for Mc.
P
C
A
B
a
b
L
Ra
Rb
fo r
ILD
Rb
xb
b
ILD for R
axa
ab/L
I. L. D. for Mc
If the load is between points B and C.

PX
a
L
at X = 0; load at B, Mc = 0.
If X = b;
Pab ab
Mc =
=
if P = 1
L L
Mc = Ra a =
0< X < b
It means that for portion BC, the shape of ILD for Mc is the same as the shape of ILD for Ra
multiplied by distance a.
If the load is between points A and C
P(L X)
b
L
At X = b, load is at C;
,
Pab ab
So
Mc =
=
if P = 1
L L
Mc = Rb b =
b< X < L
Mc = Rb b
INFLUENCE LINES
391
It means that for portion AC, the shape of ILD for Mc is the same as the shape of ILD for Rb
multiplied by b.
At X = L;
Load at A; Mc = 0
The same shape of ILD for Mc can be obtained by virtual displacements also.
C
A
B
a
Ra
Rb
b
M
a
y
I. L. D. for Mc
dx
Idealized section at C
before virtual displacements
Section at C after virtual

displacement
The virtual work equation is

work done by loads = work done by the moments.
P y = M .
Or
M =
Py
So, if = 1; the moment at Section C for a single load system will be load multiplied by
corresponding influence ordinate (influence co-efficient) while constructing ILD s by virtual
displacements, loads are not considered. Now construct ILD for Mc by virtual displacements.
At Section C, we imagine that the beam resistance to moments which produce rotations has been
destroyed while resistance to shear and axial loads is intact. This situation is obtained by considering that
at Section C; there is a sort of hinge (one degree of freedom system). On this hinge the moments are
392
applied on two sides of hinge as shown alone. The segments of beam rotate and the displaced beam
position is ILD for Mc.
The one-degree of freedom system such as a hinge is further explained in diagrams shown which
illustrate the movement. This procedure can now be applied to more complicated cases where statical
approach may be laborious.
The method of virtual displacements can be applied to more complicated cases like compound
beams etc., by considering the basic ideas established in this chapter.
ILD for M1 - 1
ILD for M2 - 2
ILD for M3 - 3
10.7. Evaluation of M max at a Section

In case of a simple beam supporting a moving load system, the maximum moment at a section is
obtained when
1. One of the loads is at the section.
2. In case of several moving loads, that load shall be placed at the Section, for producing
maximum moment at that Section, which reverses the average loading on two portions of
span adjacent to Section.
INFLUENCE LINES
Average loading on any portion =
393
sum of all loads on that portion

length of portion
10.8. Absolute M aximum bending M oment

In case of a series of moving loads traverse on a beam, the absolute maximum bending moment
occurs near the mid span under the adjusted position of that load which gave us maximum bending
moment at mid span. Procedure is as follows:
1. Apply the criteria of maximum bending moment at mind span to find the load which is to
be placed at mid span.
2. For this position of loads find the position of resultant of all loads on span.
3. Move the system slightly so that mid-span is bisected by the resultant of all loads on span
and the load which gives us maximum bending moment at mid-span.
4. Find absolute maximum bending moment. It will occur under displaced position of that
load which gave us maximum bending moment at mid-span.
Considering that invariably loads would be magnified for design purpose and appreciating that
the numerical difference between the values of maximum mid-span bending moment and absolute
maximum bending moment is insignificant, evaluation of absolute maximum bending moment for a given
moving load system appears to be of theoretical interest only. How interested students can evaluate it for
only moving load system by considering the above four points and guidelines contained in this chapter.
10.9. Gir der s with Floor beams (Panelled gir der s)
Normally in bridge construction, moving loads are hardly applied to the main girders directly
but instead following arrangement is used for the load transfer.
The moving load system comes on the stringers which transfer it to the main girder through
floor beams in form of concentrated loads (Reactions of floor beams). So main girder is subjected to
concentrated loads only. For large spans the main girder may be of steel, poured in-situ reinforced
concrete or pre-stressed concrete. Points a, b, c, . F are called panel points and the distance between
any two panel points is called a panel.
With the above mentioned load-transfer mechanisms, it can be easily seen that ILD s for main
reactions remain same as that for a simple beam as discussed already.
394
As there will be no load on the main girder except floor beam reactions, it is stated that for a
given load position, the shear force within a panel remains constant so we can talk of shear force in
panels rather that shear force at a section (panel and becomes a section). Let us now construct ILD s
for shear force for various panels of girder already shown.
INFLUENCE LINES
395
4/5
ILD for + Ra
(+)
ILD for Vab
(-)
I
ILD for + Ra
ILD for Vef
ILD for - Rb
0.4
(+)
ILD for Vcd
(-)
I
0.4
ILD for - Rb
d x 4d
5d
IL D
ILD fo
r Ra x
for R
bx
b
3a/5
a
b/5
yb
6
d
5
yc
ILD for Mmn
2d x 3d
5d
+
ILD for Mc
A five panels main girder is shown for which various ILD s have been sketched.
396
10.10. I L D For Vab (I L D for shear in end panel)

If a load P is placed at a distance X from panel point b, then reactions at panel points a and b
P(d X)
PX
and
respectively.
will be
d
d
Px
,
0< X < d
d
P(d X)
Pb = Panel poiint load at b or reaction of floor beam at b =
0 < X < d.
d
if X = 0, load P will be at b, then Pa = 0 and Pb = P
Pa = Panel point load at a or reaction of floor beam at a =
if X = d, load P will be at a, then Pa = P and Pb = 0 So, V ab 0

In between a and b, shear force varies linearly.
Now inspect the shape of ILD for V ab, it resembles with the shape of ILD for moment at point b
considering the panelled girder as a simple beam. So to evaluate (V ab)max, criteria of max bending
moment at a section b (reversal of average loading expression) will be applied.
10.11. I L D for V ef (I L D for shear in other end panel)
The construction of ILD for V ef is same as that for V ab and same arguments apply. Inspecting
this diagram, it is clear that the shape resembles with ILD for bending moment at e if panelled girder
was treated as a simple beam. So to evaluate (V ef)max, the criteria for maximum bending at point e shall
be applied.
10.12. I L D for V ed (I L D for shear in inter mediate panel)
Considering the load P on panel cd acting at a distance X from panel point d.
Pd = Panel point load at d or floor-beam reaction at d =
P(d X)
, 0 < X < d.
d
Pc = Panel point load at c or floor-beam reaction at c =
P(X)
, 0 < X < d.
d
If load is to right of d; V cd = + Ra So, ILD for V cd for this region will be the same as that for
Ra. If load is to left of C, V cd = Rb. So for this region shape of ILD for V cd will be the same as the
shape of ILD for Rb. Now third possibility is load actinig on span CD itself as shown.
Inspecting the expressions for panel point loads at d and c stated above, we observe that the
shear Vcd within the panel varies linearly. So joining the ordinates under points C and D by a straight
line will complete ILD for V cd.
10.13. Evaluation of (V cd)max (M aximum shear for ce in inter mediate panel)
If a moving load is advanced at point d in a direction from right to left, considering W/ is
resultant of all loads on span CD, the following criteria can be easily developed as a consequence of
variation of shear force is panel CD due to an advance.
W
W/
>
L
d
Any load which reverses the above criteria shall give (V cd)max.
INFLUENCE LINES
397
10.14. I L D for M mn
Section mn is located within panel bc. Same technique can be applied for constructing ILD for
M mn. If load P is to right of panel point C.
M mn = Ra a.
It means that if load is between points c and f, the shape of ILD for M mn will be the same as
shape of ILD for Ra multiplied by a. If load P is to left of panel point b, then.
M mn = Rb b.
It means that if load is between points a and b, then shape of ILD for M mn will be the same as
shape of ILD for Rb multiplied by b. Now consider load within panel bc with P acting at a distance
X from c.
Pb =
PX
P(d X)
and Pc =
d
d
then M mn = Pb yb + Pc yc =
PX
P(d X)
yb +
yc
d
d
0 < X < d.
0 < X < d.
So between the panel, the moment varies linearly. Therefore joing the ordinates of ILD for M mn
at b and c by a straight line, we complete the ILD for M mn.
Now it is understood that SF is generally maximum near the support while moment is generally
maximum near the mid-span. So ILD for M mn can also be used to evaluate corresponding maxima. If
criteria of maximum bending moment is applied at a section corresponding to bigger ordinate, then
(M mn)max can be calculated for a moving load system.
10.15. I L D for M c
At the panel points, the load is directly transmitted to the main girder and the panel girder
behaves as a simple beam at the panel points. So ILD for Mc will be drawn considering the girder as a
simple beam.
10.16. I nfluence L ines for axial for ces in Tr uss M ember s:

As before, let us consider a simple case of parallel chord truss carrying loads at its lower chord.
The conclusions obtained are general and can be extended to non-parallel chord trusses.
398
3
A
G
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
I
(+)
I L D for S1
When a moving load system traverses the bottom chord of this trussed bridge, it is known that
forces in top chord members will be compressive in nature while that in bottom chord will be tensile in
nature. The forces in chord members are a function of moment divided by truss height. For a chord
member take moment at the point where other two members completing the same triangle meet divided
by height of truss. This has already been established in this book when discussing method of moments
and shears. So applying this S1 is a compressive force, so assigned a negative sign, equal to moment at C
divided by the height of truss. So considering the truss as a simple beam, draw an ILD for Mc and divide
it by the height of Truss. (S1)max can be evalutated by applying the criteria of maximum bending moment
(Average loadings) at point C considering the truss as a simple beam.
INFLUENCE LINES
399
I L D for S3
It is a tensile force equal to moment at D divided by height of Truss. (S3)max can be evalauted by
applying the criteria of maximum bending moment at point D.
I L D for S2
V
. Minus before Cos shall be taken
Cos
if the angle between inclined member and vertical is counterclockwise. Now if the load is right of D,
SF applicable to member 2 is + Ra. So corresponding portion of ILD for + Ra is taken. This is divided
by Cos. If the load is to left of C, SF applicable to member 2 is Rb. So corresponding portion of
ILD for Rb is taken. This is again divided by Cos. In between the panel SF varies linearly so we
can join the corresponding points.
It is known that axial force in an inclined member is
The shape of ILD for S2 resembles with the shape of ILD for intermediate panel shear in a
panelled girder. So (S2)max can be evaluated by applying the criteria of maximum intermediate panel
shear.
I L D for S4
If the load is at E or right of E, Force in member 4 is zero and if load is at or to left of point C,
again the force in member 4 is zero. If the load is at F, the same will be the tensile force in member.
Using these boundary conditions, ILD for S4 is constructed. Now inspect its shape. It resembles with the
shape of ILD for moment at F (or D) in an equivalent simple beam of span CE. So (S4)max can be
evaluated by applying the criteria of maximum bending moment (average loading criteria) at F (or D).
10.17. I nfluence lines for moment and hor izontal thr ust in a thr ee hinged ar ch.
We know that H =
c
and
yc
Mx = x Hy.
Where y will be the rise of arch at a distance X from origin (usually a support).
400
yc
L
L
4yc
Va
Vb
(+)
ILD for H
x(L - x)
Ly
4yc
(+)
(-)
Shaded area
(+)
ILD for Mx
Influence line for any structural effect can be drawn by following the formula for that structural
effect.
10.17.1. I L D for hor izontal thr ust H
Horizontal thrust H is developed at the springings (supports) of an arch. Examine the formula
c
. So ILD for H will be obtained if ILD for moment at centre is drawn, considering the
for H H =
yc
L
arch to be a simple bam, and is then divided by yc. The peak ordinate of ILD for H will be
. (H)max
yc
due to a moving load system can be obtained by applynig the criteria of maximum bending moment at the
centre.
10.17.2. I L D for M oment in the ar ch
From the Eddy s theorem we know that bending moment in the arch at a distance x from
support is
M x = x Hy
where x = simple span bending moment at a distance X.
INFLUENCE LINES
401
So as a first step, we construct ILD for simple span bending moment at a distance X. Then we
subtract the ILD for Hy. The net area between these two diagrams is the ILD for moment in the arch as
shown.
10.18. Standar d L eadings
For the design of Railway bridges standard Cooper s E-60 and E-72 loadings consisting of two
locomotives each weighing 213 tons on 18 axles each followed by infinite udl representing compartments
is considered. Structural affects obtained for a E loading can be used to get the same for another E
loading by simply multiplying them with the ratio of E loadings.
Original E-60 or E-72 loadings are in kip-ft. system as follows:
15 30 30 30 30
8/ 5/ 5/ 5/ 9/
15
4 of 19.5
5 6 5 8/ 8/
4 of 30
5/ 5/ 5/ 9/
4 of 19.5
5/ 6/ 5/ 5/
3/ft
Above wheel loads are in kips per rail or tonnes per track. (1 Ton = 2 Kips ; small ton)
Converting E-72 loading in SI Units we have IK = 5 KN approximately.
80 KN
80
4 of 160 KN
4 of 104 KN
2.44 1.52 1.52 1.52 1.52 2.74 1.52 1.83 1.52 2.44 2.44
4 of 104 KN
4 of 104 KN
1.52 1.52 1.52 2.42 1.52 1.83 1.52 1.52
53 KN/m
Cooper s E-72 loading in SI-units is shown above and E-60 below:

66.75
66.75
4 of 133.5 KN
4 of 86.77 KN
2.44 1.52 1.52 1.52 2.74 1.52 1.83 1.52 2.44 2.44
4 of 86.77 KN
4 of 133.5 KN
1.52 1.52 1.52 2.74 1.52 1.83 1.52 1.52
43.8 KN/m
Distance between loads is in meters.

For highway bridges AASHTO HS24-44 loading is internationally considered and it consists of
a Tractor and Semi-trailer with three axles carrying 0.2W, 0.4W and 0.4W respectively. These loads
when converted into kips are 16k, 32k and 32k. Standard AASHTO lane loading is probably 100 lbs/ft2.
However, in our country, due to circumstances 70 ton tank loading or Truck-train loading
described in Pakistan Highway code can be used.
We shall use railway loadings only. Let us solve some typical problems now.
Example No.1: In a girder with Floor beams having five equal panels of length 9 meters each.
Determine (a) Maximum positive and negative end panel shears. (b) Maximum Shear in the first
intermediate panel from left hand end. The live load is Coopers E-72 loading.
402
0.80
(+)
ILD for Vab
ILD for Vef

(-)
0.80
0.6
(+)
ILD for Vbc
(-)
0.2
SOL UTI ON:
1. Maximum positive End Panel Shears (V ab)max
Advance loads at section B and use criteria

Portion ab
W/
W
<
L
d
Portion bf
80
9
<
2498.87
45
after 1st advance.
240
9
<
2338.87
45
after 2nd advance
400
9
<
2178.87
45
after 3rd advance
560
9
>
2018.87
45
after 4th advance.
It means that once 3rd load of 160 KN crosses point b, the criterion is reversed so for maximum
end panel shear, 3rd load of 160 KN should be placed at point b. Now place the system of loads
accordingly and compute corresponding ordinates.
INFLUENCE LINES
4 of 160
80
3.52
403
2.44
1.52
1.52
4 of 104
1.52
2.74 1.52
1.83
1.52
4 of 160
80
2.44
10
2.44
1.52
11
1.52
12
4 of 104
1.52
13
2.44
14
1.52
15
16
1.83
1.52
17
1.52
18
19
8.6 m
0.8
y4
ILD for Vab
y1
y19
Or dinates Under L oads:

y1 = 0.3128
y2 = 0.5297
y3 = 0.6648
y4 = 0.80
y5 = 0.766
y6 = 0.7053
y7 = 0.6715
y8 = 0.6308
y9 = 0.597
y10 = 0.5428
y11 = 0.488
y12 = 0.4548
y13 = 0.421
y14 = 0.387
y15 = 0.333
y16 = 0.299
y17 = 0.2586
y18 = 0.2248
y19 = 0.191
(Vab)max = 80 0.3128 + 160 (0.5297 + 0.6648 + 0.8 + 0.766)
+ 104 (0.7053 + 0.6715 + 0.6308 + 0.597)
+ 80 0.5428 + 160 (0.488 + 0.4548 + 0.421 + 0.387)
+ 104 (0.333 + 0.299 + 0.2586 + 0.2248) +
1
8.6 0.191 53
2
= 25.024 + 441.68 + 271.62 + 43.42 + 280.128 + 116 + 43.52

= 1221.4 KN.
Similarly (Vef)max = -1145 KN
(Do the Process yourself)
We have to observe a similar Process for evaluation of (Vef)max as was used for (Vab)max. The
loads will be advanced at point e and average loadings on portions ae and ef will be compared. The
404
load which produces reversal after advance should be brought back and placed at section e for (Vef)max.
Evaluation of (Vbc)max
4 of 160
80KN
4 of 104
4 of 160
80
10
11
12
13
4 of 104
14
15
16
17
18
0.6
y14
y4
y5
c
ILD for Vbc
y1
y18
f
(-)
I.L.D for Vbc
0.2
0.82m
6.75m
2.25
Once loads are advanced from right to left at C, the following criteria shall be used to evaluate
maximum intermediate panel shear (Vbc)max
W
W/
>
L
d
Portion bc
portion cf
80
9
<
2064
45
after 1st advance.
240
9
<
2168
45
after 2nd advance
400
9
<
2272
45
after 3rd advance
560
9
>
2315.46
45
after 4th advance.
So maximum positive SF in panel bc will be obtained when 3rd wheel of 160 KN is placed at
point c. Now place loads as shown above and determine corresponding ordinates of ILD. Multiply loads
and ordinates by giving due care to signs of ILD, we obtain (Vbc)max.
Now from similar triangles, influence co-efficients y1,...... y18 are:
y1 = 0.113
y2 = 0.33
y3 = 0.465
y4 = 0.6
y5 = 0.566
y6 = 0.505
y7 = 0.472
y8 = 0.431
y9 = 0.397
y10 = 0.343
y11 = 0.289
y12 = 0.255
y13 = 0.221
y14 = 0.187
y15 = 0.126
INFLUENCE LINES
y16 = 0.093
405
y17 = 0.052
y18 = 0.018
So, (Vbc)max = 80 0.113 + 160 (0.33 + 465 + 0.6 + 0.566)

+ 104 (0.505 + 0.472 + 0.431 + 0.397) + 80 0.343
+ 160 (0.289 + 0.255 + 0.221 + 0.187)
+ 104 (0.126 + 0.093 + 0.052 + 0.018)
(Vbc)max = 720.34 KN
EXAM PL E NO.2: Determine the maximum bending moment at a cross-section 9.1m from left hand for
a beam of span 27.3m. The moving live load is 117 KN/m having a length of 6m.
SOL UTI ON:
Sketch ILD for moment at the indicated section.
Now let us assume that the given position of Udl gives us(Mc)max at a distance X from C as
shown. Determine Ra for this position
Mb = 0
Ra 27.3 = 702 (3 + 12.2 + X)
406
Ra
Moment at C
= 390.84 + 25.71 X
= Mc = Ra 9.1
117 X 2
2
Mc = (390.84 + 25.71) 9.1
117 X 2
2
Simplify
Mc = 3556.64 + 233.96 X 58.5 X 2
If BM at C is maximum, then
d Mc
= Vc = 0
dX
233.96 X 2 58.5 X = 0
X = 2m
Now compute y1 and y2 from similar triangles of ILD
So
18.2
y1
=
27.3
7.1
y1 = 4.733 m
9.1
y2
=
27.3
14.2
y2 = 4.733 m
(Mc)max = ud.l area of ILD Under UDL

= 117 (6 4.733 +
= 3788.3 KN-m
1
6 1.327)
2
INFLUENCE LINES
407
EXAM PL E NO. 3:
Calculate maximum bending moment at Section mn and pq of a five panel bridge. Each panel is
of 9m.
Five loads of 160 KN each spaced at 1.52m travel from right to left.
160
160
1.52
160
1.52
160
1.52
160
1,52
8.1
6.3
y1
y4
y2
y3
ILD for Mmn

5 of 160
ILD for Mpq
Evaluation of (M mn)max
It is recommended that criteria of maximum bending moment be applied at maximum ordinate of
8.1 corresponding to Panel point C. Now comparing average loadings on portion ac and cf, we find that
3rd load reverses the criterion as it crosses. So it must be placed at point C. Determine ordinates
408
8.1
y3
=
y3 = 7.644, y4 = 7.188,
27
25.48
y1 = 6.3 + 1.496 = 7.796

y2 = 6.3 + 1.192 = 7.492
(M mn)max = 160 (7.492 + 7.796 + 8.1 + 7.644 + 7.188) = 38.22 160

= 6115.2 KN-m
The reader is also suggested to calculate (Mmn)max. by coinciding the resultant of moving load
system with the maximum ordinate. Place the loads accordingly. Compute influence co-efficients and
multiply loads with respective ordinates to compute (Mmn)max. Compare this value with the previous one.
(M pq)max
As ILD for Mpq is symmetrical about centre-line (mid span), Arrange the loads such that the
resultant falls on mid-span. All five loads shall be accommodated and will have an ordinate of 9.
(M pq)max = 160 (9 + 9 + 9 + 9 + 9) = 7200 KN-m
I mpor tant:
The instructor is advised to work with lesser number of loads, usually five to seven, in the class
and Establish the procedure. The students can then be given assignments involvinig standard trains etc.,
for clarification of their concepts.
EXAM PL E NO. 4:
A simple beam has a clear span of 27.5 m. Construct ILD for SF at a section 6.1m from left
support. How should Coopers-E-60 loading be placed to calculate maximum shear force at this section?
SOL UTI ON:
Draw ILD for Vc. Advance the loads at section C. We shall show the load position required for
(Vc)max only.
4 of 133.5
4 of 86.77
3 of 133.5
1.28 m
66.75
66.75
6.1 m
21.4 m
0.778
y9
y2 ( + )
y12
y1
ILD for Vc
(-)
0.222
Computing influence co-efficients y1......y12 from similar triangles.
INFLUENCE LINES
409
y1 = 0.133,
y2 = 0.722,
y3 = 0.667,
y4 = 0.612,
y5 = 0.512
y6 = 0.4566,
y7 = 0.3901,
y8 = 0.335,
y9 = 0.246,
y10 = 0.157
y11 = 0.10,
y12 = 0.0466
In order to have (Vc)max, at least one load should be at C. To decide which load should be placed
at C, reversal in the sign of following equation is sought.
V =
Wa
Pn
L
W = Sum of all the loads on span before advance.

a = any particular Advance
L = Span
Pn = magnitude of Load crossing the section due to an advance.
____
For the first advance
V =
1281.58 2.44
66.75 = + 46.96 KN.
27.5
It shows that SF at C has increased due to 1st advance.

____
For second advance.
V =
1415 1.524
133.5 = 55.08 KN.
27.5
It shows that if second advance at C is made, Vc decreases. So for (Vc)max, position

before 2nd advance (after 1st advance) is required. For this position above influence co-efficients have
been computed.
(Vc)max = 66.75 ( 0.133) + 133.5 (0.778 + 0.722 + 0.667 + 0.612)
+ 86.77 (0.512 + 0.4566 + 0.3901 + 0.335)
+ 66.75 (0.246) + 133.5 (0.157 + 0.1 + 0.046)
= 567.37 KN
EXAM PL E NO. 5:- Calculate the maximum bending moment at the points C and D if five loads of
410
160 KN each spaced at 1.52 m cross-the bean from right to left.
5 of 160 KN
1.52
7m
7m
1.52
1.52
1.52
1.52
14 m
5.25
(+)
y1
y2
y3
y4
y5
ILD for Mc
(+)
y1
y2
y3
y4
y5
ILD for Md
M CM ax
Line-up all loads upto point C (theoretically slightly to right of C). Give advances at point C and
compare average loading in portion AC and BC due to various advances.
Portion Ac
Portion Bc
160
7
<
4 160
21
after 1st advance.
2 160
7
>
3 160
21
after 2nd advance.
So, as the second load of 160 KN crosses ponit C, reversal is obtained. So for (Mc)max, this load
INFLUENCE LINES
411
should be brought back and placed at C (position before 2nd advance or after 1st advance). Compute
influence co-efficients.
y1 = 4.11,
y2 = 5.25,
y4 = 4.49,
y5 = 4.11
y3 = 4.87
(Mc)max = 160 (4.11 + 5.25 + 4.87 + 4.49 + 4.11) = 3652.8 KN-m

(M d)max
This section is mid span of beam. Clearly applying the criteria of maximum bending moment at
D (comparing Average loadings on AB and BD), we get
Span AD
Span BD
160
14
<
4 160
14
after 1st advance
2 160
14
<
3 160
14
after 2nd advance
3 160
14
>
2 160
14
after 3rd advance.
So position before 3rd advance (or after 2nd advance) will give us (Md)max. Place the loads
accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
y1 = y5 = 5.48
So, (Md)max
y2 = y4 = 6.24
y3 = 7
= 160 (5.48 + 6.24 + 7 + 6.24 + 5.48)

= 4870.4 KN-m
EXAM PL E NO.6:
Calculate maximum axial forces induced in members 1, 2, 3 and 4 of truss already shown if five
loads of 150 KN each spaced at 1.52m corsses at the bottom chord from right to left. Take h = 2m and
span = 5d = 10 meters.
412
SOL UTI ON:

The corresponding ILD s for S1.....S4 have already been plotted. Now we will use those
diagrams to calculate maxima. See the Truss of article 9.16.
5 of 160 KN
1.52
1.52
1.52
1.52
5 of 160 KN
1.52
1.52
1.52
1.52
(+)
(+)
1m
1m
(-)
160
+0.565
1.52
y1
1.53
(+)
y3
INFLUENCE LINES
413
S1max.
The shape of ILD for S1 resembles with the shape of ILD for Mc in an equivalent simple beam.
So giving advances at C (now forget the truss and play with ILD s only). Apply the criterion for
maximum moment at C.
Portion Ac
Portion Bc
160
4
<
4 160
6
after 1st advance.
2 160
4
3 160
6
after 2nd advance.
Considering equality as a reversal, S1max will be obtained for position before second advance (or
after 1st advance). Place loads accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
So, S1max =
y1 = .744,
y2 = 1.2
y4 = 0.592
y5 = 0.288
y3 = 0.896
160 (0.744 + 1.2 + 0.896 + 0.592 + 0.288)
= 595.2 KN (It is a compressive force)

S3max
Inspect the shape of ILD for S3. It resembles with the shape of ILD for moment at D
considering the truss to be a simple beam. So apply the criterion of maximum moment at D.
Portion AD
Portion BD
160
6
<
3 160
4
(last load not on span)
2 160
6
<
3 160
4
After 2nd advance.
3 160
6
2 160
4
After 3rd Advance.
after 1st advance.
So for S3max, position before 3rd advance is valid (After second advance). Place the loads
accordingly and compute influence co-efficients.
y1 = 0.592,
y2 = 0.893,
y4 = 0.744,
y5 = 0.288
y3 = 1.2,
(S3)max = 160 (0.592 + 0.893 + 1.2 + 0.744 + 0.288)

= 594.72 KN (It is a tensile force).
S2max
Inspect the shape of ILD for S2. It resembles with the shape of ILD for as shear force in a
intermediate panel of a panelled girder. So for evaluating S2max, we apply the criterion of maximum
intermediate panel shear. Advance is made at D or F.
W/
d
<
W
L
160
2
5 160
10
after 1st advance.
So for S2max, the leading load should be placed at maximum ordinate, only three loads will be
414
acting on portion BD.

y1 = 0.565
y2 = 0.3503
y3 = 0.1356
(S2)max = 160 ( 0.565 0.3503 0.1356)

= 168.144 KN
(It is a compressive force)
S1max
y1 = y3 = 0.24
y1 = 1
S1max = 160 (0.24 + 1 + 0.24)

= 236.8 KN
(It is a tensile force)
10.19. I nfluence L ines for Statically I ndeter minate Str uctur es:
The same procedure can be adopted for constructing ILDs for indeterminate structures.
However, compatibility and redundants have to be considered as demonstrated earlier.
INFLUENCE LINE DIAGRAM FOR INDETERMINATE BEAMS (By method of virtual displacement)
I nfluence line diagr am for Shear .
In virtual work for shear the B.M. does not do any work only shear force does the work.
Case 1: Let us investigate ILD at a section of a simple beam. The section is at a distance a from A and
at b from B support. This has already been done.
INFLUENCE LINES
415
P = 1.0
a
A
B
c
//
b 2*
2
1
c
*
Ra
Rb
C//
This is ordinate of ILD under load A
b/L
y
*
= 1/L
c
RA
a/L
*
= 1/L
RB
By Vir tual Wor k:

Both the lines are parallel therefore, its work done by Moment is equal to zero.
* 1 = * 2 =
Va * + Vb *
Vir tual Wor k:
(Vir tual displacement)
(i)
total displacement equal to 1 unit.

a* + b* = 1
(ii)
total B.M. equal to zero.

V(a* + b* ) M* + M* Py* = 0
put a + b = 1
V(1 ) Py = 0
*
If we take P = 1
V = y*
Or
1
L
Case 2: I.L.D for bending moment at the same section. Write work equation and equate to zero.
M* 1 + M* 2 Va * 1 + Vb * 2 Py* = 0
416
or
M (* 1 + * 2) 0 Py* = 0
M (* ) = Py*
than
M = y*
So
a* 1 = b* 2
* 1 +
* 2
Py
. If P = 1 and = 1 radian.
or M =
a *
1 = 1
b
a
=
L
Or
* 1 + * 2 = 1
* 1 =
b
L
V
P=1
RA
RB
b
* = 1 rad
C//
yw
y
A
* = a/L
* = b/L
B
C C
a 1* = b 2*
L
c
a
b/L
RA
We have obtained I L D for B.M at X in a simple beam

Let us now consider the shown conjugate beam.
a/L
RB
INFLUENCE LINES
417
2m
4m
1.0 = P
A
Ra
6m
Rc
4m
6m
Rb
6m
Applying same concepts we get following ILD
0.6
0/10
0/10
0/10
0.4
2/40
2/10
418
Consider a propped cantilever

MB
P=1
(L - X)
X
A
RA
RB
If support at A is removed,
this will be deflected shape.
aL
1/3 (L - x)
L-x B.M.D due to load on
BDS as cantilever
supported at B.
Applying moment area thereon, deflection at part A due to loads is

XL =
1
EI
P (l X)2 l 1 (l X)
2
3
fXX
Now consider load under
redundant Ra = 1
(deflected shape) of BDS

Ra = 1
L B.M.D. for Ra = 1
(+)
L /2
L/3
Applying moment area thereon, deflection at A due to Ra = 1

1 1
2l
l3
fXX = EI 2 (l )2 3 = 3EI

Equation for compatibility
al fXX Ra = 0
because A is a support. Net deflection should be zero.
INFLUENCE LINES
Ra =
419
Sal
fxx
Rb = 1 Ra
Ra =
P(l X)2 (2l + X)

after putting values of Sal and fxx
2l 3
(equilibrium requirement)
So we get
Rb =
X(3l 2 X 2)
2l 3
We know
Mb = Ra L P (l x) . Put value of Ra and simplify
Mb =
PX(l 2 X 2)
2l 2
This expression will help in plotted ILD for Mb
I L D for Ra
Mb
P=1
(L - X)
X
A
Ra
Rb
10m
P(l X)2 (2l + X)

2l 3
When X = 0
Ra = 1.0
5
When X = 5
Ra =
16
Ra =
ILD for Ra
(put in above equation for Ra)

(put in above equation for Ra)
3rd-degree curve
1.0
5/16
Simplify ILD for Rb can be plotted as below:

Rb
ILD for Rb
Putting boundary conditions in the Mb expression ILD for Mb is obtained.
1.0
420
3/16 l
Mb =
PX (l - X )
2
2l
I L D for M b
Ral P(l X) + Mb = 0
Mb = 1(l X) Ral
10.20. I L D for shear at Section mn:
Mb
P
X
Load to right of
mn, Vmn = Ra x a
it mean ILD for Vmn
will be same as ILD
for Ra multiplied by
a for this portion
m
A
B
n
Ra
a = 4m
10m
Rb
b = 6m
m
Mb
1.0
Vmn
c
n
Ra
Rb
Load on left of mn
I.L.D. for Ra x a
1.0
Vmn = Rb x b
for this portion, ILD for
Vmn is same is ILD
for Rb x b
(+)
I.L.D. for Ra x b
1.0
10.21. I L D for M mn
Consider a hinge where ILD for moment desired.
P=1
A
10m
6m
INFLUENCE LINES
421
P=1
X
B
Ra
Rb
L1
L2
Rc
P=1
Primary structure or BDS

under load P = 1
and redundant Rb at B.
State-I
Rb
Compatibility equation at point B.

Rb bb Py = 0
P= 1
y
Rb =
bb
y
State-II
Rb = 1.0
P
a
b
1.0
B
y
Rb
l
Ra
l
X
//
bb
Pab
l
B
We know this is ILD for
moment at B in a
simple beam.
PbX
l
//
422
y =
PbX 2
(l b2 X 2)
6EI l
(X = 0 a)
y =
PaX 2
(l a2 X 2)
6EI l
(X = 0 b)
y =
l 2X(l 2 l 22 X 2)
6EI l
bb =
l 2X (l 2 l 22 l 12)
6EI l
bb =
l 12 l 22
3EI l
and
2
2
2
Rb = X (l l21 X )
2l 1 l 2
X = 0 l1
Rb =
with
X (l l X )
(2l l )
2
2
1
2 2
1 2
Origin at A
X = 0 to l 2
Origin at C
INFLUENCE LINES
423
Now assume same values of spans and re-calculate.

P=1
B
L1 = 10m
We know
l1 + l2 = L
L2 = 6m
I.L.D for Rb
1.0
P=1
B
Compatibility at A
Ra aa Py = 0
Ra =
1.0
y
aa
(+)
y
B
1.0
1.0
l2
l
I.L.D. for Ra
Rb =
1.0
X (l 2 l 22 X 2)
(2 l 12 l 2)
X (162 62 X 2)
by putting values of L 1l 1 and l 2
2 102 6
424
Rb
Ra
Rc
0.1825
0.36
0.5275
0.68
0.8125
0.92
0.997
Calculate
Calculate
1.04
yourself
yourself
9
10
0
Calculate
yourself
2
3
4
ILD for Ra can be obtained from ILD for Rb. Taking moments about C is equality to zero.
Ral + Rb l 2 P(l X) = 0
So
and
l X
Rb l 2
l l
Ra = P
Rb =
(l 1 X)
(2l 1 l l 1 X X 2)
2l 12 l
INFLUENCE LINES
425
Ma
Mb
P = 1.0
B
(L - X)
Ra
Ma
Rb
Mb
B State-I
Ra
Rb
1.0
At fixed support,
a = 0
A
4EI
aa
y
B State-II
1.0
2EI
4EI
(-)
l
2EI
(+)
1 rad
1 rad
BDS under
redundant
moment.
424
CHAPTER EL EVEN
11. THREE HI NGED ARCHES
These are Curved Structures which are in use since ancient times. These were mostly used in
buildings and the abatements used to be very thick. As our analysis capacity increased due to faster
computers, it is now possible to understand behaviour of arches for various support, load and material
conditions. These days arch bridges either in Reinforced concrete or the pre-stressed concrete are
becoming a common sight due to asthetics of curved surfaces.
Arches when loaded by gravity loads, exhibit appreciable compressive stresses. At supports,
horizontal reaction (thrust) is also developed which reduces the bending moment in the arch.
Aches can be built in stone, masonry, reinforced concrete and steel. They can have a variety of
end conditions like three hinged arches, two hinged arches and find arches. Considering the geometry
these can be segmental, parabolic and circular. An arch under gravity loads generally exhibits three
structural actions at any cross-section within span including shear force, bending moment and axial
compressive force. The slope of centerline of arch keeps on varying along span so above mentioned
three structural actions also vary along span.
11.1. Eddy s theor em:
The bending moment at any point on the arch is the difference between simple span bending
moment and product Hy .
Where H is the horizontal thrust at supports (springings), y is the rise of arch at a distance X
from the origin.
Shape of simple span bending moment diagram due to applied loads is also called linear arch.
Hy may also be termed as equation of centerline of actual arch multiplied by a constant (H).
Consider the following arch carrying the loads P1, P2 and P3. The shaded area is the BMD.
P2
P3
P1
y
H
linear arch
Hy
B
X
Va
Bending moment at X is
M X = VaX Hy P1(X a)
M X = X Hy. (Eddy s theorem)
given arch y
Vb
THREE HINGED ARCHES
425
Where z = Va x P1(X a) = Simple span bending moment considering the arch to be a

simple beam.
The inclined axial force (normal thrust) also contributes towards vertical shear force in addition
to applied loads and reactions.
11.2. Thr ee-hinged ar ch:
If an arch contains three hinges such that two hinges are at the supports and the third one anywhere
within span, it is called a three hinged arch. This type of arch is statically determinate wherein reactions,
horizontal thrust and all internal structural actions can be easily determined by using the laws of equilibrium
and statics. If the third hinge is provided at the highest point, it is called crown of the arch.
Consider a three hinged arch with third hinge at the crown, then
C
M X = X Hy (1) becomes at center

A
Mc = c Hyc = 0
SO H =
c
Yc
(2)
P 2
Cutting the arch as shown, and projecting forces

along axis 11 and 22 and putting V = V a P1
we have.
H
I
P = H Cos + VSin
(3) along 11
Q = H Sin Vcos
(4) along 2 2
Va
11.3. Par abolic Ar ch

If a three-hinged parabolic arch carries udl over its span, the arch will carry pure compression
and no SF or BM. This is because the shape of linear arch (BMD due to loads) will be the same as shape
of actual arch.
For a parabolic arch having origin at either of springings, the equation of centre line of arch at
a distance X from origin where rise is y will be.
y = C.X (L X)
at X =
L
, y = yc. we get
2
Y c = C.
So
y =
(5) constant C will be evaluated from boundary conditions.
L L
.
2 2
or
4 yc
. X (L X)
L2
C=
(6)
4 yc
L2
426
The slope can be calculated from

dy
4 yc
= tan =
(L 2X)
dX
L2
(7)
11.4. Cir cular Ar ch:

If arch is a part of Circle, it is convenient to have origin at the centre.
C
Consider triangle OEF
E
F
OE2 = EF2 + OF2

y
Or
R2 = X 2 + (R yc + y)2
(8)
and we also have from triangle ADO

L2
+ (R yc)2 = R2
4
L2
yc (2R yc) =
4
L
R
(9)
As span and central rise are usually known, Radius

of arch R can be calculated from (9)
Equation (8) can bge written as y =
R2 X 2 (R yc)
Now once the basic equations for parabolic and circular arches have been established, let us
solve some numericals.
EXAM PL E NO. 1
Analyze a three-hinged arch of span 20m and a central rise of 4m. It is loaded by udl of 50
KN/m over its left half. Calculate maximum positive and negative moments if
(i)
The arch is parabolic
(ii)
The arch is circular

50 KN/m
SOL UTI ON: 1. Ar ch is Par abolic
Ma = 0
Vb 20 = 50 10 5
y
Vb =
2500
= 125 KN
20
V a + V b = 50 10 = 500 KN
So V a = 500 V b = 500 125
= 375 KN
4m
H=312.5
B
X
Ra
Va=375
20
Vb=125
H=312.5
THREE HINGED ARCHES
427
c 125 10
=
= 312.5 KN
yc
4
H=
and
H = 312.5 KN
Ra =
Va2 + H2
3752 + 312.52 =
=
=
a = 50.19o
15625 + 97656.25
Rb =
113281.25 = 336.57 KN
Vb
125
=
= 0.4
H
312.5
b = 21.800
M aximum positive M oment

It is expected in portion AC. Write generalize M X expression.
Now y =
1252 + 312.52
Rb =
Tanb =
Va
375
=
= 1.2
H
312.5
M X = 375X
Vb2 + H2=
140625 + 9765.25
238281.25 = 488.14 KN
Tana =
Rb =
50X 2
312.5y
2
4yc
44
(L X) =
X(20 X) = 0.04 (20X X 2)
202
L2
y = 0.8 0.04X 2
So
M X = 375X 25X 2 312.5 [0.8X 0.04X 2]
= 375X 25X 2 250X + 12.5X 2
Simplifying
M X = 125X 12.5X 2
dM X
= V X = 0 = 125 25X
dX
X = 5m from A. Putting Value of X in M X expression above.
So
M max = 125 5 12.5 52
= 625 312.5
M max = 312.5 KN-m
M aximum negative moment:
It would occur in portion BC at a distance x from B.
M X = 125X 312.5y
Putting equation of y.
= 125X 312.5 (0.8X 0.04X 2)

M X = 125X 250X + 12.5X 2
M X = 125X + 12.5X 2
dMx
= V X = 0 = 125 + 25X
dX
428
X = 5m from B.
So putting value of X in M X expression above.
M max = 125 5 + 12.5(5)2
= 625 + 312.5
M max = 312.5 KNm
SOL UTI ON: Considering Circular Arch
EXAM PL E NO.2: Now or Solve the following loaded thr ee hinged Cir cular Ar ch
50 KN/m
C
y
4m
H=312.5
H=312.5
20m
Va=375
Vb=125
Step 1. Reactions:
As before reactions are same.
Step 2. Equation of Cir cular Ar ch
The general equation is (X h)2 + (y k)2 = r 2
h and k are co-ordinates at the centre and r is radius of Circle. There are three unknown in
above equation, Viz, h, k and r and these can be determined from the following boundary conditions.
Origin is at point A.
Boundar y conditions
1.
At X = 0,
y= 0
It gives
(h)2 + (k)2 = r 2
h2 + k2 = r 2
2.
At X= 20,
y= 0
It gives
(1)
(20 h) + (k2) = r 2
2
400 + h2 40h + k2 = r 2
3.
At X= 10,
Y= 4
It gives
(10 h) + (4 k) = r
2
(2)
100 + h2 20h + 16 + k2 8k = r 2
116 + h2 20h + k2 8k = r 2
Subtract (1) from (2)
400 40h = 0
Or
h = 10
we get
(3)
THREE HINGED ARCHES
429
Put value of h in (1) and 3
or
100 + k2 = r 2
(1)
116 + 100 200 + k2 8k = r 2
(3)
16 + k2 8k = r 2 (3)
16 + k2 8k = 100 + k2 (by putting Value of r 2 from 1)
8k = 16 100 = 84
k=
84
= 10.5
8
Putting k = 10.5 in (3) we get

r 2 = 16 + ( 10.5)2 + 8 x 10.5
= 16 + 110.25 + 84 = 210.25
So
r = 14.5 meters.
Putting Values of h, k and r in general equation, we get
(X 10)2 + (y + 10.5)2 = 14.52 Simplify it, we get.
y = 10.5 +
14.52 (X 10)2
(y + 10.5)2 = 14.52 (X 10)2

= 10.5 +
y = 10.5 +
210.25 X 2 100 + 20X

110.25 X 2 + 20X
We know, yc (2r yc) =
(4)
L
4
(5)
and
2
y=
r2
L X (r yc)
2
(6)
These equations are same as were

used in derivation earlier.
Alternatively to avoid evaluation of constants each time, equations (5) and (6) can be used.
Equation (6) is the equation of Centre-line of Circular arch.
Step 3: Calculation of Maximum moment.
Maximum positive moment occurs in span AC. Write M X expression
50X 2
312.5 y
2
put y from (4) above.
= 375X 25X 2 312.5 10.5 +
110.25 X 2 + 20X
M X = 375X 25X 2 + 3281.25 312.5
110.25 X 2 + 20X
M X = 375X
430
Now maximum moment occurs where shear force is zero. So

dM X
312.5 ( 2X + 20)
= V X = 375 50X
= 0
dX
2 110.25 X 2 + 20X
312.5 (X + 10)
110.25 X 2 + 20X
375 50X =
7.5 X =
6.25 (10 X)
110.25 X 2 + 20X
X 7.5 =
6.25 (X 10)
110.25 X 2 + 20X
(X 7.5)
divide by 50
multiply by 1,
We get
110.25 X 2 + 20X = 6.25 (X 10)
(X 7.5) (110.25 X + 20X) = 6.25 (X 10)

2
square both sides

2
Simplify
(X 2 15X + 56.25) (110.25 X 2 + 20X) = 39.0625 (X 2 20X + 100)

or
110.25X 2 X 4 + 20X 3 1653.75X + 15X 3 300X 2 = 39.0625X 2 781.25X + 3906.25

+ 6201.56 56.25X 2 + 1125X
Simplifying
X 4 + 35X 3 285.0625X 2 + 252.5X + 2295.3125 = 0
X 4 35X 3 + 285.0625X 2 252.5X 2295.3125 = 0
or
Now it is considered appropriate to solve this equation by Modified Newton Raphson iteration
solutions which in general is
X n+ 1 = X n +
f (xn)
f / (X n)
(A)
So f (X) = X 4 35X 3 + 285.0625X 2 252.5X 2295.3125

And differentiate,
f / (X) = 4X 3 105X 2 + 570.125X 252.5
In general, it is recommended that first root X n should be always taken at 1 because it

converges very fast. However, knowing that B. M will be maximum near the middle of portion AC, we
take X n = 2 (to reduce number of iterations possibly) and solve in the following tabular form. Evaluate
f(X) and f / (X n) expressions.
Iteration Number
Xn
f(X n)
f / (X n)
X n+ 1 from A above
1924.06
499.75
5.85
5.85
147.251
290.1629
5.3425
5.3425
30.3142
406.3845
5.417
5.417
0.58794
390.546
5.418
THREE HINGED ARCHES
431
So we get X n and X n + 1 as same after 4th iteration.

So X = 5.418 m
put this in MX expressions
M max = 375 (5.418) 25 (5.418)2 + 3281.25 312.5
110.25 5.4182 + 20 5.418
= 280.066 KN-m
M aximum negative moment in the ar ch

Let us assume that it occurs in portion BC at a distance X from A (10 < X < 20)
M X = 125 (20 X) 312.5 ( 10.5 +
= 2500 125X + 3281.25 312.5
or
M X = 5781.25 125X 312.5
110.25 X 2 + 20X )
Simplify
110.25 X 2 + 20X
110.25 X 2 + 20X
Maximum moment occurs where SF is zero, So differentiate M X expression w.r.t. X.

312.5 ( 2X + 20)
dM X
= 0 = 125
dX
2 110.25 X 2 + 20X
or
0 = 125
125
+ 312.5(X 10)
110.25 X 2 + 20X
110.25 X 2 + 20X = 312.5 (X 10) squaring both sides. We have,
15625 (110.25 X 2 + 20X) = 97656.25 (X 2 20X + 100) Simplify

110.25 X 2 + 20X = 6.25 (X 2 20X + 100)
= 7.25X 2 145X + 514.75
0
X 2 20X + 71 = 0
X=
X=
20
dividing by 7.25
Solve this quadretic equation.
400 284
2
20 10.77
= 15.385m from A
2
Put this value of X in M X expression above.
So M max = 5781.25 125 15.385 312.5
110.25 (15.385)2 + 20 (15.385)
= 5781.25 1923.125 312.5 181.257 = 349.115KN.m
432
11.5. Der ivation for center -line of a par abolic ar ch with suppor ts at differ ent levels.
C
yc
A
B
X
L/2
L/2
The general form of a parabola is

y = aX 2 + bX + c
Evaluate constants a, b and c by putting boundary conditions in above equation
At X = o;
Y = o, (Point B)
So C = o
(1)
At X = L;
Y = h, (Point A)
So h = aL 2 + bL
(2)
At X =
L
;
2
Y = yc + h, (Point C)
h = aL 2 + bL
So yc + h =
aL 2 bL
+
(3) multiply by 4
2
4
(2)
Equation (3) can also be written as

4(yc + h) = aL 2 + 2bL
h 4(yc + h) = bL
(3)
Subtract (3) from (2), we have

or
b=
4
h
(yc + h)
L
L
Put this value of b in (2) and solve for a

h = aL 2 + 4 (yc + h) h
a=
2 h 4yc
L2
or a =
2 h 4(yc + h)
)
L2
THREE HINGED ARCHES
433
Now all constant have been evaluated in general terms. Put Values of a, b and c in general
equation; we have
2X 2 (h + 2yc)
X (4yc + 3h)
+
. This is the generalized equation for a parabolic arch
2
L
L
with supports at different levels. Test this derived equation and see whether boundary conditions are
satisfied.
y =
At X = o;
y = o, put this in above equation. It is satisfied
At X = L,
y = h, put this in above equation. It is satisfied
L
At X = ,
y = h + yc, put this in above equation. It is also satisfied.
2
If supports are at the same level, h = o Put this in above equation, we get
4ycX 2 4 ycX
4ycX
y=
+
or y =
(L X), after simplification.
L2
L
L2
dy
4yc
= 2 (L 2X)
dX
L
These two equations have already been used. Now we solve some Example.
and
EXAM PL E NO.3:Solve the following 3 hinged parabolic loaded arch with supports at different levels as shown.
40 KN/m
C
yc = 9m
h = 3m
Va
B
H
yc is the distance between hinges at A and C.
45m
45m
Vb
Fy = 0
V A + V b = 40 (45) = 1800 KN
Mc = O , VA (45) 9 H 40 (45)
45 = 0
2
(1)
(2)
Moments at C of forces on its left.
Moment at C of forces on its right
45V A 9H 40500
= 0
45V b 12H
= 0
(3)
= 0
(2)
Divide Equation (2) by 9

5VA H 4500
434
Multiply this Equation by 12 and subtract equation (3) from it.

60 V A 12H 54000
= 0
(2)
45V B 12H
= 0
(3)
_______________________________
60 V A 54000 45V B
= 0
(4)
Multiply Equation (1) by 45 and add in equation (4)

45V A + 45V B
= 81000
60 V A 45V B
= 54000
(1)
Adding we get.
105 V A
or
so
We know,
H
= 135000
135000
105
VA
VA
= 1285.7 KN
VB
= 514.3 KN
45V B 12H
= 0
put this value in equation (1)
(3)
from this
45 V B
12
= 1928.63 KN
H
(after putting value of V b)
= 1928.63 KN
New calculate (M ac)max and (M bc)max

Keeping B as origin
at a distance X from B in portion AC moment expression is

40
(M ac) = Va (90 X) H(y)
(90 X)2
2
X (4yc + 3h) 2X 2 (3 + 18)
y=
. This equation was derived in previous article.

L
902
If h
= 3m , y
X
7X 2
2
1350
(M ac) = 1285.7 (90 X) 1928.63
(A)
If h = 0 ,
y = 0.4X
X2
225
0.4X X 20 (90 X)2 (i)

225
after putting values of h and yc in above equation for y.

= 115713 1285.7X 771.45X + 8.57X 2 20 (8100 + X 2 180X)
dMac
dX
= 0
= 1285.7 771.45 + 17.14X 40X + 3600 Simplify
= + 1542.85 22.86X
= 1542.85/22.86 = 67.5m (This value should be more than 45)
(B)
THREE HINGED ARCHES
435
Putting this Value in Equation (i)

= 1285.7 (22.5) 1928.63 (27 20.25) 20 (22.5)2
(Mac)max
= 5785 KN-m
(M bc)max = 514.3X 1928.63 y . Moment at a distance X from B.
= 514.3X 1928.63
X 7X (After putting equation for y) and values

2 1350
2
of yc, h and L and using equation A.

= 514.3X 964.315X + 10X 2
dM bc
=
dX
0 = 514.3 964.315 + 20X

= 20X = 450
X = 22.5m
, M bc = 5062.68 KNm (after putting value of X above)
11.6. Development of Gener alized equation of thr ee hinged cir cular ar ch with suppor t at differ ent
levels.
C
yc=9m
y = 3m
B
X
L/2 = 45
L/2 = 45
General Equation of Circle is

(X h)2 + (y k)2 = R2
at X = 0, y = 0
~ h2 + k2 = R2 (1)
at X = 45 , y = yc + = 12
Putting
(45 h)2 + (12 k)2 = R2
Simplifying it.
2025 90h + h2 + 144 24k + k2
= R2
436

2025 + 144 90h 24k + h2 + k2
2169 90h 24k + h2 + k2
at X = 90 , y = 3
= R2
(2)
= R2
(2)
Simplifying
[ point A ]
(90 h)2 + (3 k)2 = R2
Simplifying
Put these values, 8100 180h + h + 9 + k 6k = R2

2
8109 180h 6k + h2 + k2 = R3
(3)
Equating (1) with (2) and multiply resulting equation by 2 and then equation (1) and (3)
2 [2169 90h 24k = 0]
~ (4)
8109 180h 6k = 0
~ (5)
or 4338 180h 48k = 0
Subtract (4) from (5), we have

3771 + 42k
= 0
3771
42
= 89.79
Put in Eq (4)
2169 90h 24 ( 89.79) = 0

h =
4323.86
90
h = 48.04
Now from (1)
(48.04)2 + (89.79)2 = R2
R
= 101.83m
Now write equation of center-line of arch.

R2 (X h)2 + k
y=
(101.83)2 (X 48.04)2 + ( 89.79)
=
y =
(10369.35 X 2 2307.84 + 96.08X) 89.79
Point B: At X = 0 , y = 0
(see diagram now)
Point C: At X = 45 , y = 12
Point A: At X = 90 , y = 3
So Eq ,(A) has been correctly derived.
(A)
(4)
THREE HINGED ARCHES
437
EXAM PL E NO. 4: Calculate maximum moments in portion AC & BC for the following 3-hinged
loaded Circular each.
40 KN/m
C
1928.63
9m
3m
1285.7
1928.63
X
514.3
SOL UTI ON: Reactions will be same as Previous.

1. Calculation of (Mac)max.
Write moment expression for use previously developed equation. Consider forces on left of section.
M X = 1285.7 (90 X)
40
(90 X)2 1928.63 ( 10369.35 X 2 2307.84 + 96.08X 89.79)
2
M X = 1157131285.7X20(8100180X+ X 2)+ 173171.71928.63 (10369.35X 22307.84+ 96.08X)
M X = 126884.69 20X 2 + 2314.3X 1928.63 (8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X)- (B) differentiate w.r.t.

964.315 (2X + 96.08)
dM X
= 0 = 40X + 2314.3
dX
(8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X)
(40X 2314.3) (8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X) = 964.315 (2X 96.08)
(40X 2314.3)2 (806151 X 2 + 96.08X) = [1928.63 (X 48.04)] 2
Squaring and simplifying, we get.

(1600X 2+ (2314.3)2185144X) (8061.51X 2+ 96.08X)= 1928.6322 (X 2+ 2307.8496.08X) Simplifying
1298416X 2 1600X 4 + 153728X 3 + 4.32 1010 5355984.5X 2 + 514602989.8X
1.49254021109X+ 185144X 317.78863106X 2= 3719613.68X 2+ 8.5843109357380482.1X
13965812.2X 2 1600X 4 + 338872X 3 620556738X + 3.46157 1010= 0
8728.63X 2 + X 4 211.8X 3 + 387848X 2163412.5 = 0
f(X) = X 4 211.8X 3 + 8728.63X 2 + 387848X 21634812.5
differentiate it.
f / (X) = 4X 3 635.4X 2 + 17457.26X + 387848

To cut-short, Let X = 55 (Because it is portion AC and X has to be more than 45)
Simplifying
438
So

f(X) = (55)4 211.8 (55)3 + 8728.63 (55)2 + 387848 (55) 21634812.5
= 1333.25
f / (X) = 4(55)3 635.4(55)2 + 17457.26(55) + 387848
= 91412.3
Xn
= 55
fx
= X n+ 1
f / (x)
13333.25
91412.3
= 55 0.146
= 54.85
Now X = 54.85
(use this update value now)
f(X) = 560.16
f / (X) = 93833.35
X n+ 1
= Xn
f(n)
f / (n)
= 54.85
X n+ 1 or
(560.16)
93833.35
X = 54.855969.
The value of X has converged now.
Putting this value of X in Equation B to find (Mac)max

(Mac)max = 126884.69 20 (54.855969)2 + 2314.3 (54.855969)
1928.63 (8061.51 (54.855969)2 + 96.08 54.855969)
(Mac)max = 193552.7 KNm
(M bc)max. Wor king on similar lines (M bc)max can be calculated now.
MX
= 514.3X 1928.63 y
putting equation of center line of arch y.
= 514.3X 1928.63 [ 10369.35 X 2 2307.84 + 96.08X 89.79]

1928.63
(2X + 96.08)
dM X
= 0 = 514.3
= 0
2
dX
(10369.35 X 2 2307.84 + 96.08X)
or
514.3 +
1928.63 (X 48.04)
= 0 ,
(8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X)
514.3 (8061.51 X2 + 96.08X)1/2 = 1928.63 (X 48.04)

Squaring both sides of equation.
264504.5 [ (8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X)1/2] 2 = [1928.63 (X 48.04)] 2
we get.
(C)
THREE HINGED ARCHES
439
264504.5 (8061.51 X 2 + 96.08X) = (1928.63)2(X 2 + 2307.84 96.08X) Simplifying

2132305672 264504.5X 2 + 25413592.36X= 3719613.68X 2 + 8584273228 357380482.1X
6451967556 3984118.18X 2 + 382794074.1
X 2 + 96.08X 1619.422 = 0
or
X 96.08X + 1619.422 = 0
2
on further simplification, we get

(after dividing by 3984118.18)
solving this quadretic equation where.
a = 1, b = 96.08, C = 1619.422
X =
X =
=
X =
b2 4ac
2a
96.08
(96.08)2 4(1) (1619.422)

2
96.08 52.47
2
96.08 + 52.47
96.08 52.47
Or
2
2
= 74.24 or 1.80
Therefore, (X = 74.24 is not applicable so not accepted as a root.
X = 21.80m
Put this value of X in equation (C), we have (Mbc)max.
Putting in (c)
(Mbc)max = 514.3X 1928.63
10369.35 X 2 2307.84 + 96.08X + 173171.69
= 11211.74 189698.0911 + 173171.69

= 5314.67 KN-m
We have solved some representative problems. Using the guidance given in this chapter a
student should be able to solve any problem on three hinged parabolic or circular arches, whether
supports are at the same level or not.

Syed Ali Rizwan Structure Book PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Syed Ali Rizwan Structure Book PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

With respect to reactions, i.e. external stability and determinacy.

With respect to members, i.e. internal stability and determinacy.

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

1.4.1. EXTERNAL INDETERMINACY:

Fig. 1.1. Stable & determinate.

Fig. 1.2. Stable & determinate.

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Stable & Indeterminate to Ist degree. (Fig. 1.5)

Stable & externally indeterminate to 5th degree. (Fig. 1.6)

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

Stable & internally determinate. Check the arrangement of

Stable & internally indeterminate.

(Minimum external reactions required for external stability/determinacy)

This truss of fig. 1.8 is stable and internally determinate.

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

The truss of fig. 1.9 is stable and internally determinate.

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

b = Total number of bars.

External Stability And Determinacy:Number of reactive components available = 2

Unstable. (Visible also)

Internal Stability And Determinacy

Stable and Internally Determinate, if arrangement is improved to have = 3.

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Number of equations of equilibrium available = 3 + 2 = 5

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

External Stability and Determinacy :4

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 21

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 3

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 38

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 3

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 54

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 12

Stable and Internally Indeterminate to twelfth degree. (Fig. 1.20)

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Example No. 10:

External Stability and Determinacy :-

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 6

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 10

Example No. 12:

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 2

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Example No. 13:

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 4

Example No. 14:

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 6

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 43

Stable and Determinate. (Fig. 1.25)

Example No. 15:

External Stability and Determinacy :Number of reactions = 8

Stable and Determinate.

Internal Stability and Determinacy :b = 42

Stable and Determinate.

STABILITY, DETERMINACY OF STRUCTURES AND CONSISTENT DEFORMATIONS METHOD

Example No. 16:

External Stability and Determinacy :-

THEORY OF INDETERMINATE STRUCTURES

Signs of Change of Slope:-